Haier R410A 0000001653 User Manual To The Fafb00f1 4123 49b3 A856 717a53959ad0

User Manual: Haier R410A to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 414

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Safety Precautions
Before installing the unit, thoroughly read the following safety precautions.
Observe these safety precautions for your safety.

WARNING
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid
the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid
the risk of serious injury or damage to the unit.

After reading this manual, give it to the user to retain for future reference.
Keep this manual for easy reference. When the unit is moved or repaired, give this manual to those who provide these
services.
When the user changes, make sure that the new user receives this manual.

WARNING

Ask your dealer or a qualified technician to install the
unit.

In the event of a refrigerant leak, thoroughly ventilate
the room.

Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.

If refrigerant gas leaks and comes in contact with an open
flame, poisonous gases will be produced.

Properly install the unit on a surface that can withstand the weight of the unit.

When installing the All-Fresh type units, take it into
consideration that the outside air may be discharged
directly into the room when the thermo is turned off.

Unit installed on an unstable surface may fall and cause injury.

Direct exposure to outdoor air may have an adverse effect
on health. It may also result in food spoilage.

Only use specified cables. Securely connect each cable so that the terminals do not carry the weight of the
cable.

Properly install the unit according to the instructions
in the installation manual.

Improperly connected or fixed cables may produce heat
and start a fire.

Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.
Have all electrical work performed by an authorized
electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual, and a dedicated circuit must
be used.

Take appropriate safety measures against strong
winds and earthquakes to prevent the unit from falling.
If the unit is not installed properly, the unit may fall and
cause serious injury to the person or damage to the unit.

Insufficient capacity of the power supply circuit or improper
installation may result in malfunctions of the unit, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Do not make any modifications or alterations to the
unit. Consult your dealer for repair.
Improper repair may result in water leakage, electric shock,
smoke, and/or fire.
Do not touch the heat exchanger fins.
The fins are sharp and dangerous.

HWE09080

i

GB

WARNING

Securely attach the terminal block cover (panel) to the
unit.

After completing the service work, check for a gas
leak.

If the terminal block cover (panel) is not installed properly,
dust and/or water may infiltrate and pose a risk of electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

If leaked refrigerant is exposed to a heat source, such as a
fan heater, stove, or electric grill, poisonous gases may be
produced.

Only use the type of refrigerant that is indicated on the
unit when installing or reinstalling the unit.

Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit.

Infiltration of any other type of refrigerant or air into the unit
may adversely affect the refrigerant cycle and may cause
the pipes to burst or explode.

Forced operation of the pressure switch or the temperature
switch by defeating the safety features of these devices, or
the use of accessories other than the ones that are recommended by MITSUBISHI may result in smoke, fire, and/or
explosion.

When installing the unit in a small room, exercise caution and take measures against leaked refrigerant
reaching the limiting concentration.

Only use accessories recommended by MITSUBISHI.
Ask a qualified technician to install the unit. Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Consult your dealer with any questions regarding limiting
concentrations and for precautionary measures before installing the unit. Leaked refrigerant gas exceeding the limiting concentration causes oxygen deficiency.

Control box houses high-voltage parts.
When opening or closing the front panel of the control box,
do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,
turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on
INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about
10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is
turned off.)

Consult your dealer or a specialist when moving or reinstalling the unit.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric
shock, and/or fire.

HWE09080

ii

GB

Precautions for handling units for use with R410A
CAUTION

Do not use the existing refrigerant piping.

Use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.

A large amount of chlorine that is contained in the residual
refrigerant and refrigerator oil in the existing piping may
cause the refrigerator oil in the new unit to deteriorate.
R410A is a high-pressure refrigerant and can cause the
existing pipes to burst.

If a vacuum pump that is not equipped with a reverse-flow
check valve is used, the vacuum pump oil may flow into the
refrigerant cycle and cause the refrigerating machine oil to
deteriorate.

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized
copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes
clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides,
dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.

Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A. Do not use
the following tools if they have been used with the conventional refrigerant (gauge manifold, charging hose,
gas leak detector, reverse-flow check valve, refrigerant
charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery
equipment.).

These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes
may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.

If the refrigerant or the refrigerating machine oil left on
these tools are mixed in with R410A, it may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.
Infiltration of water may cause the refrigerating machine
oil to deteriorate.
Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not
detect an R410A leak because R410A is free of chlorine.

Store the pipes to be installed indoors, and keep both
ends of the pipes sealed until immediately before brazing. (Keep elbows and other joints wrapped in plastic.)
Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system
may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate or
cause the unit to malfunction.

Do not use a charging cylinder.
If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of the refrigerant will change, and the unit may experience power loss.

Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges.
Infiltration of a large amount of mineral oil may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Exercise special care when handling the tools for use
with R410A.
Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system
may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and
may result in performance loss.

HWE09080

Only use refrigerant R410A.
The use of other types of refrigerant that contain chlorine
(i.e. R22) may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

iii

GB

Before installing the unit
WARNING

Do not install the unit where a gas leak may occur.

When installing the unit in a hospital, take appropriate
measures to reduce noise interference.

If gaseous refrigerant leaks and piles up around the unit, it
may be ignited.

High-frequency medical equipment may interfere with the
normal operation of the air conditioner or vice versa.

Do not use the unit to keep food items, animals, plants,
artifacts, or for other special purposes.

Do not install the unit on or over things that cannot get
wet.

The unit is not designed to preserve food products.

When the humidity level exceeds 80% or if the drainage
system is clogged, the indoor unit may drip water. Drain water is also discharged from the heat source unit. Install a
centralized drainage system if necessary.

Do not use the unit in an unusual environment.
Do not install the unit where a large amount of oil or steam
is present or where acidic or alkaline solutions or chemical
sprays are used frequently. Doing so may lead to a remarkable drop in performance, electric shock, malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire.
The presence of organic solvents or corrosive gas (i.e.
ammonia, sulfur compounds, and acid) may cause gas
leakage or water leakage.

HWE09080

iv

GB

Before installing the unit (moving and reinstalling the unit) and performing
electrical work
CAUTION

Properly ground the unit.

Periodically check the installation base for damage.

Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe,
lightning rod, or grounding wire from a telephone pole. Improper grounding may result in electric shock, smoke, fire,
and/or malfunction due to noise interference.

If the unit is left on a damaged platform, it may fall and
cause injury.
Properly install the drain pipes according to the instructions in the installation manual. Keep them insulated to avoid dew condensation.

Do not put tension on the power supply wires.
If tension is put on the wires, they may break and result in
excessive heat, smoke, and/or fire.

Improper plumbing work may result in water leakage and
damage to the furnishings.

Install an earth leakage breaker to avoid the risk of
electric shock.

Exercise caution when transporting products.
Products weighing more than 20 kg should not be carried
alone.
Do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on
some products.
Do not touch the heat exchanger fins. They are sharp and
dangerous.
When lifting the unit with a crane, secure all four corners
to prevent the unit from falling.

Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in
electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.
Use the kind of power supply wires that are specified
in the installation manual.
The use of wrong kind of power supply wires may result in
current leak, electric shock, and/or fire.

Properly dispose of the packing materials.

Use breakers and fuses (current breaker, remote
switch , moulded case circuit
breaker) with the proper current capacity.

Nails and wood pieces in the package may pose a risk of
injury.
Plastic bags may pose a risk of choking hazard to children. Tear plastic bags into pieces before disposing of
them.

The use of wrong capacity fuses, steel wires, or copper
wires may result in malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire.
Do not spray water on the air conditioner or immerse
the air conditioner in water.
Otherwise, electric shock and/or fire may result.
When handling units, always wear protective gloves to
protect your hands from metal parts and high-temperature parts.

HWE09080

v

GB

Before the test run
CAUTION

Turn on the unit at least 12 hours before the test run.

Do not operate the unit without panels and safety
guards.

Keep the unit turned on throughout the season. If the unit is
turned off in the middle of a season, it may result in malfunctions.

Rotating, high-temperature, or high-voltage parts on the unit
pose a risk of burns and/or electric shock.

To avoid the risk of electric shock or malfunction of the
unit, do not operate switches with wet hands.

Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping
the operation.
Keep the unit on for at least five minutes before turning off
the power to prevent water leakage or malfunction.

Do not touch the refrigerant pipes with bare hands during and immediately after operation.

Do not operate the unit without the air filter.

During or immediately after operation, certain parts of the
unit such as pipes and compressor may be either very cold
or hot, depending on the state of the refrigerant in the unit
at the time. To reduce the risk of frost bites and burns, do
not touch these parts with bare hands.

HWE09080

Dust particles may build up in the system and cause malfunctions.

vi

GB

CONTENTS
I Read Before Servicing
[1] Read Before Servicing.............................................................................................................. 3
[2] Necessary Tools and Materials ................................................................................................ 4
[3] Piping Materials ........................................................................................................................ 5
[4] Storage of Piping ...................................................................................................................... 7
[5] Pipe Processing........................................................................................................................ 7
[6] Brazing...................................................................................................................................... 8
[7] Air Tightness Test..................................................................................................................... 9
[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) .................................................................................................. 10
[9] Refrigerant Charging .............................................................................................................. 12
[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak............................................................ 12
[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ............................................ 13
[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil...................................................................................... 14

II Restrictions
[1] System configuration .............................................................................................................. 17
[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables .................................................................. 18
[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings .................................................................................... 19
[4] Sample System Connection ................................................................................................... 26
[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected ........................... 27
[6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected ........................... 49
[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and
ME Remote Controller are connected .................................................................................... 53
[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length.................................................................................................... 58

III Heat source Unit Components
[1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit........................................................... 75
[2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit ....................................................................................... 78
[3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board ............................................................................................... 81
[4] BC Controller Components..................................................................................................... 88
[5] Control Box of the BC Controller ............................................................................................ 91
[6] BC Controller Circuit Board .................................................................................................... 92

IV Remote Controller
[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers .......................................... 97
[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller .................................... 98
[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller .................................................................. 102
[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller........................................ 103

V Electrical Wiring Diagram
[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit................................................................ 107
[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller..................................................................... 111
[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster.............................................................. 120

VI Refrigerant Circuit
[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram .................................................................................................. 123
[2] Principal Parts and Functions ............................................................................................... 126

VII Control
[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches .............................................................. 137
[2] Controlling the Heat source Unit........................................................................................... 143
[3] Controlling BC Controller ...................................................................................................... 160
[4] Operation Flow Chart............................................................................................................ 161

VIII Test Run Mode
[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run................................................................................ 175
[2] Test Run Method .................................................................................................................. 176
[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount................................................................ 177
[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount......................................................................................... 177
[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode.......................................................................................... 182
[6] The following symptoms are normal. .................................................................................... 186
[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ......................................................................... 187

HWE09080

GB

CONTENTS
IX Troubleshooting
[1] Error Code Lists.................................................................................................................... 227
[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller........................................................ 230
[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise ............................................................... 303
[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts............................................................................................ 306
[5] Refrigerant Leak ................................................................................................................... 343
[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions................................................................................. 347
[7] Servicing the BC controller ................................................................................................... 353
[8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display .......................................... 356

X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board
[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ...................................................................... 359

HWE09080

GB

I Read Before Servicing
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]

HWE09080

Read Before Servicing ....................................................................................................... 3
Necessary Tools and Materials.......................................................................................... 4
Piping Materials ................................................................................................................. 5
Storage of Piping ............................................................................................................... 7
Pipe Processing ................................................................................................................. 7
Brazing............................................................................................................................... 8
Air Tightness Test .............................................................................................................. 9
Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) ........................................................................................... 10
Refrigerant Charging........................................................................................................ 12
Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak ....................................................... 12
Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ....................................... 13
Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil ................................................................................. 14

-1-

GB

-2-

[ I Read Before Servicing ]
I Read Before Servicing

[1] Read Before Servicing
1. Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced.
Refrigerant Type
Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI WY/WR2 THMU-A/YHMU-A series: R410A
2. Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced.
Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle.

3. Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual.
4. Preparing necessary tools: Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant.
Refer to "Necessary Tools and Materials" for information on the use of tools.(page 4)
5. Verification of the connecting pipes: Verify the type of refrigerant used for the unit to be moved or replaced.
Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free
of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.
These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.
6. If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame, a poisonous gas
hydrofluoric acid may form. Keep workplace well ventilated.

CAUTION

Install new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit.
The use of refrigerant that contains chloride, such as R22, will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

HWE09080

-3-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[2] Necessary Tools and Materials
Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit.
Tools for use with R410A (Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C)
1. To be used exclusively with R410A (not to be used if used with R22 or R407C)
Tools/Materials

Use

Notes

Gauge Manifold

Evacuation and refrigerant charging

Higher than 5.09MPa[738psi] on the
high-pressure side

Charging Hose

Evacuation and refrigerant charging

The hose diameter is larger than the
conventional model.

Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder

Refrigerant recovery

Refrigerant Cylinder

Refrigerant charging

The refrigerant type is indicated. The
cylinder is pink.

Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging

The charge port diameter is larger
than that of the current port.

Flare Nut

Use Type-2 Flare nuts.

Connection of the unit with the pipes

2. Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions
Tools/Materials

Use

Notes

Gas Leak Detector

Gas leak detection

The ones for use with HFC refrigerant
may be used.

Vacuum Pump

Vacuum drying

May be used if a check valve adapter
is attached.

Flare Tool

Flare processing

Flare processing dimensions for the
piping in the system using the new refrigerant differ from those of R22. Refer to I [3] Piping Materials.

Refrigerant Recovery Equipment

Refrigerant recovery

May be used if compatible with
R410A.

3. Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A
Tools/Materials

Use

Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve

Vacuum drying

Bender

Bending pipes

Torque Wrench

Tightening flare nuts

Pipe Cutter

Cutting pipes

Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder

Welding pipes

Refrigerant Charging Meter

Refrigerant charging

Vacuum Gauge

Vacuum level check

Notes

Only the flare processing dimensions
for pipes that have a diameter of
ø12.70 (1/2") and ø15.88 (5/8") have
been changed.

4. Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A
Tools/Materials
Charging Cylinder

Use
Refrigerant charging

Notes
Prohibited to use

Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle.

HWE09080

-4-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[3] Piping Materials

Do not use the existing piping!
1. Copper pipe materials
O-material (Annealed)

Soft copper pipes (annealed copper pipes). They can easily be bent with hands.

1/2H-material (Drawn)

Hard copper pipes (straight pipes). They are stronger than the O-material (Annealed)
at the same radial thickness.

The distinction between O-materials (Annealed) and 1/2H-materials (Drawn) is made based on the strength of the pipes themselves.
2. Types of copper pipes
Maximum working pressure

Refrigerant type

3.45 MPa [500psi]

R22, R407C etc.

4.30 MPa [624psi]

R410A etc.

3. Piping materials/Radial thickness
Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper.
The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22.
Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below.
(Pipes with a radial thickness of 0.7 mm or less may not be used.)
Pipe size (mm[in])

Radial thickness (mm)

ø6.35

[1/4"]

0.8t

ø9.52

[3/8"]

0.8t

ø12.7

[1/2"]

0.8t

ø15.88

[5/8"]

1.0t

ø19.05

[3/4"]

1.0t

ø22.2

[7/8"]

1.0t

ø25.4

[1"]

1.0t

ø28.58

[1-1/8"]

1.0t

ø31.75

[1-1/4"]

1.1t

ø34.93

[1-3/8"]

1.1t

ø41.28

[1-5/8"]

1.2t

Type

O-material (Annealed)

1/2H-material,
H-material (Drawn)

The pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O-material (Annealed), even if the
pipe diameter is less than ø19.05 (3/4"). For a system that uses R410A, use pipes that are made with 1/2H-material (Drawn)
unless the pipe diameter is at least ø19.05 (3/4") and the radial thickness is at least 1.2t.
The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes
that meet the local standards.

HWE09080

-5-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]
4. Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials
Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant.

5. Flare processing (O-material (Annealed) and OL-material only)
The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system.
Flare processing dimensions (mm[in])
A dimension (mm)
R410A

R22, R407C

ø6.35

[1/4"]

9.1

9.0

ø9.52

[3/8"]

13.2

13.0

ø12.7

[1/2"]

16.6

16.2

ø15.88

[5/8"]

19.7

19.4

ø19.05

[3/4"]

24.0

23.3

Dimension A

Pipe size (mm[in])

(ø19.05 pipes should have a radial thickness of 1.2 t and be made of annealed materials.)
If a clutch-type flare tool is used to flare the pipes in the system using R410A, the length of the pipes must be between 1.0
and 1.5 mm. For margin adjustment, a copper pipe gauge is necessary.
6. Flare nut
The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength. The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed.
Flare nut dimensions (mm[in])
B dimension (mm)
Pipe size (mm[in])
R410A

R22, R407C

ø6.35

[1/4"]

17.0

17.0

ø9.52

[3/8"]

22.0

22.0

ø12.7

[1/2"]

26.0

24.0

ø15.88

[5/8"]

29.0

27.0

ø19.05

[3/4"]

36.0

36.0

Dimension B

The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes
that meet the local standards.

HWE09080

-6-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[4] Storage of Piping
1. Storage location

Store the pipes to be used indoors. (Warehouse at site or owner's warehouse)
If they are left outdoors, dust, dirt, or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe.
2. Sealing the pipe ends

Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing.
Keep elbow pipes and T-joints in plastic bags.
The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil (such as Suniso) and, if not
handled with care, could easily introduce moisture into the system. Keep moisture out of the pipes, for it will cause the oil to
deteriorate and cause a compressor failure.

[5] Pipe Processing
Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges.

Use a minimum amount of oil.
Use only ester oil, ether oil, and alkylbenzene.

HWE09080

-7-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[6] Brazing
No changes have been made in the brazing procedures. Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects (such as oxide
scale, water, and dust) out of the refrigerant system.
Example: Inside the brazed connection

Use of oxidized solder for brazing

Use of non-oxidized solder for brazing

1. Items to be strictly observed
Do not conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining.
Use non-oxidized solder.
Use a brazing material (BCuP-3) that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and
copper coupling.
If installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment, then braze and seal both ends.
2. Reasons
The new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if
water infiltrates into the system.
Flux generally contains chloride. Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form.
3. Notes
Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to
deteriorate.

HWE09080

-8-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[7] Air Tightness Test
No changes have been made in the detection method. Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak.

Halide torch

R22 leakage detector

1. Items to be strictly observed
Pressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure (4.15MPa[601psi]), and then judge the equipment's air tightness, taking temperature variations into account.
Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state (vs. gaseous state).
2. Reasons
Oxygen, if used for an air tightness test, poses a risk of explosion. (Only use nitrogen to check air tightness.)
Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state. If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first, the composition
of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use.
3. Notes
Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak. A leak detector for R22 will not detect an
HFC(R410A) leak.

HWE09080

-9-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation)

(Photo1) 15010H

(Photo2) 14010
Recommended vacuum gauge:
ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge

1. Vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve (Photo1)
To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure, use a vacuum
pump with a reverse-flow check valve.
A reverse-flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use.
2. Standard of vacuum degree (Photo 2)
Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5Torr(65Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation, and connect it directly
to the vacuum gauge. Use a pump well-maintained with an appropriate lubricant. A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not
be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum.
3. Required precision of vacuum gauge
Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa) and measures at intervals of 1Torr(130Pa). (A recommended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2.)
Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa).
4. Evacuation time
After the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr(650Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. (A thorough vacuum drying removes moisture in the pipes.)
Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr(130Pa) 1hour after evacuation. A rise by less than
1Torr(130Pa) is acceptable.
If the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr(130Pa), conduct evacuation, following the instructions in section 6. Special vacuum
drying.
5. Procedures for stopping vacuum pump
To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil, open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side, or draw in air by loosening
the charge hose, and then stop the operation.
The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.
6. Special vacuum drying
When 5Torr(650Pa) or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation, it is likely that water has penetrated the system or that there is a leak.
If water infiltrates the system, break the vacuum with nitrogen. Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to
0.5kgf/cm2G(0.05MPa) and evacuate again. Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vacuum below 5Torr(650Pa) is attained or until the pressure stops rising.
Only use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking. (The use of oxygen may result in an explosion.)

HWE09080

- 10 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]
7. Notes
To evacuate air from the entire system
Applying a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) is not enough to attain the
desired vacuum pressure.
Be sure to apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2) and also through the
check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1 and 2).
To evacuate air only from the heat source units
Apply a vacuum through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1, and 2).
To evacuate air from the indoor units and extension pipes
Apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve (BV1 and 2).

HWE09080

- 11 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[9] Refrigerant Charging

Cylinder without a siphon

Cylinder with a siphon

Cylinder

Cylinder

Cylinder color R410A is pink.

Refrigerant charging in the liquid state

Valve

Valve

liquid

liquid

1. Reasons
R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend (boiling point R32=-52°C[-62°F], R125=-49°C[-52°F]) and can almost be handled
the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid
phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use.
2. Notes
When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down. Check
the type of the cylinder on the label before use.

[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak
If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. (Charge refrigerant in the
liquid state.)
Refer to "IX [5] Refrigerant Leak."(page 343)

HWE09080

- 12 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants
1. Chemical property
As with R22, the new refrigerant (R410A) is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant.
However, because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air, leaked refrigerant in a closed room will
accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia.
If exposed to an open flame, refrigerant will generate poisonous gases. Do not perform installation or service work in a confined area.
New Refrigerant (HFC type)

Conventional Refrigerant (HCFC type)

R410A

R407C

R22

R32/R125

R32/R125/R134a

R22

Composition (wt%)

(50/50)

(23/25/52)

(100)

Type of Refrigerant

Pseudo-azeotropic
Refrigerant

Non-azeotropic
Refrigerant

Single Refrigerant

Not included

Not included

Included

A1/A1

A1/A1

A1

72.6

86.2

86.5

Boiling Point (°C/°F)

-51.4/-60.5

-43.6/-46.4

-40.8/-41.4

Steam Pressure
(25°C,MPa/77°F,psi) (gauge)

1.557/226

0.9177/133

0.94/136

64.0

42.5

44.4

Nonflammable

Nonflammable

Nonflammable

0

0

0.055

1730

1530

1700

Refrigerant charging in
the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in
the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in
the gaseous state

Available

Available

Available

Chloride
Safety Class
Molecular Weight

Saturated Steam Density
(25°C,kg/m3/77°F,psi)
Flammability
Ozone Depletion Coefficient

(ODP)*1
*2

Global Warming Coefficient (GWP)
Refrigerant Charging Method

Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant
Leak
*1 When CFC11 is used as a reference
*2 When CO2 is used as a reference

2. Refrigerant composition
R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To
be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn
out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use.
If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced.

3. Pressure characteristics
The pressure in the system using R410A is 1.6 times as great as that in the system using R22.
Pressure (gauge)
Temperature (°C/°F)

HWE09080

R410A

R407C

R22

MPa/psi

MPa/psi

MPa/psi

-20/-4

0.30/44

0.18/26

0.14/20

0/32

0.70/102

0.47/68

0.40/58

20/68

1.34/194

0.94/136

0.81/117

40/104

2.31/335

1.44/209

1.44/209

60/140

3.73/541

2.44/354

2.33/338

65/149

4.17/605

2.75/399

2.60/377

- 13 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil
1. Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system
HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system.
Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil.
Refrigerant

Refrigerating machine oil

R22

Mineral oil

R407C

Ester oil

R410A

Ester oil

2. Effects of contaminants*1
Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out.
The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
3. The effects of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
Cause

Symptoms

Water infiltration

Frozen expansion valve
and capillary tubes

Hydrolysis

Air infiltration

Effects on the refrigerant cycle

Sludge formation and adhesion
Acid generation
Oxidization
Oil degradation

Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat
Motor insulation failure
Burnt motor
Coppering of the orbiting scroll
Lock
Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Oxidization
Adhesion to expansion valve and capillary
tubes

Clogged expansion valve, capillary tubes, and
drier
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat

Infiltration of contaminants into the compressor

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Sludge formation and adhesion

Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat

Oil degradation

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Dust, dirt
Infiltration of
contaminants
Mineral oil
etc.

*1. Contaminants is defined as moisture, air, processing oil, dust/dirt, wrong types of refrigerant, and refrigerating machine oil.
HWE09080

- 14 -

GB

II Restrictions
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

System configuration ....................................................................................................... 17
Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables ........................................................... 18
Switch Settings and Address Settings ............................................................................. 19
Sample System Connection............................................................................................. 26
An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected..................... 27
An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected..................... 49
An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and
ME Remote Controller are connected.............................................................................. 53
[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length ............................................................................................. 58

HWE09080

- 15 -

GB

- 16 -

[ II Restrictions ]
II Restrictions

[1] System configuration

1. Table of compatible indoor units 
The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units.
Composing units

Heat
source
units

Maximum total capacity
of connectable indoor
units

Maximum number
of connectable indoor units

P72

-

-

-

36 - 93

1 - 15

P96

-

-

-

48 - 124

1 - 20

P120

-

-

-

60 - 156

1 - 26

P144

P72

P72

-

72 - 187

1 - 31

P168

P96

P72

-

84 - 218

1 - 36

P192

P96

P96

-

96 - 249

1 - 41

P216

P120

P96

-

108 - 280

2 - 46

P240

P120

P120

-

120 - 312

P264

P96

P96

P72

132 - 343

P288

P96

P96

P96

144 - 374

P312

P120

P96

P96

156- 405

P336

P120

P120

P96

168 - 436

P360

P120

P120

P120

180 - 468

Types of connectable indoor units
P06 - P96 models
R410A series indoor units

2 - 50

1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names.
2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source
unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit
whenever possible.
1. Table of compatible indoor units 
The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of heat source units.
Heat
source
units

Composing units

Maximum total capacity
of connectable indoor
units

Maximum number
of connectable indoor units

P72

-

-

36- 108

1 - 18

P96

-

-

48 - 144

1 - 24

P120

-

-

60 - 180

1 - 30

P144

P72

P72

72 - 216

1 - 36

P168

P96

P72

84 - 252

1 - 42

P192

P96

P96

96 - 288

1 - 48

P216

P120

P96

108 - 324

P240

P120

P120

120 - 360

Types of connectable indoor units
P06 - P96 models
R410A series indoor units

2 - 50

1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names.
2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given heat source unit exceeds the capacity of the heat source
unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the heat source unit
whenever possible.

HWE09080

- 17 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables
1. Wiring work
(1) Notes
1) Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual.
2) Install external transmission cables at least 5cm [1-31/32"] away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference.
(Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube.)
3) Provide grounding for the heat source unit as required.
4) Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or heat source unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing.
5) Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the electronic components on the terminal block.
6) Use 2-core shielded cables as transmission cables.
Use a separate 2-core control cable for each refrigerant system. Do not use a single multiple-core cable to connect indoor
units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple-core cable may result in signal transmission errors and
malfunctions.
Heat source unit

Heat source unit
BC Controller Indoor unit

TB TB
3 7

BC Controller Indoor unit
TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

multiple-core cable

2-core shielded cable

Remote Controller

Remote Controller

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

2-core shielded cable

TB3: Terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line TB7: Terminal block for centralized control
(2) Control wiring
Different types of control wiring are used for different systems.
Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System
to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.
Types and maximum allowable length of cables
Control lines are categorized into 2 types: transmission line and remote controller line.
Use the appropriate type of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system. If a given system
has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit, place the unit away from the noise source to reduce
noise interference.
1) M-NET transmission line
Facility
type
Type

All facility types
Shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, MVVS

Cable type
Number of
cores

2-core cable

Cable size

Larger than 1.25mm2 [AWG16]

Maximum transmission
line distance between the
heat source unit and the
farthest indoor unit

200 m [656ft] max.

Maximum transmission
line distance for central500 m [1640ft] max.
ized control and Indoor*The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for
heat source transmission
centralized control to each heat source unit or to the system controller is 200m [656ft] max.
line (Maximum line distance via heat source unit)

HWE09080

- 18 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2) Remote controller wiring
MA remote controller*1

M-NET remote controller*2

Type

VCTF, VCTFK, CVV, CVS, VVR, VVF, VCT Shielded cable MVVS

Number of
cores

2-core cable

2-core cable

Cable size

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3
[AWG22 to 16]
(0.75 to 1.25mm2 )
[AWG18 to 16]

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3
[AWG22 to 16]
(0.75 to 1.25mm2 )
[AWG18 to 16]

Cable type

Maximum overall line
length

*4

*4

The section of the cable that exceeds 10m
[32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance.

200 m [656ft] max.

*1 MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and
wireless remote controller.
*2 M-NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.
*3 The use of cables that are smaller than 0.75mm2 [AWG18] is recommended for easy handling.
*4 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the cable size specifications shown in the parenthesis.

[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings
1. Switch setting
Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System
to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.
Set the switches while the power is turned off.
If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered, those changes will not take effect, and the unit will not
function properly.
Units on which to set the switches

Symbol

Units to which the power must be shut off

IC

Heat source units *3 and Indoor units

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit *1

LC

Heat source units *3 and LOSSNAY

M-NET remote controller

Main/sub remote
controller

RC

Heat source units *3

MA remote controller

Main/sub remote
controller

MA

Indoor units

CITY MULTI heat source unit*2

OC,OS

Heat source units *3

BC controller

Main

BC

Heat source units *3 and BC controller

Sub1, 2

BS1, BS2

Heat source units *3 and BC controller

CITY MULTI indoor unit

Main/sub unit

*1. Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line.
*2. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity
from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).
*3. Turn off the power to all the heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit.

HWE09080

- 19 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. M-NET Address settings
(1) Address settings table
The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system.
Unit or controller

Setting method

Factory
address
setting

Symbol

Address
setting
range

IC

0, 01 to Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the
50*1 *4 *6 group, and assign sequential address numbers to the rest
of the indoor units in the same group.
In an R2 system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the
formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

00

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit

LC

00

M-NET remote controller

RC

0, 01 to Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these
50*1 *4 *6 units after assigning an address to all indoor units.
101 to
Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in
150
the same group.
151 to
Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in
200*3
the same group.
No address settings required. (The main/sub setting must be made if
2 remote controllers are connected to the system.)

CITY MULTI Main/sub unit
indoor unit
M-NET
adapter
M-NET control interface
Free Plan
adapter

Main remote
controller
Sub remote
controller
MA remote controller

System
controller

MA

Main

OC
OS

0, 51 to
100*1 *2

Assign an address that equals the lowest address of the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit plus 50.
Assign sequential addresses to the heat source units in the
same refrigerant circuit. The heat source units in the same
refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and
OS. *5

00

BC controller
(main)

BC

0, 51 to
100*1 *2

Assign an address that equals the address of the heat
source unit in the same refrigerant system plus 1.
If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are
assigned to the heat source units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting
range.

00

BC controller
(sub1, 2)

BS1
BS2

51 to
100 *2

Assign an address to both the sub BC controller 1 and 2
that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that
are connected to each of them plus 50.
If a sub BC controller is connected, the automatic startup
function is not available.

Group remote controller
System remote controller
ON/OFF remote controller
Schedule timer (compatible with M-NET)
Central controller
AG-150A, G(B)-50A
Expansion controller
PAC-YG50ECA
LM adapter

GR
SC
SR
SC
AN
SC
ST
SC
TR
SC

201 to
250

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest
group number of the group to be controlled and 200.
Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range
listed on the left to each unit.
Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest
group number of the group to be controlled and 200.
Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range
listed on the left to each unit.
Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range
listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to
"0" to control the K-control unit.

201

SC

201 to
250

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range
listed on the left to each unit.

247

CITY MULTI heat source unit

Auxiliary
heat source
unit

RC

101

*6

*6

0, 201 to
250

202
000

*1. If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to other units, use a different, unused address within the
setting range.
*2. To set the heat source unit address or the auxiliary heat source unit address to "100," set the rotary switches to "50."
*3. To set the M-NET remote controller address to "200," set the rotary switches to "00."
*4. Some models of indoor units have two or three control boards.
Assign an address to the No.1, No. 2, and No. 3 control boards so that the No. 2 control board address equals the No. 1 control
board address plus 1, and that the No. 3 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 2.
*5. The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, and OS. They are designated as
OC, and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).
*6. No address settings are required for units in a system with a single heat source unit (with some exceptions).
Address setting is required if a sub BC controller is connected.

HWE09080

- 20 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(2) Power supply switch connector connection on the heat source unit
(Factory setting: The male power supply switch connector is connected to CN41.)
There are limitations on the total number of units that are connectable to each refrigerant system. Refer to the DATABOOK
for details.
System configuration

System with one
heat source unit
System with multiple heat source
units

Power supply unit
Connection to
the system con- for transmission
lines
troller

_

Group operation
of units in a system with multiple
heat source
units

_

Not connected

_

_

Power supply switch connector connection

Leave CN41 as it is
(Factory setting)

Not grouped
Grouped

With connection
to the indoorheat source
transmission
line

Not required

Grouped/not
grouped

With connection
to the centralized control system

Not required*1
(Powered from
the heat source
unit)

Grouped/not
grouped

Required *1

Grouped/not
grouped

Disconnect the male connector from the female power supply switch connector (CN41)
and connect it to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) on only one of the
heat source units.*2
*Connect the S (shielded) terminal on the
terminal block (TB7) on the heat source
unit whose CN41 was replaced with CN40
to the ground terminal ( ) on the electric
box.
Leave CN41 as it is
(Factory setting)

*1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration.
*2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one heat source unit in
the system.
(3) Settings for the centralized control switch for the heat source unit (Factory setting: SW2-1 are set to OFF.)
Centralized control switch settings *1

System configuration
Connection to the system controller

Not connected

Leave it to OFF. (Factory setting)

Connection to the system controller

Connected*2

ON

*1. Set SW2-1 on all heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting.
*2. When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
(4) Selecting the position of temperature detection for the indoor unit (Factory setting: SW1-1 set to "OFF".)
To stop the fan during heating Thermo-OFF (SW1-7 and 1-8 on the indoor units to be set to ON), use the built-in thermistor
on the remote controller or an optional thermistor.
1) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 to ON.
Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor.
Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead.
When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.
(Note) Factory setting for SW1-1 on the indoor unit of the All-Fresh Models is ON.
2) When an optional temperature sensor is used, set SW1-1 to OFF, and set SW3-8 to ON.
When using an optional temperature sensor, install it where room temperature can be detected.

HWE09080

- 21 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(5) Various start-stop controls (Indoor unit settings)
Each indoor unit (or group of indoor units) can be controlled individually by setting SW 1-9 and 1-10.
Function

Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit
was stopped

Setting (SW1)*4 *5
9

10

Power ON/OFF by the
plug*1,*2,*3

Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before
power off (power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

OFF

ON

Automatic restoration
after power failure

Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was
turned off (or cut off due to power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

ON

OFF

Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before
power off (power failure).

OFF

ON

*1. Do not cut off power to the heat source unit. Cutting off the power supply to the heat source unit will cut off the power
supply to the crankcase heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation.
*2. Not applicable to units with a built-in drain pump or humidifier.
*3. Models with a built-in drain pump cannot be turned on/off by the plug individually. All the units in the same refrigerant circuits will be turned on or off by the plug.
*4. Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made.
*5. Set SW1-9 and SW1-10 to ON to control the external input from/output to the air conditioning units via AG-150A or G(B)50A using the PLC software for general equipment. With these settings made, the power start-stop function becomes disabled. To use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made, set SW1-5 to ON.
(6) Miscellaneous settings
Cooling-only setting for the indoor unit: Cooling only model (Factory setting: SW3-1 "OFF.")
When using indoor unit as a cooling-only unit, set SW3-1 to ON.
(7) Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various connection options)
Type

Usage

Function

Input Prohibiting cooling/heating operation (thermo OFF) by an external input to the heat source unit.
* Usable for demand control of each refrigerant system

DEMAND (level)

Terminal to be
used*1

CN3D*2

Performs a low level noise operation of the heat source unit by Low-noise mode
an external input to the heat source unit.
(level)*3 *4
* It can be used as the silent operation device for each refrigerant system.

Output

Option

Adapter
for external input
(PACSC36NAE)

Cooling/heating operation can be changed by an external input
to the heat source unit (OC).

Auto-changeover

CN3N

Receives interlock operation signal input from the water circuit
pump (field-supplied)

Pump interlock
operation signal
input

TB-8 (between
poles 3 and 4)
*Minimum guaranteed current at
no-voltage input
contact: 5 mA or
below

_

Outputs signals to perform interlocked operation of heat source
unit and water circuit pump
Signal output patterns
*When DIP SW2-7 is set to off (factory setting)
Signals are output while the compressor is in operation.
*When DIP SW2-7 is set to ON
Signals are output from the controller while receiving cooling or heating signal.
Signals are output while the compressor is stopped during
Thermo-OFF.

Pump interlock
operation signal

TB-8 (between
poles 1 and 2)
*Contact rating:
200VAC 1A or
below

_

How to extract signals from the heat source unit
Operation status
CN51
*It can be used as an operation status display device.
of the compressor
*It can be used for an interlock operation with external devicError status
es.

Adapter
for external output
(PACSC37SAE)

*1. For detailed drawing, refer to "Example of wiring connection".
*2. For details, refer to the next section "Demand control".

HWE09080

- 22 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
*3. Low-noise mode is valid when Dip SW4-4 on the heat source unit is set to OFF. When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, 4 levels
of on-DEMAND are possible, using different configurations of low-noise mode input and DEMAND input settings.When
2 or more heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, 8 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. When 3 heat
source units exist in one refrigerant circuitsystem, 12 levels of on-DEMAND are possible.
*4. By setting Dip SW5-5, the Low-noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low-noise priority mode.
When SW5-5 is set to ON: The low-noise mode always remains effective.
When SW5-5 is set to OFF: The low noise mode is cancelled when certain operation pressure criteria are met, and the
unit goes into normal operation (capacity priority mode).
Low-noise mod is effective.

Capacity priority mode becomes effective.

Cooling

Heating

Cooling

Heating

63HS1<32kg/cm2

63LS>4.6kg/cm2

63HS1>35kg/cm2

63LS<3.9kg/cm2

*5. When multiple heat source units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, settings on every heat source unit (signal input)
are required.

CAUTION
1) Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation.
2) Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard.
3) The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more.
Example of wiring connection
(2) CN3N

(1) CN51

Lamp power source

Distant control
board
L1

Relay circuit
X
Y

L2

X

Adapter 1

Y

5
4
3

Relay circuit
Heat source unit
control board

Adapter 2

X

Heat source unit
control board
CN3N

1
2

CN51
Y

X
OFF

3

Y
Preparations
in the field

Preparations
in the field

Maximum cable
length is 10m
L1 : Heat source unit error display lamp
L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state)
X, Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V)
1. Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply.

(3) CN3D
Adapter 2

Relay circuit
X

1
2

Y

3

ON

OFF

Normal

ON

Cooling Heating

Maximum cable
length is 10m

X : Cooling / Heating
Y : Validity / Invalidity of X
X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

Heat source unit
control board

Heat source unit
Adapter 2 control board

Relay circuit

CN3D

CN3D

1
2

X

3

Preparations
in the field

Preparations
in the field

Maximum cable
length is 10m
X : Low-noise mode
Y : Compressor ON/OFF
X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

Maximum cable
length is 10m
X : Low-noise mode
X : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
Low-noise mode : The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum
fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency.

(4)TB8
Heat source unit

Heat source unit
TB8
3
4

TB8

63PW
Shortcircuit
wire

52P

2

Pump interlock circuit (if one is connected)
When connecting the pump interlock circuit wires to terminals
3 and 4 of TB8, remove the short-circuit wire.
63PW: Pressure switch (Contact: Minimum applied load 5 mA)

HWE09080

1
X

X: Relay (Contact rating: 200VAC 1A)
52P: Pump contactor

- 23 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(8) Demand control
1) General outline of control
Demand control is performed by using the external signal input to the 1-2 and 1-3 pins of CN3D on the heat source units (OC,
OS1, and OS2).
Between 2 and 12 steps of demand control is possible by setting DIP SW4-4 on the heat source units (OC, OS1, and OS2).
Table.1
DipSW4-4
No

Demand control switch

Input to CN3D *2
OC

OS1

OS2

(a)

2 steps(0-100%)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OC

(b)

4 steps(0-50-75-100%)

ON

OFF

OFF

OC

(c)

OFF

ON

OFF

OS1

(d)

OFF

OFF

ON

OS2

ON

ON

OFF

OC and OS1

(f)

ON

OFF

ON

OC and OS2

(g)

OFF

ON

ON

OS1 and OS2

ON

ON

ON

OC, OS1, and OS2

(e)

(h)

8 steps(0-25-38-50-63-75-88-100%)

12 steps(0-17-25-34-42-50-59-67-7584-92-100%)

P200-P300YHM models (single-heat source-unit system): 2 and 4 steps shown in the rows (a) and (b) in the table above
only.
P400-P600YHM models (two-heat source-unit system OC+OS1): 2-8 steps shown in the rows (a), (b), (c), and (e) in the
table above only.
P650-P900YHM models (three-heat source-unit system OC+OS1+OS2): 2-12 steps shown in the rows (a)-(h) in the table
above.
*2. External signal is input to CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON. When SW4-4 is set to OFF on all heat
source units, the signal is input to the CN3D on the OC.
Heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are selectable in a single refrigerant system.
*3. If wrong sequence of steps are taken, the units may go into the Thermo-OFF (compressor stop) mode.
Ex) When switching from 100% to 50%
(Incorrect) 100% to 0% to 50% : The units may go into the Thermo-OFF mode.
(Correct) 100% to 75% to 50%
*4. The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the compressor volume and
does not necessarily correspond with the actual capacity.
*5. Notes on using demand control in combination with the low-noise mode
To enable the low-noise mode, it is necessary to short-circuit 1-2 pin of CN3D on the heat source unit whose SW4-4 is set
to OFF.
When SW4-4 is set to ON on all heat source units, the following operations cannot be performed.
Performing 4-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a single-heat source-unit system.
Performing 8-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a two-heat source-unit system.
Performing 12-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a three-heat source-unit system.
2) Contact input and control content
2-step demand control
The same control as the Thermo-OFF is performed by closing 1-3 pin of CN3D.
CN3D
1-3P
Open

x = 100%

Close

x = 0%

4-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on an heat source unit)
Demand capacity is shown below.
CN3D

HWE09080

1-2P

1-3P

Open

Close

Open

100%

75%

Close

0%

50%

- 24 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
8-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on two heat source units)
Demand capacity is shown below.
8-step demand

No.2 CN3D
1-2P

No.1 CN3D

Open

Short-circuit

1-2P

1-3P

Open

Short-circuit

Open

Short-circuit

Open

Open

100%

50%

88%

75%

Short-circuit

50%

0%

38%

25%

Open

88%

38%

75%

63%

Short-circuit

75%

25%

63%

50%

Short-circuit

*1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1and No. 2 in the order of address from small to
large.
Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OS1 and OS2, OS1=No. 1 and OS2=No. 2.
12-step demand control (When SW4-4 is set to ON on three heat source units)
Demand capacity is shown below.
12-step
demand

No.1
CN3D

No.2 CN3D

No.1
CN3D

Open

1-3P

Open

1-2P

1-2P

1-3P

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Open

100%

67%

92%

84%

67%

34%

59%

50%

Shortcircuit

67%

34%

59%

50%

34%

0%

25%

17%

Open

92%

59%

84%

75%

59%

25%

50%

42%

Shortcircuit

84%

50%

75%

67%

50%

17%

42%

34%

No.2 CN3D

Open

Short-circuit

No.3 CN3D

Short-circuit

12-step
demand

1-2P

Short-circuit

1-2P

Open

Short-circuit

Short-circuit

1-3P

Open

No.3 CN3D

1-2P

1-2P

1-3P

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

Open

92%

59%

84%

75%

84%

50%

75%

67%

Shortcircuit

59%

25%

50%

42%

50%

17%

42%

34%

Open

84%

50%

75%

67%

75%

42%

67%

59%

Shortcircuit

75%

42%

67%

59%

67%

34%

59%

50%

Short-circuit

Open

Short-circuit
Short-circuit

Open

Short-circuit

*1. The heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 in the order of address from
small to large.
Ex) When heat source units whose SW4-4 is set to ON are designated as OC, OS1, and OS2, OC=No. 1, OS1=No. 2,
and OS2=No. 3.

HWE09080

- 25 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[4] Sample System Connection
Examples of typical system connection are shown on pages [5] to [7].
Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details.
(1) An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected
System
configuration

Connection to the system controller

Address start up for indoor
and heat source units

1

System with one heat
source unit

NO

Automatic
address setup

2

System with one heat
source unit

NO

Manual
address setup

3

Grouping of units in a
system with multiple
heat source units

NO

Manual
address setup

4

System with one heat
source unit

With connection to transmission line
for centralized control

Manual
address setup

5

System with one heat
source unit

With connection to indoor-heat
source transmission line

Manual
address setup

6

System with one heat
source unit

With connection to transmission line
for centralized control

Manual
address setup

Connection of
multiple LOSSNAY units

Notes

Notes

Connection of
multiple LOSSNAY units

(2) An example of a system to which an ME remote controller is connected

1

System
configuration

Connection to the system controller

Address start up for indoor
and heat source units

System with one heat
source unit

With connection to transmission line
for centralized control

Manual
address setup

(3) An example of a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected

1

HWE09080

System
configuration

Connection to the system controller

Address start up for indoor
and heat source units

System with one heat
source unit

With connection to transmission
line for centralized control

Manual
address setup

- 26 -

Notes

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected
1. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) 
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

L3

L2

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

L4
Group

OC

IC

00
00
TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

00

00

00
TB3
M1 M2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

m1

TB3
M1 M2

00

LC

IC

A

B

A

A

RC

B

MA

L11

MA

B

L12
Group

L13
Group

IC

IC

00

00
TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

m5

m4

m2

TB5
M1M2 S

IC

A

B

MA

A

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.
4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input (CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of
indoor units. Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for
both indoor and heat source units".(page 29)
5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units
in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 2. An
example of a system with one heat source unit to which
2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected".(page 29)

HWE09080

A

B

MA

A

B

MA

m3

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L1 +L2+L3+L4 200m[656ft]
L1 +L2+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 200m [656ft]
m2+m3 200m [656ft]
m4+m5 200m [656ft]

- 27 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Set one of the MA remote controllers to sub. (Refer to
MA remote controller function selection or the installation
manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.)
Group operation of indoor units
To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisychain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on
all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect
terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA remote controller. (Non-polarized two-wire)
When performing a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source
address setup" is not available.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the
same system will automatically be made. (It is required
that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source
unit.)
Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for both indoor and
heat source units" in the following cases: performing an
interlock operation of part of the indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit, using LOSSNAY alone without interlocking it with any units, performing an interlock
operation of more than 16 indoor units with a LOSSNAY
unit, or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to indoor
units in the same system.
5) Switch setting
No address settings required.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the
heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), and terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat
source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC).
(Non-polarized two-wire)
Only use shielded cables.
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the
order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source
units (OC, OS1, OS2), and the S terminal on the terminal
block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield wire of
the shielded cable.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA
remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the
terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Nonpolarized two-wire)
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system,
connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on
the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA
remote controllers.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main unit

IC

Sub unit

IC

Setting
method

No settings required.

-

Notes
To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
refer to [5] 2.(page 29)

Factory
setting
00

2

LOSSNAY

LC

No settings required.

-

00

3

Main
MA
remote con- remote controller
troller

MA

No settings required.

-

Main

Sub
remote controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

OC
OS1
OS2

No settings required.

4

Heat source unit (Note)

Settings to
be made according to
the remote
controller
function selection
-

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE09080

- 28 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected
(manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) 
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L3

L2

L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

OS2

OS1

OC

53

52

51

L4
Group

IC

01
TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

LC

IC

02
TB15
1 2

A

TB5
M1M2 S

B

05

A

B

MA

L11

MA

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

L12

L13

Group

IC

IC

LC

03

04

06

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

A

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.

HWE09080

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 29 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSSNAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Refer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote
Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote
controller for the setting method.)
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main
unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

3

MA
remote controller

4

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the
group.

To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
designate the indoor unit
in the group with the greatest number of functions as
the main unit.

00

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers
starting with the address of
the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit
address +3, etc.)
LC

01 to 50

Main
remote
controller

MA

No
settings required.

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address
to the heat source units in
the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are
automatically designated
as OC, OS1, and
OS2.(Note)

Heat source unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning
an address to all indoor
units.
-

Main

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to
50.

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE09080

- 30 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
3. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units 
(1) Sample control wiring

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

L11
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

Group

Group

Group

OC

IC

IC

IC

LC

01

03

06

07

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB5

TB15
1 2

M1M2S

TB5

M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2 S

m2

53
TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

A

To be connected

B

A

A

MA

B

MA

L31

m3

MA

B

L22

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

OS2

OS1

TB7
M1 M2 S

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

Group

OC

IC

IC

IC

02

04

05

TB5

M1M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

To be left
unconnected

A

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for
transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only
one of the heat source units.
6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.

HWE09080

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L21 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft]
L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft]

- 31 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield
wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal
( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is
mated with CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 2.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 2.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the
heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and
on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the heat source units.
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the
order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

3

MA
remote
controller

4

Setting method

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)
LC

01 to 50

Main
remote
controller

MA

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address
to the heat source units in
the same refrigerant circuit. The heat source
units are automatically
designated as OC, OS1,
and OS2. (Note)

Heat source unit

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning
an address to all indoor
units.

Notes

Factory
setting

To perform a group
operation of indoor
units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in
the group with the
greatest number of
functions as the main
unit.

00

None of these addresses may overlap
any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

Main

To set the address to
100, set the rotary
switches to 50.

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE09080

- 32 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
4. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is powered from a heat source unit 
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF

ON

OS2

OS1

OC

53

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

Group

Group
IC

To be left
unconnected

TB7
M1 M2 S

02
TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

To be left
unconnected
To be connected

A B

A B

MA

MA

MA

Group

OC

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

07
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

m2

L31

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

03
TB15
1 2

A B

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

LC

IC

m1

TB7
M1 M2 S

IC

01
TB5
M1 M2 S

Group

To be left
unconnected

A B

A B

To be left
unconnected

MA

MA

L32

m3

Note1

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

System controller
A B S

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
5) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the
earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission
line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source unit
whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40.
6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.
7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE09080

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

- 33 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield
wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal
( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is
mated with CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission
line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized 2-core cable)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit
using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the
ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone
is connected.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller,
terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source
units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat
source units (OC, OS1, and OS2) in the same refrigerant
circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the heat source units.
If a system controller is connected, set the central control
switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source
units to "ON."
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the
order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main unit IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Setting method

Notes
To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
designate the indoor unit
in the group with the
greatest number of functions as the main unit.

00

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Enter the same indoor
unit group settings on the
system controller as the
ones that were entered
on the MA remote controller.

Main

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.
Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

3

MA
Main
remote con- remote
troller
controller

MA

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote
controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

To set the address to
Assign sequential ad100, set the rotary switchdress to the heat source
units in the same refriger- es to 50.
ant circuit.
The heat source units are
automatically designated
as OC, OS1, and
OS2.(Note)

4

Heat source unit

Factory
setting

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.
HWE09080

- 34 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
5. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (except LM adapter) 
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

Group

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

01

02

03

07

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

L31

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

A B

A B

A B

MA

MA

MA

L21

TB5
M1 M2 S

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

ON

TB15
1 2

To be left
unconnected
To be connected

OS2

Group

OC

53

TB7
M1 M2 S

ON

ON

m1

OS2

ON

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

ON

OS1

OC

ON

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

Group
IC

IC

04

05

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB15
1 2

IC

LC

06

08

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

To be left
unconnected

m2

L25

56

Group

To be left
unconnected

A B

A B

To be left
unconnected

MA

MA
m3

Note1
System controller

Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the
indoor-heat source transmission line.

A B S

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for
transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only
one of the heat source units.
6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to
the indoor-heat source transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)-50A may be connected.
7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 26, it may
not be possible to connect a system controller on the indoor-heat source transmission line.
8) In a system to which more than 18 indoor units including
one or more indoor units of 72 model or above are connected, there may be cases in which the system controller cannot be connected to the indoor-heat source
transmission line.

HWE09080

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
L25 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L21 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
L25+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]

- 35 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control
board of all heat source units to "ON."
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield
wire of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal
( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is
mated with CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized
two-wire)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit
using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the
ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the
heat source units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), terminals M1
and M2 on the terminal block for indoor-heat source
transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC), and the
S terminal on the system controller. (Non-polarized twowire)
Only use shielded cables.
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the
order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source
units (OC, OS1, OS2), the S terminal on the terminal
block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on
the system controller with the shield wire of the shielded
cable.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the
heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and
on the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the heat source units.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

Address setting range
01 to 50

Sub unit

LOSSNAY

3

MA
Main
MA
remote remote
control- controller
ler
Sub
MA
remote
controller

4

Heat source unit

Notes

Assign the smallest address
to the main unit in the group.

To perform a group operation of indoor units that have
different functions, designate the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as the
main unit.

00

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers
starting with the address of
the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address
+1, main unit address +2,
main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an
address to all indoor units.

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller
function selection

OC 51 to 100
OS1
OS2

Factory
setting

Setting method

Enter the same indoor unit
group settings on the system controller as the ones
that were entered on the MA
remote controller.

Assign sequential address to To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
the heat source units in the
same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically designated as
OC, OS1, and OS2. (Note)

Main

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE09080

- 36 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
6. System with one heat source unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and heat source units) 
(1) Sample control wiring

L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS

L2

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

L4

L3
Group

OC

BC

00

00

L5
Group

IC

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB02
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

00
TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

m1

TB3
M1 M2

TB5
M1 M2 S

LC

IC

00
00

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

A1 B2

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

RC

MA

*1
M1M2 S

L11

TB02

00
BS

L12

Group

L13
Group

IC

IC

00
TB5
M1 M2 S

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

m5

m4

m2

*1. When BS is connected to the system,
automatic address setup is not available.

IC

A1 B2

A1 B2

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

MA

MA

MA

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as
shown in the table below, one or more transmission
boosters (sold separately) are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in
parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable
indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each
heat source unit.)

4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input(CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of
indoor units. Refer to "[5] 7. Manual address setup for
both indoor and heat source units"
5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units
in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 7. An
example of a system with one heat source unit to which
2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected".
(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L1 +L2+L3+L4+L5 200m[656ft]
L1 +L2+L3+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 200m [656ft]
m2+m3 200m [656ft]
m4+m5 200m [656ft]

Number of transmission
booster (sold separately) required
1 unit
When the P72 and P96 models
are not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50 units

When the P72 or P96 model is
included in the connected indoor units

21 - 39 units

m3

2 units
-

40 - 50 units

The table above shows the number of transmission
boosters that is required by the system with three BC
controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted
from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor
units can be connected.

HWE09080

- 37 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
remote controllers.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block
for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the
heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for
indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main
BC controller (BC), and of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit
(IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Only use shielded cables.

Set one of the MA remote controllers as a sub controller.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.)
Group operation of indoor units
To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisychain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on
all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect
terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA remotecontroller. (Non-polarized two-wire)
When performing a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions, "Automatic indoor-heat source
addresssetup" is not available.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal
block(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).
(Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the
same system will automatically be made. (It is required
that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the heat source
unit.)
When performing an interlocked operation of part of the
indoor units in the system with a LOSSNAY unit, using a
LOSSNAY unit alone without interlocking it with any
units, performing an interlock operation of more than 16
indoor units with a LOSSNAY unit, or connecting two or
more LOSSNAY units to the same refrigerant system,
the automatic address setup function is not available.
5) Switch setting
No address settings required.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of
capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the
same capacity, in the order of address from small to
large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source
units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block
(TB02) on the BC controller (BC), and the S terminal of
the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the
shield of the shielded cable.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA
remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the
terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA).
(Non-polarized two-wire)
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system,
connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on
the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main unit

IC

Sub unit

IC

Setting method

Notes

No settings
required.

-

Port number setting is required
To perform a group operation of indoor units that feature different functions, the
automatic IC/OC address
setup function is not available.

Factory
setting
00

2

LOSSNAY

LC

No settings
required.

-

00

3

MA
Main
remote con- remote controller
troller

MA

No settings
required.

-

Main

Sub
remote controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be
made with the
Sub/Main
switch

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

No settings
required.

-

00

5

Auxiliary
heat source
unit

BC

No settings
required.

-

00

BC
controller

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).

HWE09080

- 38 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
7. An example of a system with one heat source unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected
(manual address setup for both indoor and heat source units) 
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with the ventilation unit
L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

L4

L3

L2

Group

OC

BC

51

53

L5

Group
IC

01
52
TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

TB02
M1 M2 S

02
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

05
TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

MA

L11

M1 M2 S
TB02

LC

IC

L12

L13

Group

57
BS

IC

03
TB5
M1M2 S

LC

IC

04
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

06
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

A1 B2

MA
IC

IC

07
TB5
M1M2 S

08
TB15
1 2

A1 B2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

A1 B2

MA
MA
* If the BC address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to either the OC, OS, or BS, use a different, unused address.
OC, OS, and BS addresses (lowest indoor unit address in the group plus +50) have higher priority than the BS address.

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as
shown in the table below, one or more transmission
boosters (sold separately) are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in
parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable
indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each
heat source unit.)

The table above shows the number of transmission
boosters that is required by the system with three BC
controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted
from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor
units can be connected.
(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 6.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.

Number of transmission
booster (sold separately)
required
1 unit
When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50
units

When the P72 or P96 model is included in
the connected indoor units

21 - 39
units

HWE09080

2 units
40 - 50
units

- 39 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block
for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3) on the
heat source units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for
indoor-heat source transmission line (TB02) on the main
and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal
block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on
each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Only use shielded cables.

3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 6.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 6.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSSNAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Refer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote
Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote
controller for the setting method.)
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of
capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the
same capacity, in the order of address from small to
large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source
units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block
(TB02) on BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal
block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the
shielded cable.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main
unit in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller,
make the settings for the indoor units in
the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main
BC controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in
the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)"
is true.

Port number setting is
required
To perform a group operation of indoor units
that feature different
functions, designate
the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as
the main unit.

00

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with
the address of the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to
each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

3

MA
Main
remote
remote
controller controller

MA

No settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Main

Settings to be made with the Sub/
Main switch

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat
source units in the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically
designated as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of
the smallest address of the indoor units
that are connected to the sub BC controller
and 50.

BC controller (Main)

BC

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned
to the heat source units or to
the sub BC controller, use a
different, unused address
within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection
of a main BC controller.

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).

HWE09080

- 40 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
8. Group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units 
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

L11
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS

Group

OC

51
TB3
M1 M2

IC

IC

IC

LC

53

01

03

06

07

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB02
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

m2

52
TB3
M1 M2

Group

Group

BC

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

To be connected

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

MA

MA

L31

m3

A1 B2

L22

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

OC

56

55

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

BC

IC

IC

IC

57

02

04

05

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB02
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

To be left
unconnected

A1 B2

MA

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the
above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units
can be connected.

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for
transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only
one of the heat source units.
6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as
shown in the table below, one or more transmission
boosters (sold separately) are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in
parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable
indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each
heat source unit.)

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L21 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft]
L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft]

Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required
1 unit
When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50 units

When the P72 or P96 model is
included in the connected indoor units

21 - 39 units

HWE09080

2 units
-

40 - 50 units

- 41 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 7.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 7.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the
heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and
on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the heat source units.

Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the heat source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the
shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and
the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat
source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with
CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 6.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 7.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 7.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of
capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the
same capacity, in the order of address from small to
large).
Only use shielded cables.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main
unit in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller,
make the settings for the indoor units in
the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main
BC controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in
the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)"
is true.

Port number setting is
required
To perform a group operation of indoor units
that feature different
functions, designate
the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as
the main unit.

00

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with
the address of the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to
each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

3

MA
Main
remote
remote
controller controller

MA

No settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Main

Settings to be made with the Sub/
Main switch

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat
source units in the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically
designated as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of
the smallest address of the indoor units
that are connected to the sub BC controller
and 50.

BC controller (Main)

BC

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned
to the heat source units or to
the sub BC controller, use a
different, unused address
within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection
of a main BC controller.

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).

HWE09080

- 42 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
9. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is powered from a heat source unit 
(1) Sample control wiring

Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

OC

52

51

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

To be left
unconnected

Group

53
TB02
M1M2 S

IC

IC

IC

01

02

03

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

07
TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

A B
1 2

A B
1 2

MA

MA

MA

OC

55

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

57
TB02
M1M2 S

TB7
M1M2 S

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

To be left
unconnected

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

A B
1 2

A B
1 2

L32

To be left
unconnected

Group

BC

m2

L31

TB5
M1M2 S

L22
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

56

TB7
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

LC

A B
1 2

L21

OS

TB5
M1M2 S

TB7
M1M2 S
To be connected

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

BC

m1

OS

TB7
M1M2 S

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

L11

MA

MA
m3

Note1
System controller

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

A B S

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters
that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For
each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.
7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission
line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

(2) Cautions
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

6)

ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group
of indoor units.
Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are
connected to different heat source units with each other.
Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the earth terminal (
) on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control
(TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40.
When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the
table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)
are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.
(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are
listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 8.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Maximum line distance via heat source unit (1.25 mm2
[AWG16] min.)
L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

Number of transmission booster
(sold separately) required
1 unit
When the P72 and P96 models are
not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50 units

When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor
units

21 - 39 units

HWE09080

2 units
-

40 - 50 units

- 43 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on
the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the
shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and
the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat
source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with
CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 6.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 6.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission
line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit
using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the
ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone
is connected.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 7.
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 7.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller, terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line
for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC)
in different refrigerant circuits and on the heat source units
(OC and OS) in the same refrigerant circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission
line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one
of the heat source units.
If a system controller is connected, set the central control
switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all heat source units
to "ON."

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the
order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to
50

Sub unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit
in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller, make
the settings for the indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC
controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in the
way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is
required
To perform a group operation of indoor units
that feature different
functions, designate
the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as
the main unit.

00

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to
each of these units after assigning an address
to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

-

Make the same indoor unit
group settings with the system
controller as the ones that
were made with the MA remote
controller.

Main

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned
to the heat source units or to
the sub BC controller, use a
different, unused address
within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection
of a main BC controller.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with the
address of the main unit in the same group
+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address
+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

3

Main
MA
MA
remote conremote
troller
controller
Sub
MA

No settings required.

4

Heat source unit
(Note)

OC
OS

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat
source units in the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically
designated as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of the
smallest address of the indoor units that are
connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC controller (Main)

BC

remote controller

01 to
50

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/
Main switch

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).
HWE09080

- 44 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
10. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-heat source transmission line (except LM adapter) 
(1) Sample control wiring

Move the male connector .
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

OS

OC

51

53

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB02
M1 M2 S

IC

IC

LC

01

02

03

07

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

A B
1 2

A B
1 2

A B
1 2

MA

MA

MA

L22

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS

OC

Group

BC

56

55

57

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB02
M1 M2 S

Group

IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

L25

L31

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

To be connected

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

IC

m1

To be left
unconnected

Group

BC

52

TB7
M1 M2 S

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

L11

To be left
unconnected

TB7
M1 M2 S

m2

TB7
M1 M2 S

Note1

To be left
unconnected

A B
1 2

A B
1 2

System controller

ABS

MA

MA
m3

Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the
indoor-heat source transmission line.

(2) Cautions
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

6)

7)

8)

Number of transmission
booster (sold separately)
required

ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group
of indoor units.
Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are
connected to different heat source units with each other.
Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the heat source
units.
A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoorheat source transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)50A may be connected.
When the total number of indoor units exceeds 20 (12 if one or more
indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected), it may not be
possible to connect a system controller to the indoor-heat source
transmission line.
When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the
table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)
are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.
(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are
listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)

HWE09080

1 unit
When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50
units

When the P72 or P96 model is included in
the connected indoor units

21 - 39
units

2 units
40 - 50
units

The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is
required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
L25 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L21 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
- 45 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
heat source units to "ON."
Only use shielded cables.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line

Shielded cable connection

Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC
and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission
line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), of the
terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on
each indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal of the system controller.(Non-polarized two-wire)

Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat
source units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shielded cable.
Short-circuit the earth terminal (
) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40.

3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 6.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 6.
4) LOSSNAY connection

Only use shielded cables.
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to
small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of
address from small to large).

Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal (
) on the heat source units (OC
and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and
BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit
(IC) with the shield of the shielded cable.

Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for
indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).
(Non-polarized two-wire)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the
system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system
controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote
controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected.

2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC)
in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same refrigerant circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for
centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.
Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all

5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to
50

Sub unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit
in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller, make
the settings for the indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC
controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in the
way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is
required
To perform a group operation of indoor units
that feature different
functions, designate
the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as
the main unit.

00

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to
each of these units after assigning an address
to all indoor units.

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

-

Make the same indoor unit
group settings with the system
controller as the ones that
were made with the MA remote
controller.

Main

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned
to the heat source units or to
the sub BC controller, use a
different, unused address
within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection
of a main BC controller.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with the
address of the main unit in the same group
+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address
+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

3

Main
MA
MA
remote conremote
troller
controller
Sub
MA

No settings required.

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat
source units in the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically
designated as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of the
smallest address of the indoor units that are
connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC controller (Main)

BC

remote controller

01 to
50

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made with the Sub/
Main switch

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).

HWE09080

- 46 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
11. A system with multiple BC controller connections (with a system controller connected to the centralized control line)

(1) Sample control wiring
L11

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

L12

Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

Group
BC

52

IC
2 1

51

01

53
TB3
M1M2

TB7
M1M2 S

Group

Group

Group

OC

TB3
M1M2

To be left
unconnected

TB02
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

IC
1

2

02

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

BS

IC
2

04

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

IC
2 1

07

57
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB02
M1M2 S

BS

IC
1
TB15
1 2

08
TB5
M1M2 S

2

IC
2 1

61
TB15
1 2

TB02
M1M2S

11
TB5
M1M2 S

LC

IC
1
TB15
1 2

12
TB5
M1M2S

2
TB15
1 2

13
TB5
M1M2S

TB7
M1M2 S

To be connected

A1 B2

m2

A1 B2

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

MA

MA

MA

m3
L21

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

Group
BC

L31

55

Group

3 2 1

54

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

To be left
unconnected

TB7
M1M2 S

IC

IC

03

56

TB7
M1M2 S

Group

OC

TB02
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

1

05
TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

IC
2
TB15
1 2

BS

TB5
M1M2 S

IC

3

06

1

59
TB15
1 2

TB02
M1M2 S

09
TB5
M1M2 S

LC

IC
1
TB15
1 2

10
TB5
M1M2 S

1
TB15
1 2

14
TB5
M1M2 S

To be left
unconnected
A1 B2

m1

MA

A1 B2

A1 B2

MA

MA

L32

Numbers in the square indicate port numbers.
Connection to BC controllers
Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

Note1
System
controller
ABS

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

(2) Cautions
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

6)

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
L31+L32(L21) 200m [656ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 200m [656ft]
m2+m3 200m [656ft]
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]

ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group
of indoor units.
Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are
connected to different heat source units with each other.
Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the heat source units.
Short-circuit the S (shield) terminal of the terminal block for the central control unit (TB7) and the ground terminal ( ) on the heat
source unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40.
When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the
table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)
are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.
(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are
listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)
Number of transmission
booster (sold separately)
required
1 unit

When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units

27 - 50
units

When the P72 or P96 model is included in
the connected indoor units

21 - 39
units

2 units
40 - 50
units

The table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers.
For each BC controller that is subtracted from the abovementioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.
7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission
line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE09080

- 47 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all
heat source units to "ON."
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system
controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shielded cable. Shortcircuit the earth terminal (
) and the S terminal on the terminal
block (TB7) on the heat source unit whose power jumper connector
is mated with CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring

(4) Wiring method
1)

Indoor-heat source transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoorheat source transmission line (TB3) on the heat source units (OC
and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission
line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of
the terminal block for indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on
each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Shielded cable connection

Same as [5] 6.

When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same
capacity, in the order of address from small to large).

4)

Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the heat source units (OC
and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and
BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit
(IC) with the shield of the shielded cable.
Only use shielded cables.
2) Transmission line for centralized control

Same as [5] 6.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 6.
LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for
indoor-heat source transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC).
(Non-polarized two-wire)

Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for
the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected.

Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the terminal block for transmission
line for centralized control (TB7) on the heat source units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS (Note) in the same
refrigerant circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for
centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.

5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(5) Address setting method
Pro
cedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the
group.
In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that
the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is required
To perform a group operation of indoor units that
feature different functions,
designate the indoor unit
in the group with the
greatest number of functions as the main unit.

Fact
ory
setting
00

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of
the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address
+1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these

3

MA
remote
controller

Main remote
controller

MA

No settings required.

Sub remote controller

MA

Sub remote
controller

units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

-

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Make the same indoor unit group
settings with the system controller
as the ones that were made with
the MA remote controller.

Mai
n

To set the address to 100, set
the rotary switches to 50.

00

To set the address to 100, set
the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned
to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that
are assigned to the heat source
units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller
requires the connection of a
main BC controller.

00

Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to 100

The sum of the smallest address of the indoor units in
the same system and 50.
Assign sequential address to the heat source units in
the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically designated
as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary heat
source
unit

BC
controller
(Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest
address of the indoor units that are connected to the
sub BC controller and 50.

BC controller
(Main)

BC

51 to
100

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).

HWE09080

- 48 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[6] An Example of a System to which an ME Remote Controller is connected
1. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line 
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

OS1

Group

Group
IC

53

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

IC

01
TB5
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

02
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

To be left
unconnected

To be connected

A B

A B

101

102

103

RC

RC

RC

Group

OC

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2S

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

To be left
unconnected

m3

To be left
unconnected

07
TB15
1 2

m2

L31

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

03
TB15
1 2

A B

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

LC

IC

m1

TB7
M1 M2 S

Group

OC

To be left
unconnected

A B

A B

154

104

106

RC

RC

RC

L32

A B

Note1
System controller

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

A B S

(2) Cautions
1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board
from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.
5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on
the terminal block for centralized control on only one of
the heat source units.
6) A transmission booster must be connected to a system
in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20.
7) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units
of the 72 model or above are connected.
8) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE09080

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
3) ME remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 10m [32ft]
m2+m3 10m [32ft]
If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a
cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section
of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in
the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance described in 1).
When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the following cable
size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-14].
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 or larger)
Same as [5] 4.

- 49 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
Performing a group operation (including the group
operation of units in different refrigerant circuits).
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 4.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 4.
3) ME remote controller wiring
ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat source transmission line.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

Setting method

Notes

Factory
setting

IC

01 to 50

To perform a group
operation of indoor
units that have different functions, desigAssign sequential num- nate the indoor unit in
bers starting with the ad- the group with the
dress of the main unit in greatest number of
the same group +1.
functions as the main
(Main unit address +1,
unit.
main unit address +2,
main unit address +3,
etc.)

00

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each
of these units after assigning an address to all
indoor units.

None of these addresses may overlap
any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

3

Main
ME reremote
mote
controller controller

RC

101 to 150

Add 100 to the main unit
address in the group

101

Sub
remote
controller

RC

151 to 200

Add 150 to the main unit
address in the group

It is not necessary to
set the 100s digit.
To set the address
to 200, set the rotary switches to 00.

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat source
units in the same refrigerant circuit. The heat
source units are automatically designated as
OC, OS1, and OS2.
(Note)

To set the address to
100, set the rotary
switches to 50.

00

4

Heat source unit

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE09080

- 50 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. A system in which a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission line 
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with the ventilation unit
L12

L11
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

OS

OC

BC

52

51

53

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

Group
IC

To be left
unconnected

TB02
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2S

TB7
M1 M2S

To be connected

OC

L31

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2S

07
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

A1 B2

A1 B2

101

102

103

RC

RC

RC

55

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

Group

57
TB02
M1M2 S

TB7
M1M2 S

IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1M2 S

To be left
unconnected

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2S

L32

m3

To be left
unconnected

Group

BC

m2

56

TB7
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2S

LC

L22
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS

IC

03

A1 B2

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

TB15
1 2

IC

02

m1

TB7
M1M2 S

01

Group

Note1

A1 B2

A1 B2

A1 B2

154

104

106

RC

RC

RC

System controller
ABS

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

(2) Cautions

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters
that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For
each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected.
7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission
line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both
be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 3 ME remote controllers can be connected to
a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units
that are connected to different heat source units with each
other.
4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board
from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.
5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the
terminal block for centralized control on only one of the heat
source units.
6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown
in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold
separately) are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor
units that are listed in the specifications for each heat source
unit.)

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 8.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 9.
3) ME remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 10m [32ft]
m2+m3 10m [32ft]
If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a
cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section
of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in
the maximum indoor-heat source transmission line distance described in (1).
When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the following cable
size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-16].
4) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25 mm2 [AWG16] or large)
Same as [5] 9.

Number of transmission booster
(sold separately) required
1 unit

2 units

When the P72 and P96 models
are not included in the connected
indoor units

15 - 34
units

35 - 50
units

When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor
units

11 - 26
units

27 - 42
units

HWE09080

3 units
43 - 50
units

- 51 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
Performing a group operation (including the group
operation of units in different refrigerant circuits).
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 9.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 8.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 6.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 9.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 9.
3) ME remote controller wiring
ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat source transmission line.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to
50

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

3

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit
in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller, make
the settings for the indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC
controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC
controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor units in the
way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Port number setting is
required
To perform a group operation of indoor units
that have different functions, set the indoor unit
in the group with the
greatest number of
functions as the main
unit.

00

None of these addresses may
overlap any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with the
address of the main unit in the same group
+1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address
+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

LC

01 to
50

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to
each of these units after assigning an address
to all indoor units.

Main
RC
ME
remote conremote
troller
controller
Sub
RC

101 to
150

Add 100 to the main unit address in
the group

151 to
200

Add 150 to the main unit address in
the group

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the heat
source units in the same refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically
designated as OC and OS.(Note)

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to 100

Assign an address that equals the sum of the
smallest address of the indoor units that are
connected to the sub BC controller and 50.

BC controller (Main)

BC

remote controller

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

It is not necessary to set the
100s digit.
To set the address to 200,
set the rotary switches to 00.

101

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned
to the heat source units or to
the sub BC controller, use a
different, unused address
within the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires the connection
of a main BC controller.

00

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the
same).

HWE09080

- 52 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and ME Remote Controller are connected
1. PQHY
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

L12
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40. Group

Group

SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

OC

IC

IC

IC

53

52

51

01

02

06

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB5
TB15
M1 M2 S 1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

A

To be connected

B

A

B

106
MA

L31

L21

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

OS1

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

Group

OC

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

RC

Group

IC

IC

IC

03

04

05

TB5
TB15
M1 M2 S 1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
To be left
unconnected

A

To be left
unconnected

B

A

B

104
RC

L32

MA

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note1

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

System controller
A B S

(2) Cautions
1) Be sure to connect a system controller.
2) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot
both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote
controller addresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are connected to the ME remote controller.
4) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different heat source units
with each other.
7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board
from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.
8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on
the terminal block for centralized control on only one of
the heat source units.
9) A transmission booster must be connected to a system
in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20.
10) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units
of the 72 model or above are connected.
11) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
HWE09080

connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).
(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
4) ME remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25mm2 or larger)
Same as [5] 4.

- 53 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) ME remote controller wiring
Same as [6]
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [6]
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [6]
5) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 4.
6) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 4.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Opera- Indoor
tion
with the unit
MA remote
controller

MA
remote
controller

2

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Opera- Indoor
tion
with the unit
ME remote
controller

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address
to the main unit in the group.

Assign an address smaller
than that of the indoor unit that
is connected to the ME remote controller.
Enter the same indoor unit
group settings on the system
controller as the ones that
were entered on the MA remote controller.
To perform a group operation
of indoor units that have different functions, designate the
indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of functions as the main unit.

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

Main reMA
mote controller

No
settings
required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made according to the remote
controller function selection

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

ME re- Main reRC
mote
mote concontroller
troller
RC
Sub
remote
controller

101 to
150

Add 100 to the main unit
address in the group.

151 to
200

Add 150 to the main unit
address in the group.

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

Factory
setting
00

Main

Enter the indoor unit group settings on the system controller
(MELANS).
Assign an address larger than
those of the indoor units that
are connected to the MA remote controller.
To perform a group operation
of indoor units that have different functions, designate the
indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of functions as the main unit.

00

It is not necessary to set
the 100s digit.
To set the address to 200,
set the rotary switches to
00.

101

3

LOSSNAY

LC

4

Heat source unit

To set the address to 100,
OC 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the heat source set the rotary switches to 50.
OS1
units in the same refrigerOS2

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

00

antcircuit. The heat
source units are automatically designated as OC,
OS1, and OS2.(Note)

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.
HWE09080

- 54 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. PQRY
(1) Sample control wiring
L12

L11
Move the male connector
from CN41 to CN40.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

Group

OS

OC

BC

IC

IC

IC

52

51

53

01

02

06

TB3
M1M2

TB3
M1M2

TB7
M1M2 S

To be left
unconnected

TB5
M1M2S

TB02
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1M2 S
To be connected

A1 B2

A1 B2

106
MA

L22

L31

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS

Group

OC

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

Group

BC

56

IC

IC

IC

03

04

05

TB5
M1M2S

TB02
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

RC

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

A1 B2

A1 B2

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

To be left
unconnected

To be left
unconnected

L32

104
MA

RC

Note1
System controller

*1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
*2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

AB S

The left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the
above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units
can be connected.
10) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).
(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 8.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 9.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 6.
4) ME remote controller wiring
Same as [6] 2.
5) Maximum line distance via heat source unit
(1.25 mm2 or larger)
Same as [5] 4.

(2) Cautions
1)
2)
3)

4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Be sure to connect a system controller.
ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller addresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are connected to the ME remote controller.
No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group
of indoor units.
No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group
of indoor units.
Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are
connected to different heat source units with each other.
Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41
to CN40 on only one of the heat source units.
Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal
block for centralized control on only one of the heat source units.
When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the
table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately)
are required.
To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel.
(Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are
listed in the specifications for each heat source unit.)
Number of transmission booster
(sold separately) required
1 unit

2 units

3 units

When the P72 and P96 models
are not included in the connected
indoor units

15 - 34
units

35 - 50
units

-

When the P72 or P96 model is included in the connected indoor
units

11 - 26
units

HWE09080

27 - 42
units

43 - 50
units

- 55 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 6.
4) ME remote controller wiring
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [6] 1.
5) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 9.
6) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor-heat source transmission line
Same as [5] 8.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 6.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 9.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 9.
3) MA remote controller wiring
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system

HWE09080

- 56 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(5) Address setting method
Procedure
s
1

2

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Operation with
the
MA remote
controller

Operation with
the
ME remote
controller

Setting method

Notes

Assign an address smaller than that of
the indoor unit that is connected to the
ME remote controller.
Enter the same indoor unit group settings on the system controller as the
ones that were entered on the MA remote controller.
To perform a group operation of indoor
units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of
Port number setting is required

Main
unit

IC

01 to
50

Assign the smallest address to
the main unit in the group.
In a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the
indoor units in the following order.
(i) Indoor unit to be connected to
the main BC controller
(ii) Indoor unit to be connected to
sub BC controller 1
(iii) Indoor unit to be connected to
sub BC controller 2
Make the settings for the indoor
units in the way that the formula "(i)
< (ii) < (iii)" is true.

Sub
unit

IC

01 to
50

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main
unit in the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit address
+2, main unit address +3, etc.)

MA
remote
controller

Main remote
controller

MA

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made according
to the remote controller function selection

Indoor
unit

Main
unit

IC

01 to
50

Assign the smallest address
to the main unit in the group.

Sub
unit

IC

01 to
50

Assign sequential numbers
starting with the address of the
main unit in the same group
+1. (Main unit address +1,
main unit address +2, main
unit address +3, etc.)

ME
remote
controller

Main remote
controller

RC

101 to
150

Add 100 to the main unit address in the group.

Sub
remote
controller

RC

151 to
200

Add 150 to the main unit address in the group.

Indoor
unit

Factory setting
00

Main

Assign an address higher than those of
the indoor units that are connected to
the MA remote controller.
Make the initial settings for the indoor
unit group settings via the system controller.
To perform a group operation of indoor
units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of functions as the
main unit.
Port number setting is required.
Addresses that are assigned to the indoor units that are connected to the sub
BC controller should be higher than the
addresses that are assigned to the indoor units that are connected to the
main BC controller.

00

It is not necessary to set the 100s
digit.
To set the address to 200, set it to
00.

101

3

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to
50

Assign an arbitrary but unique
address to each of these units
after assigning an address to
all indoor units.

None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

4

Heat source unit

OC
OS

51 to
100

Assign sequential address to the
heat source units in the same
refrigerant circuit.
The heat source units are automatically designated as OC and
OS.(Note)

00

5

Auxiliary
heat
source
unit

BCcontroller (Sub)

BS

51 to
100

Assign an address that equals the
sum of the smallest address of the
indoor units that are connected to
the sub BC controller and 50.

To set the address to 100, set it to 50.
If the addresses that is assigned to the
main BC controller overlaps any of the
addresses that are assigned to the heat
source units or to the sub BC controller,
use a different, unused address within
the setting range.
The use of a sub BC controller requires
the connection of a main BC controller.

BC controller
(Main)

BC

OC (or OS if it exists) +1

The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS.
They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same).

HWE09080

- 57 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length
(1) End branching 
P72 - P120 models

A
D

First branch
(Branch joint)

Branch header

L
B

cap

d

e

f

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

4

5

C

Branch joint
a

6

c

b

h

H (Heat source unit above indoor unit)
H' (Heat source unit below indoor unit)

Heat source unit

1

Indoor

2

Indoor

3

Indoor

Unit: m [ft]

Operation
Length

Height
difference

Pipe sections

Total pipe length

A+B+C+D
+a+b+c+d+e+f

300 [984] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to
the farthest indoor unit

A+B+C+c or
A+D+f

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190
[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( )

B+C+c or
D+f

40 [131] or less

Heat source unit above
indoor unit

H

50 [164] or less

Heat source unit below
indoor unit

H'

40 [131] or less

h

15 [49] or less

Between indoor and
heat source units

Between indoor units

HWE09080

Allowable length of
pipes

- 58 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
P144 - P360 models
Provide a trap on the pipe (gas pipe only) within 2 m from the
joint pipe if the total length of the pipe that connects the joint
pipe and the heat source unit exceeds 2 m.

h2

Note1 Install the pipe that connects the branch pipe and the heat source units
in the way that it has a downward inclination toward the branch pipe.

To indoor unit

Downward inclination

To indoor unit
Joint pipe

2m [6ft]

A

B

Trap
(gas pipe
only)

D
C

To indoor unit
2m [6ft] Max.

Upward inclination
Second gas refrigerant distributor
Second liquid refrigerant distributor
First liquid refrigerant distributor
First gas refrigerant distributor

L

(Note)
E

F

First branch

G

I

a

b

c

d

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

1

2

3

4

J

h1

H

To indoor unit
Joint pipe

K

E

To downstream units

Note : "Total sum of downstream unit model numbers"
in the table is the sum of the model numbers
of the units after point E in the figure.

M

e

f

g

i

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

5

6

7

8

Unit: m [ft]

Pipe sections

Allowable length of
pipes

A+B+C+D

10 [32] or less

A+B+C+D+E+F+G+I+J
+K+M+a+b+c+d+e+f+g
+i

300 [984] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the heat source unit to
the farthest indoor unit

A(B)+C+E+J+K+M+i

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190
[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( )

G+I+J+i

40 [131] or less

Between indoor and heat source units

H

50 [164] or less
(40 [131] or below if
heat source unit is below indoor unit)

Between indoor units

h1

15 [49] or less

Between heat source units

h2

0.1[0.3] or less

Operation
Length

Between heat source units
Total pipe length

Height
difference

HWE09080

- 59 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
1. Refrigerant pipe size 
(1) Diameter of the refrigerant pipe between the heat source unit and the first branch (heat source unit pipe size)
Heat source unit set
name

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

P72 model

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø9.52 [3/8"]

*1

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P120 model

ø9.52 [3/8"]

*2

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P144 model

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P168 - 240 model

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P264 - 312models

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

P336- 360 models

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

P96 model

*1. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 90 m [295 ft].
*2. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 40 m [131 ft].
(2) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first branch and the indoor unit (indoor unit pipe size)
Indoor unit model

Pipe diameter (mm) [inch]

06 - 15 models

Liquid pipe

ø6.35 [1/4"]

Gas pipe

ø12.7 [1/2"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø15.88 [5/8"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø19.05 [3/4"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø22.2 [7/8"]

18 - 54 models

72 model

96 model

(3) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the branches for connection to indoor units
Total capacity of the
downstream units

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

- 54

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P72 - P108

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P109 - P144

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P145 - P240

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P241 - P308

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

P309 -

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

(4) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor and the second distributor

HWE09080

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

- 60 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(5) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor or the second distributor and heat source units
Heat source unit
model

Composing unit models

Liquid pipe (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe (mm) [inch]

P144

P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P72
P168

P96
P72

P192

P96
P96

P216

P120
P96

P240

P120
P120

P264

P96
P96
P72

P288

P96
P96
P96

P312

P120
P96
P96

P336

P120
P120
P96

P360

P120
P120
P120

HWE09080

- 61 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(1) System that requires 16 BC controller ports or fewer  
Heat source unit

*Use a main BC controller when connecting the heat source units of
P144 model or above.

A
H

H'
BC controller

Branch joint
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)
(Supplied with the BC Controller)

h1

a

Junction pipe
(CMY-R160-J)

Indoor

d
h2

B
b

c

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

(P06 - P54 models)

(P72 or P96 model)

Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below

Unit: m [ft]
Operation
Length

Pipe sections

Allowable length of pipes

A+B+a+b+c+d

Refer to the restrictions on the total piping
length in the graph on the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat source
unit to the farthest indoor unit

A+B+d

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and BC controller

A

110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and indoor unit

B+d

40 [131] or less*1

Heat source unit
above indoor unit

H

50 [164] or less

Heat source unit
below indoor unit

H'

40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC controller

h1

15[49](10[32]) or less*2

Between indoor units

h2

15[49](10[32]) or less *2

Total pipe length

Height
difference Between indoor
and heat source
units

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the
restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).
*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

HWE09080

- 62 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

1) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two
ports before connecting them.
2) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.
3) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).

HWE09080

1000
[3280]
900
[2952]
800
[2624]
700
[2296]
600
[1968]
500
[1640]
400
[1312]
300
[984]
200
[656] 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
[32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]
Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

- 63 -

The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units
70

[229]

Pipe length between main BC
controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A]

60

[196]
50

[164]
40

[131]
30

[98]
20

[64]
10

[32]
0
0

5

10

15

[16]
[32]
[49]
Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(2) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers 

Heat source unit

Branch joint
(CMY-Y202-G2)
(CMY-Y102L-G2)
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

A

H

BC controller (main)

H'

C

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)
(Supplied with the BC Controller)

h1

Junction pipe
(CMY-R160-J)

a
Indoor

(P06 - P54 models)

Indoor

e
D

h1

BC controller (sub)
h3

Branch joint
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

E

BC controller (sub)

h2

B
b

d

c

Indoor

Indoor

(P72 or P96 model)

f

h1

Indoor

Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below

Indoor

Unit: m [ft]
Operation
Length

Height
difference

Pipe sections

Allowable length of pipes

A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e+f

Refer to the restrictions on the total piping length in the graphon the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat
source unit to the farthest indoor unit

A+C+E+f

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and
BC controller

A

110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and indoor unit

B+d or C+D+e
or C+E+f

40 [131] or less*1

Heat source
unit above
indoor unit

H

50 [164] or less

Heat source
unit below
indoor unit

H'

40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC
controller

h1

15 [49](10[32]) or less*2

Between indoor units

h2

15 [49](10[32]) or less *2

Between the BC controller
(main or sub) and the sub BC
controller

h3

15 [49] or less

Total pipe length

Between indoor
and heat source
units

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the
restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).
*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

HWE09080

- 64 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes
will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers.
2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above.
3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel.
4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two
ports before connecting them.
5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.
6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).
7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or
below (when two GB type controllers are connected P126 or below for both combined).
The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below.
If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with
two sub controllers is P168 or below.

1000
[3280]
900
[2952]
800
[2624]
700
[2296]
600
[1968]
500
[1640]
400
[1312]
300
[984]
200
[656] 10 20
[32] [64]

70

[229]

Pipe length between main BC
controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

Restrictions on pipe length [PQRY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A/YHMU-A] The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units

50

[164]
40

[131]
30

[98]
20

[64]
10

[32]
0

30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
[98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]

0

5

10

15

[16]
[32]
[49]
Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

HWE09080

60

[196]

- 65 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(3) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers 

Heat source unit 1
Heat source unit 2
Branch joint : CMY-Q100VBK
On the low-pressure side, the twinning kit connects to the pipes on site inside the heat source unit.
When different capacity units are combined, connect the kit to the larger capacity heat source unit.

h4

F

Branch joint
(CMY-Y202-G2)
(CMY-Y102L-G2)
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

G
A

Indoor

e
D

H

BC controller (main)

H'

a

h3

C

Branch joint
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Reducer (P06 - P18 models)
(Supplied with the BC Controller)

h1

(P06 - P54 models)

E

BC controller (sub)

h2

B

Junction pipe
(CMY-R160-J)

Indoor

h1

BC controller (sub)

b

c

d

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

(P72 or P96 model)

f

h1

Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below

Indoor

Unit: m [ft]
Operation
Length

Pipe sections

Total pipe length

F+G+A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e Refer to the restrictions on the total pip+f
ing length in the graph on the next page.

Total pipe length from the heat
source unit to the farthest indoor unit

F(G)+A+C+E+f

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190 [623] or less)

Between heat source unit and
BC controller

F(G)+A

110 [360] or less

Between BC controller and indoor unit

B+d or C+D+e
or C+E+f

40 [131] or less*1

F+G

5 [16] or less

Heat source
unit above
indoor unit

H

50 [164] or less

Heat source
unit below
indoor unit

H'

40 [131] or less

Between indoor unit and BC
controller

h1

15 [49](10[32]) or less*2

Between indoor units

h2

15 [49](10[32]) or less *2

Between the BC controller
(main or sub) and the sub BC
controller

h3

15 [49] or less

Between heat source units

h4

0.1 [0.3] or less

Between heat source units
Height
difference

Allowable length of pipes

Between indoor
and heat source
units

*1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe
the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below (except the P96 model).
*2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

HWE09080

- 66 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes
will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers.
2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above.
3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel.
4) To connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units, use an optional junction pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two
ports before connecting them.
5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 model of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port.
6) All the units that are connected to the same ports can only be operated in the same operation mode (cooling/heating).
7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or
below (when two GB type controllers are connected, P126 or below for both combined).
The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below.
If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with
two sub controllers is P168 or below.
Restrictions on pipe length

1000
[3280]
900
[2952]
800
[2624]
700
[2296]
600
[1968]
500
[1640]
400
[1312]
300
[984]
200
[656]10 20
[32] [64]

70

[229]

Pipe length between main BC
controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft])

[PQRY-P144, P168, P192, P216, P240THMU-A/YHMU-A]

The height difference and the pipe length between
BC controller and indoor units

50

[164]
40

[131]
30

[98]
20

[64]
10

[32]
0

30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
[98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360]

0

Pipe length between heat source unit and BC controller (m[ft])

HWE09080

60

[196]

5

[16]

10

[32]

15

[49]

Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft])

- 67 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. Refrigerant pipe size 
(1) Between heat source unit and the first twinning pipe (Part A)
Unit : mm [inch]
Refrigerant pipe size

Connection to heat source unit and BC controller

Heat source unit
P72

Low-pressure pipe

High-pressure pipe

Low-pressure pipe

High-pressure pipe

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P96
P120
P144
P168
P192

ø22.2[7/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P216
ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P240

(2) Between BC controller and indoor unit (Sections a, b, c, d, e, and f )
Unit : mm [inch]
Refrigerant pipe size

Indoor unit connection
(Flare connection for all models)

Indoor unit
P06, P08, P12, P15, P18

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe

ø6.35 [1/4"]

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø6.35 [1/4"]

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P24, P27, P30
P36, P48, P54
P72

ø19.05 [3/4"]
ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]
ø12.7 [1/2"]

P96

ø22.2[7/8"]

ø22.2[7/8"]

(3) Between the main and sub BC controllers (Section C)
Unit : mm [inch]
Refrigerant pipe size (Brazed connection on all models )
Indoor unit
Liquid pipe
- P72

High-pressure gas pipe

Low-pressure gas pipe

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø9.52 [3/8"]
P73 - P108

ø22.2 [7/8"]
ø19.05 [3/4"]

P109 - P126
ø12.7 [1/2"]
P127 - P144

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]
ø22.2 [7/8"]

P145 - P168

ø15.88 [5/8"]

Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub
BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are
connected to the sub controller.

HWE09080

- 68 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
3. Connecting the BC controller 
(1) Size of the pipe that fits the standard BC controller ports
P72 - P120 models

Connection: Brazed connection
To heat
source unit

BC controller

*1
Reducer
(Standard
supplied parts)

Indoor

*2
Junction pipe kit
(Model name:
CMY-R160-J)
(Optional accessory)

Indoor

Indoor

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)
(Optional accessory)
B

A

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model
3* Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below
(All units connected to the same port
must be in the same operating mode.)
The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units.
To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below.

Unit : mm [inch]
Pipe sections
Operation
Heat source unit
side

High-pressure side (liquid)

Low-pressure side (gas)

PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A

ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A
PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø9.52 [3/8"]
(Flare connection)

ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Flare connection)

Indoor unit side

* BC controllers can only be connected to P72 - P120 models of heat source units.

HWE09080

- 69 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use
the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.

2) To connect P36 - P96 models of indoor units (or when the
total capacity of indoor units exceeds P31), use a junction
pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.

70 [2-25/32"]

Liquid pipe side:3/8F
(Flare connection)
Gas pipe side:5/8F
(Flare connection)

234 [9-7/32"]

Liquid pipe side:3/8F
(Flare connection)
Gas pipe side:5/8F
(Flare connection)

Liquid pipe side: 6.35[1/4"]ID
Gas pipe side: 12.7[1/2"]ID

Liquid pipe side:
Gas pipe side:

9.52[3/8”]ID

19.05[3/4”]ID(*1)

Supplied with a thermal insulation cover

Note) Use the flare nut that is supplied with the BC controller.

3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)
Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)
Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units
Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).
Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper size pipes
based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.
Unit : mm [inch]

HWE09080

Total capacity of indoor units

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe

P54 or below

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

- 70 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(2) Size of the pipe that fits the main BC controller ports
P72 - P240 models
To heat
source unit

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)
(Optional accessory)

Connection: Brazed connection
BC controller (main)

*1
Reducer
(Standard supplied parts)

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

*2
Junction pipe kit
(Model name:
CMY-R160-J)
(Optional accessory)

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model

A

B

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

3* Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below
(All units connected to the same port
must be in the same operating mode.)

The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor
units, follow the procedure below.

1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.
2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31
or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.
3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)
Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)
Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units
Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).
Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total
capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.
Unit : mm [inch]
Total capacity of indoor units

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe

P54 or below

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

Unit : mm [inch]
Pipe sections
Model
Heat source unit
side

High pressure side (Liquid)

Low-pressure side (Gas)

PQRY-P72THMU-A/YHMU-A

ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P96THMU-A/YHMU-A

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]
(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P120THMU-A/YHMU-A
PQRY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

ø22.2 [7/8"]
(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P168TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A
PQRY-P192TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A
PQRY-P216TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]
(Brazed connection)

PQRY-P240TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A
Indoor unit side

HWE09080

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø9.52 [3/8"]
(Flare connection)

- 71 -

ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Flare connection)

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(3) Size of the pipe that fits the sub BC controller ports

Connection: Brazed connection
To Main BC controller
BC controller (sub)
*1
Reducer
(Standard supplied parts)

Indoor

Indoor

Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)
(Optional accessory)

*2
Junction pipe kit
(Model name:
CMY-R160-J)
(Optional accessory)
A

Indoor

Indoor

P18 model or below P24-P54 models P72 or P96 model

B

Indoor

Indoor

3* Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below
(All units connected to the same port
must be in the same operating mode.)

The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24-P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor
units, follow the procedure below.

1) To connect P06-P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller.
2) To connect the units between the P36 and P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P31
or above), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles.
3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe)
Maximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below)
Maximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units
Branch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory).
Refrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total
capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference.
Unit : mm [inch]
Total capacity of indoor units

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe

P54 or below

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P73 - P96

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

Unit : mm [inch]
Operation

On the BC controller
side

Pipe sections

Total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the BC
controller

High-pressure side
(liquid)

Low-pressure side
(gas)

P72 model or below

ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

P73 - P108

ø19.05 [3/4"]
(Brazed connection)

ø22.2 [7/8"]
(Brazed connection)

P109 - P126
P127 - P144
P145 - P168

ø22.2 [7/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]
(Brazed connection)

Liquid pipe side

ø9.52 [3/8"]
(Brazed connection)

ø12.7 [1/2"]
(Brazed connection)
ø15.88 [5/8"]
(Brazed connection)

Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub
BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are
connected to the sub controller.

HWE09080

- 72 -

GB

III Heat source Unit Components
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

HWE09080

Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit.................................................... 75
Control Box of the Heat source Unit ................................................................................ 78
Heat source Unit Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 81
BC Controller Components .............................................................................................. 88
Control Box of the BC Controller...................................................................................... 91
BC Controller Circuit Board.............................................................................................. 92

- 73 -

GB

- 74 -

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
III Heat source Unit Components

[1] Heat source Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit
1. Front view of a heat source unit
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A
PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

Top panel

Control box

Front panel

HWE09080

- 75 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
2. Refrigerant circuit
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

LEVINV

Check valve(CV7a)
Solenoid valve(SV7a)
Solenoid valve(SV9)
Check valve(CV6a)

Low-pressure sensor
(63LS)
Component cooler
heat exchanger

Solenoid valve block
(SV4a, SV4b, SV4d)

4-way valve(21S4a)
Check valve(CV5a)

Solenoid valve(SV7b)

Check valve(CV3a)
High-pressure
sensor(63HS1)
High-pressure
switch(63H1)

Check valve(CV2a)

Transformer Box
(YHMU only)

Accumulator
(ACC)

Check valve(CV4a)

Check valve(CV11)

Water heat exchanger

Refrigerant service valve
(low pressure)(BV1)
Compressor(COMP)

Refrigerant service valve
(high pressure)(BV2)

Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1)
Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2)
Oil separator(O/S)

Solenoid valve(SV1a)
Check valve(CV8)

HWE09080

- 76 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
(2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

LEVINV

Check valve(CV7a)
Solenoid valve(SV7a)
Solenoid valve(SV9)
Low-pressure sensor
(63LS)
Double pipe(SCC)
Check valve(CV6a)

Component cooler
heat exchanger
4-way valve(21S4a)

Solenoid valve block
(SV4a, SV4b, SV4d)

Check valve
(CV1a)

Solenoid valve(SV7b)
High-pressure
sensor(63HS1)
High-pressure
switch(63H1)

LEV1

LEV2b

LEV2a

Transformer Box
(YHMU only)

Check valve(CV4a)
Water heat exchanger

Refrigerant service valve
(low pressure)(BV1)
Refrigerant service valve
(high pressure)(BV2)
Accumulator(ACC)

Solenoid valve(SV1)

Compressor(COMP)

Check valve(CV8)

Check joint (high pressure)(CJ1)
Check joint (low pressure)(CJ2)
Oil separator(O/S)

HWE09080

- 77 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

[2] Control Box of the Heat source Unit
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A
DC reactor
(DCL)

Electromagnetic relay
(72C)

Relay board

Control board

Inrush current resistor

Note2

Noise filter

INV board
Note2
Ground terminal
Smoothing capacitor
Power supply terminal block
(C1)
(TB1)

Note1

M-NET board

Terminal block for
transmission line
(TB3,TB7)

Pump interlock terminal block
(TB8)

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof
and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.
2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE09080

- 78 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A


Control box houses high-voltage parts.
When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of
the internal components.
Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

Electromagnetic relay Capacitor
(72C)
(C100)

Inrush current resistor
(R1,R5) Note2

Relay board Control board

DC reactor
(DCL)

Noise filter

Power supply terminal block
L1,L2,L3
(TB1)

M-NET board

Ground
terminal
Fuse
(F4)

Fuse
(F5)

Note1
INV board

Terminal block for
transmission line
(TB3, TB7)

Pump interlock terminal block
(TB8)

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof
and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.
2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE09080

- 79 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
1. Transformer Box
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

Transformer
(T03)

Transformer
(T02)

HWE09080

- 80 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

[3] Heat source Unit Circuit Board
1. Heat source unit control board

CNDC
Bus voltage input
P
N

CN2
Serial communication signal input CN801
GND INV board
Pressure switch
Output 17VDC
connection

CN332
Output 18VDC
GND

CN4
GND
Serial communication signal output

CNAC2
L1
L2
CN505
72C driving output
(THMU)
LEV
driving output

LED1
Service LED
CN51
Output 12VDC
Compressor
ON/OFF output
Error output
SWU1,2
Address switch
SW1-5
Dip switch
Actuator
driving output

CN72
72C driving output
(YHMU)
Sensor
input

LED3
Lit when powered

LED2
Lit during normal
CPU operation

CNAC
L1
L2

HWE09080

F01
Fuse
250V AC/3.15A

CN41
Power supply for
CN40
centralized control OFF
Power supply for
centralized control ON
CN102
Power supply input for centralized control system (30VDC)
Indoor-heat source transmission line input/output (30VDC)

External signal input (contact input)

- 81 -

CNVCC2
Output 12VDC
Output 5VDC
GND

CNIT
Output 12VDC
GND
Output 5VDC
Power supply detection input
Power supply ON/OFF signal output
CNS2
Transmission line input/output
for centralized control system (30VDC)

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
2. M-NET board

CN04
Bus voltage input
CN03(THMU
only)
(YHMU only)
(THMU only)
Bus
voltage
input
Bus voltage output
F01
P
(THMU only)
250V
N
P
3.15A
N

CN102
Power supply output for centralized
control system (30VDC)
Indoor-heat source transmission line
input/output (30VDC)

CNS2
Transmission line
input/output for
centralized control
system (30VDC)

Grounding

CNIT
Input 12VDC
GND
Input 5VDC
Power supply
detection output
Power supply
ON/OFF signal input

LED1
Power supply for
indoor
transmission line

Grounding

HWE09080

Ground terminal for TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
transmission line for
TB3
Indoor-heat source transmission block centralized control

Grounding

- 82 -

TP1,2
Check pins for
indoor-heat source
transmission line

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
3. INV board
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

CN6
Open: No-load operation setting
Short-circuited: Normal setting

SC-P1
Rectifier diode output (P)

CN5V
GND
Output 5VDC
LED1
Lit: Inverter in normal operation
Blink: Inverter error

IGBT
(Rear)

CN4
GND(Control board)
Serial communication signal output
C30,31,32
Smoothing capacitor

CNDC
Bus voltage output
P
N

RSH1,2
Overcurrent detection
resistor

CN2
Serial communication signal output
GND
Input 17VDC

SC-P2
Bus voltage Input(P)

SC-V
Inverter output(V)

SC-W
Inverter output(W)

TB-P(Note)
Bus voltage output(P)
TB-N(Note)
Bus voltage output(N)

CT12
Current sensor(U)

SC-T
Input(L3)

SC-R
Input(L1)

CT3
Current sensor(L3)

CT22
Current sensor(W)
SC-U
Inverter output(U)

SC-S
Input(L2)

Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE09080

- 83 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

SC-P1
CN6
Rectifier diode output (P)
Open: No-load operation setting CN5V
RSH1
SC-P2
Short-circuited: Normal setting
GND
Overcurrent detection
LED1
Bus voltage Input(P)
Lit: Inverter in normal operation
5VDC output resistor
Blink: Inverter error
CN4
GND(Control board)
Serial communication
signal output

Bus voltage check
terminal (P)
Note
CN2
Serial communication
signal output
GND
17VDC input

IGBT
(Rear)
CN1
Bus voltage output
N
P
Bus voltage check
terminal (N)
Note 1

CNTYP Inverter
board type
SC-V
Inverter output(V)

SC-L1
Input(L1)

SC-W
Inverter output(W)
SC-U
Inverter output(U)

SC-L2
Input(L2)

SC-L3
Input(L3)

CT12
Current sensor(U)

CT22
Current sensor(W)

C30 C37
Smoothing capacitor

CT3
Current sensor(L3)

1) Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that
the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

HWE09080

- 84 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
4. Relay board

CN83
Pump interlock signal output
Pump interlock signal output
Pump interlock signal input
Pump interlock signal input

CNAC4
L1 input
L2

CNOUT2
12 VDC input
Relay driving signal input (X21)
Relay driving signal input (X22)
Relay driving signal input (X23)
Relay driving signal input (X24)
Relay driving signal input (X25)

HWE09080

- 85 -

CNPW
Pump interlock signal output
Pump interlock signal output

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
5. Noise Filter
(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

TB21
Input/output（L1）

CN02
Output
L1
L2

Grounding

TB22
Input/output（L2）

F2
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

TB23
Input/output（L3）

F1
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

CN01
Input
L3
L2
L1

HWE09080

- 86 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
(2) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A, PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

CN5
Output
(Rectified L2-L3 current)
P
N

CN4
Output
(Rectified L2-L3 current)
P
N

CN6
Input
L2
L3

CN2
Surge absorber circuit
Surge absorber circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit

Grounding

F1,F2,F3,F4
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

Grounding

CN1A
Input
L1

CN1B
Input
L3
L2

HWE09080

TB21
TB22
TB23
Input/output(L1) Input/output(L2) Input/output(L3)

- 87 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

[4] BC Controller Components
1. CMB-P
(1) Front

NU-G, GA

Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side)

Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

(2) Rear view 
TH11

PS1

SVM1
LEV3
LEV1

PS3

Gas/Liquid separator

TH16
Tube in tube heat exchanger

TH12

TH15

HWE09080

- 88 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
(3) Rear view 
LEV2

TH16

PS3

PS1

LEV3
TH11
LEV1

SVM2

Gas/Liquid separator

Tube in tube heat exchanger
SVM1

TH12

HWE09080

TH15

- 89 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
2. CMB-P
(1) Front

NU-GB, HB

Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side)

Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

(2) Rear view
TH12

LEV3

TH15

HWE09080

- 90 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

[5] Control Box of the BC Controller
1. CMB-P1016NU-G, GA

Transformer

Terminal block for
power supply

Terminal block for
transmission line

Relay board

HWE09080

BC controller board

- 91 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

[6] BC Controller Circuit Board
1. BC controller circuit board (BC board)

SW4

HWE09080

SW5

SW6

SW2

- 92 -

SW1

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]
2. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 4 board)

3. RELAY BOARD (RELAY 10 board)

HWE09080

- 93 -

GB

[ III Heat source Unit Components ]

HWE09080

- 94 -

GB

IV Remote Controller
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

HWE09080

Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers ................................... 97
Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller ............................. 98
Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller ........................................................... 102
Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller ................................. 103

- 95 -

GB

- 96 -

[ IV Remote Controller ]
IV Remote Controller

[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers

There are two types of remote controllers: ME remote controller, which is connected on the indoor-heat source transmission line, and MA remote controller, which is connected to each indoor unit.
1. Comparison of functions and specifications between MA and ME remote controllers
MA remote controller*1*2

Functions/specifications

ME remote controller*2*3

Remote controller address settings Not required

Required

Indoor-heat source unit address
settings

Not required (required only by a system
with one heat source unit)*4

Required

Wiring method

Non-polarized 2-core cable
Non-polarized 2-core cable
To perform a group operation, daisychain the indoor units using non-polarized 2-core cables.

Remote controller connection

Connectable to any indoor unit in the
group

Connectable anywhere on the indoor-heat
source transmission line

Interlock with the ventilation unit

Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up
via remote controller in the group.)

Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via
remote controller.)

Changes to be made upon grouping change

MA remote controller wiring between in- Either the indoor unit address and remote
door units requires rewiring.
controller address must both be changed,
or the registration information must be
changed via MELANS.

*1. MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and wireless remote controller.
*2. Either the MA remote controller or the ME remote controller can be connected when a group operation of units in a system with multiple heat source units is conducted or when a system controller is connected.
*3. ME remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.
*4. Depending on the system configuration, some systems with one heat source unit may require address settings.
2. Remote controller selection criteria
MA remote controller and ME remote controller have different functions and characteristics. Choose the one that better suits
the requirements of a given system. Use the following criteria as a reference.
MA remote controller*1*2

ME remote controller*1*2

There is little likelihood of system expansion and grouping changes.
Grouping (floor plan) has been set at the time of installation.

There is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote
controllers, system expansion, and grouping changes.
Grouping (floor plan) has not been set at the time of installation.
To connect the remote controller directly to the OA processing unit.

*1. ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
*2. A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected.




Heat source unit

Heat source unit

group

group

MA remote controller

Indoor unit

group

BC controller

HWE09080

M-NET transmission line
(indoor-heat source transmission line)

M-NET transmission line
(indoor-heat source transmission line)

group

BC controller
ME remote controller

- 97 -

Indoor unit

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller
1. Group settings/interlock settings
Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different heat source units or to manually set up the
indoor-heat source unit address.
(A) Group settings...........Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller,
and search and deletion of registered information.
(B) Interlock settings........Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units,
and search and deletion of registered information
[Operation Procedures]
(1) Address settings
Register the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller.
1 Bring up either the blinking display of HO by turning on the unit or the
˚C
TEMP.
ON/OFF
normal display by pressing the ON/OFF button.
The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the
C
next step.
CENTRALLY CONTROLLED
ON OFF
DAILY
AUTO OFF
CLOCK

1Hr.

˚C

REMAINDER

STAND BY
DEFROST

NOT AVAILABLE

CLOCK→ON→OFF

FILTER
CHECK MODE
TEST RUN
LIMIT TEMP.

FILTER

G

CHECK TEST

PAR-F27MEA

(A) Group Settings
2 Bring up the Group Setting window.
-Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [
]
simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as
shown below.

D

H

[Normal display]

A

TIMER SET

E

[Blinking display of HO ]

?F

B

(B) Interlock Settings
6 Bring up the Interlock Setting window.

-Press button G [
] to bring up the following display.
Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown
under step 2 .
Both the indoor unit address and
interlocked unit address will be
displayed together.

Indoor unit address display window

Indoor unit
Interlocked unit
address
address
display window display window

3 Select the unit address.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the addresses.
4 Register the indoor unit whose address appears on the

To search for an address,
go to section (2) Address Search.

7 Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the

LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through
the addresses.
- Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by
pressing button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the interlocked unit addresses.

display.
- Press button D [TEST] to register the indoor unit address
whose address appears on the display.
- If registration is successfully completed, unit type will appear
on the display as shown in the figure below.
- If the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor
unit, an error message will appear on the display. Check the
address, and try again.


8 Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor

units.
- Press button D [TEST] while both the indoor unit address and
the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked
are displayed to enter the interlock setting.
- Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the
LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display
window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit
address display window.

Unit type (Indoor unit in this case)



blinks to indicate a registration error.
(Indicates that selected address does not have a
corresponding unit.)

(Displayed alternately)

5 To register the addresses for multiple indoor units, repeat
steps 3 and 4 above.

If registration is successfully
completed, the two displays as
shown on the left will appear
alternately.
If the registration fails,
will blink on the display.
(Indicates that the selected
address does not have a
corresponding unit.)

To search for an address,
go to section (2) Address Search.
NOTE : Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the
LOSSNAY units; otherwise, the LOSSNAY units will
not operate.
To next page.

HWE09080

- 98 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 in the previous page to interlock

all the indoor units in a group with the LOSSNAY unit.
(C) To return to the normal display
When all the group settings and interlock settings are made, take the
following step to go back to the normal display.
10 Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [
]
simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the
window as shown in step 1 .

To go back to the normal display, To search for an address,
follow step 10 .
go to section (2) Address Search.

(2) Address search
To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into
the remote controller, follow steps 1 and 2 .

(A) To search group settings

(B) Interlock setting search

11 Bring up the Group Setting window.

After performing step 6 , proceed as follows:
12 Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on

- Each pressing of button E [ ] will bring up the address of a
registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display.

the display.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be searched by pressing
button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the interlocked addresses.



Unit type
(Indoor unit in this case)
LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up
the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window.



13 Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit
that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step 12 .

- With each pressing of button E [ ], the address of the
LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be
displayed alternately.

- When only one unit address is registered, the same address
will remain on the display regardless of how many times the
button is pressed.
- When the address of multiple units are registered
(i.e. 011, 012, 013 ), they will be displayed one at a time in
an ascending order with each pressing of button E [ ] .

Address of an interlocked
LOSSNAY unit

(Displayed alternately)

14 Bring up the address of another registered unit on the

To delete an address, go to
section (3) Address Deletion.

display.
- After completing step 13 , a subsequent pressing of button
E [
] will bring up the address of another registered
unit.
(The display method is the same as the one in step 13 .)

To go back to the normal display,
follow step 10 .

Address of another
interlocked unit

(Displayed alternately)

To delete an address,
go to section (3) Address Deletion .

(3) Address deletion
The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings.
The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings.
Follow the steps in section (2) Address Search to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the
display window. To delete an address, the address must first be bought up on the display.
15 Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units.
- Press button F? [CLOCK ON OFF] twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the
display to delete the interlock setting.

HWE09080

- 99 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]
(A) To delete group settings

(B) To delete interlock settings



will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

If deletion is successfully
completed, - - will appear in
the unit type display window.
If the deletion fails,
will
appear in the unit type display
window. In this case, repeat the
steps above.

(Displayed alternately)

- If a transmission error occurs, the selected setting will not be
deleted, and the display will appear as shown below.
In this case, repeat the steps above.


will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

To go back to the normal display, follow step 10 .

(4) Making (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group from any arbitrary remote controller
(A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller.
Refer to (B) Interlock Settings under section 1 Group Settings/Interlock Settings for operation procedures.
Set the address as shown below.
(A) To make group settings
Interlocked unit address display window...Remote controller address
Indoor unit address display window...........The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller
(B) To make interlock settings
Interlocked unit address display window...LOSSNAY address
Indoor unit address display window..........The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY

2. Remote controller function selection via the ME remote controller
In the remote controller function selection mode, the settings for four types of functions can be made or changed as necessary.
1) Skip-Auto-Mode setting
The automatic operation mode that is supported by some simultaneous cooling/heating type units can be made unselectable via the ME remote
controller.
2) Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of COOL/HEAT during automatic operation mode)
When the automatic operation mode is selected, the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room
temperature. In this case,
or
will appear on the remote controller display.
This setting can be changed so that only
will appear on the display.
3) Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature)
Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller, the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the
remote controller.
4) Narrowed preset temperature range mode
The default temperature ranges are 19 C to 30 C in the cooling/dry mode and 17 C to 28 C in the heating mode and 19 C to 28 C in the auto mode.
By changing these ranges (raising the lower limit for the cooling/dry mode and lowering the upper limit for the heating mode), energy can be saved.
NOTE
When making the temperature range setting on the simultaneous cooling/heating type units that supports the automatic operation mode to save on
energy consumption, enable the Skip-Auto-Mode setting to make the automatic operation mode unselectable. If the automatic operation mode is
selected, the energy-saving function may not work properly.
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for the Skip-Auto-Mode, restricted preset
temperature range mode (AUTO), and operation mode display selection mode are invalid. If an attempt is made to change the preset temperature range,
“LIMIT TEMP.” appears on the display.
[Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller]
Normal display
1

1

Remote controller function selection mode
Skip-Auto-Mode setting
*2 2

3

Temperature range setting mode (AUTO)
TEMP.

2

ON/OFF

CLOCKONOFF

FILTER

5

CHECK TEST

PAR-F27MEA

3

2

*1

*1

[Normal display]
1 : Press and hold the [CHECK] and

[
] buttons simultaneously
for two seconds.
) ] button
) ] button

Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of the automatic mode)
2

3 *2

2 : [SET TEMP. (
3 : [SET TEMP. (

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Cooling)

TIMER SET

4

2

3

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Heating)
2

3

Room temperature display selection mode

HWE09080

3

- 100 -

2

3

*1 : Skip-Auto-Mode is enabled
*2 : Skip-Auto-Mode is disabled

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[Operation Procedures]
1. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display will appear as shown in the previous page (Normal
display).
2. Press buttons 1 [CHECK] and [
] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the “Skip-Auto-Mode setting.”
under the remote controller function selection mode. Press button 2 [SET TEMP. ( )] or 3 [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the other four modes
under the remote controller function selection mode.

Skip-Auto-Mode setting (Making the automatic operation mode unselectable)
This setting is valid only when the controller is connected to the simultaneous cooling/heating type air conditioning units that
support the automatic operation mode.
“
” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET (
between “ON” and “OFF.”

[TIMER SET (

) ((

) or (

)] button switches

))] button

When set to “ON,” the automatic operation mode is available for selection in the function selection mode.
When set to “OFF,” the automatic operation mode is not available for selection in the function selection mode, and an automatic operation
cannot be performed.
(The automatic operation mode is skipped in the function selection mode sequence.)

Operation mode display selection mode (Changing the type of display that appears during the automatic mode operation)
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.

will blink, and either “ON”or “OFF” will light up. Press button 4 [TIMER SET (

) or (

)] in this state to

switch between “ON” and “OFF.”

[TIMER SET (
When it is set to ON,
When it is set to OFF, only

) ((

))] button

will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.
will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.

Restricted preset temperature range mode (The range of preset temperature can be changed.)
1) Temperature range setting for the cooling/dry mode
will light up in the display window, and the temperature range for the cooling/dry mode will appear on the display.
[Lower limit temperature]: Appears in the preset temperature display window [Upper limit temperature: Appears in the time display window
Switch between the Lower and Upper limit temperature setting by pressing the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button. The selected temperature setting blinks.

[TIMER SET (

) ((

))] button

[The left figure shows the display that appears when the current temperature range setting is between 19 C and 30 C in the Cool/Dry mode,
and the lower limit temperature is selected to be set.]
Press button 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature.
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 30 C

30 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

2) Temperature range setting for heating
“
” and the settable temperature range for heating appear on the display.
As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 17 C
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C

28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
17 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

3) Temperature range setting for the automatic mode
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.
“
” and the temperature range for the automatic operation mode appear on the display.
As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.
28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C
19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

Room temperature display selection mode (Switching between the display or non-display of room temperature on the controller)

“ 88 C ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET (
switches between “ON” and “OFF.”
˚C

) or (

)] button

˚C

[TIMER SET (

) ((

))] button

When set to “ON,” room temperature always appears on the display during operation.
When set to “OFF,” room temperature does not appear on the display during operation.

HWE09080

- 101 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller
1. LOSSNAY interlock setting (Make this setting only when making an interlock settings between the LOSSNAY units
and the Freeplan model of units.)
Make this setting only when necessary.
Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected, or to
search and delete registered information.
In the following example, the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30.
[Operation Procedures]
1 Press the

[ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop.
The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step 2 .

2 Press and hold the [FILTER] and [

] buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the
indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected.

3 Search result

- The indoor unit address and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately.





- Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings

4 If no settings are necessary, exit the window by pressing and holding the [FILTER] and [

] buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds.
Go to step 1. Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units, or go to step 2. Search Procedures to search for a
particular LOSSNAY unit.
Go to step 3. Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings.

< 1. Registration Procedures >
5 To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit, press the [

TEMP. ( ) or ( )] button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor
unit, and select its address (01 to 50).
6 Press the [ CLOCK ( ) or ( )] button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked (01 to 50).

Indoor unit address

LOSSNAY address

7 Press the [TEST] button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit.

- Registration completed
The registered indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

- Registration error
If the registration fails, the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately.

Registration cannot be completed: The selected unit address does not have a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit.
Registration cannot be completed: Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit.

HWE09080

- 102 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]
< 2. Search Procedures >
8 To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit, enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is
connected to it.


9 Press the [

MENU] button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
- Search completed (With a LOSSNAY connection)
The indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

- Search completed (No interlocked settings with a LOSSNAY exist.)

- The selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit.

< 3. Deletion Procedures >
Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller
that is connected to the indoor unit.
10 Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted (See section 2. Search Procedures. ), and bring up the result of the search for both the
indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display.

11 Press the [

ON/OFF] button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
- Registration completed
The indoor unit address and
, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and
will appear alternately.

-Deletion error
If the deletion fails

[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller
1. Selecting the position of temperature detection (Factory setting: SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is
set to OFF.)
To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON.
Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor
on the indoor unit instead.
When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.

HWE09080

- 103 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

HWE09080

- 104 -

GB

V Electrical Wiring Diagram
[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit......................................................... 107
[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller .............................................................. 111
[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster....................................................... 120

HWE09080

- 105 -

GB

- 106 -

HWE09080

- 107 -

CN01

CX1
F1
AC250V
6.3A T

Z1

U

DSA1

3

1

U

U

Z3

TB21

TB1

L1

L1

red

F2
AC250V
6.3A T

CX2

CX3

Z2

Power supply
3~
60Hz
208/230V

5

U

Z4

CY3

CY2

CY1

SV4a,b,d
SV7a,b
SV9

LEVINV
MF1
SV1a

LEV2a,b

63HS1
63LS
72C
CT12,22,3
CH11
DCL
LEV1

Symbol
21S4a
63H1

CX4

1

L2

L3

black

TB23

CX5

CX6

L3

3 CN02

L

Ground

black

white

red

red

black

red

*5

TB-P

SC-P2

black

THHS
Z24,25

TH7
TH8
THINV

TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6

TB8

TB7

CT3

+

+

THHS

t°

RSH1

SC-R

red

V

Motor
(Compressor)

W

white

white

U MS
3~

red

red

CT12

SC-U

C1

SC-V

RSH2

3

CN2

5
7

1

yellow

orange

red

Operation
ON signal

*6

black

TB8 1 2 3 4

black

CT22

SC-W

CNDC
pink

1
CN4
2

blue

Explanation
Power supply
Indoor/Heat source transmission
cable
Central control transmission
cable
Operation ON signal,
Pump Interlock
Thermistor Subcool bypass outlet temperature
Pipe temperature
Discharge pipe temperature
ACC inlet pipe temperature
Subcooled liquid refrigerant
temperature
Water inlet temperature
Water outlet temperature
Outlet temp.detect of heat
exchanger for inverter
IGBT temperature
Function setting connector

Terminal
block

white

+

R30 C30 C31 C32

SC-S

ZNR1

U

CN6

12

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/Error(Blink)
1

SC-P1

black

SC-T

IGBT

Symbol
TB1
TB3

*5

TB-N

INV Board

black

Explanation
4-way valve
Pressure High pressure protection for the
switch
heat source unit
Pressure High pressure
sensor
Low pressure
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
Current sensor(AC)
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DC reactor
HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
Linear
expansion flow in HIC circuit
valve
Pressure control,Refrigerant flow
rate control
Heat exchanger for inverter
Fan motor(Radiator panel)
For opening/closing the bypass
Solenoid
valve
circuit under the O/S
Heat exchanger capacity control
Heat exchanger capacity control
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit

L2

white

TB22



G

Noise Filter

C1

33

DCL 34
44

+

23

43

13

24

*7

R1

72C

*5

14

red

7 5 3 1

4

1

CNAC4

RELAY Board

CNOUT2
yellow

CNPW
blue

CN83

654321

21

4

CN502

CN506

1

6
5

1

6
5

1

3

6

1

CN510
yellow

CN509
blue

CN508
black

CN507
3 red

6
5

1

3

6
5

CN504
1 green

3

X14

X12

X09

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

X03

X02

X72

red
CNAC

1
2
3 CNOUT1
4 yellow
5
6

CN503
1 blue

3

1

2

CN505
1 black

3

2

1

CNT01

G

SWU1
1's digit

1

7
5
CN2

Function setting

*3

CN03
black

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

1

1

CN102
1234

21
CNS2
yellow

red
CNIT
1 2 3 45

54321
CNIT
red

CN211 1
2

CN215 2
1
black

3
CN202 2
1
red
3
CN201 2
1

CN992 2
yellow 1

2
CN990 1

CN212 2
1

CNTYP4 2
1
green
4
CN213 3
2
red
1

CNTYP5 3
1
green

CNTYP1 2
1
black

6
5
4
CNLVE 3
yellow 2
1

6
CNLVC 5
4
red
3
2
1

6
CNLVB 5
4
red
3
2
1

6
5
4
CNLVA 3
2
1

*4
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission
cable

TP1 TP2

Central control
transmission
cable

TB7
M1 M2 S

LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line
TB3
M1 M2

4321
CN102

CNS2
CN41
1
4 OFF
12

M-NET power
supply
circuit

CN04
3 red

CN3D
321

M-NET Board

3

blue
CN3N
321

TB7 Power
selecting
CN40
connector
1
4 ON
yellow

LED2:CPU in operation

LED1
Display
setting

10
10
10
10
10
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1

LED3:Lit when powered

yellow
CN3K
321

12
CN4

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

LED1

12
CNT02

ON/OFF output
Error detection output

CN51
1
*3
3
4
5 Compressor

blue
CN63PW
12 4

12V

1 3
CN801
yellow

Control Board

Unit address
setting

SWU2
10's digit

Power
failure
detection
circuit

12

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring
not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units
in the same refrigerant system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.
Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.
*6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for
Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.
*7.Control box houses high-voltage parts.
Before inspecting the inside of
the control box,turn off the power,
keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage at both ends
of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to
DC20V or less.

*6

Pump Interlock

M
~

SV4d

SV9

SV4a

SV7a

21S4a

MF1

SV4b

SV7b

CH11

SV1a

red
A2
72C
A1
white

U

ZNR01

CPU power
supply circuit

CNDC
3 pink

CNAC2
2 black
1

1

P

63H1

Z24

Z25

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

1
2
3
1
2
3

LEVINV

LEV2b

LEV2a

LEV1

TH4

TH2

63HS1

63LS

TH8

TH5

TH3

TH7

TH6

THINV

M

M

M

M

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

V Electrical Wiring Diagram

[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Heat source Unit

(1) PQHY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

GB

HWE09080

G

- 108 -

5

U

Z4

3

1

U

U

Z3

CY1

CY2

TB21

L1

L1

SV4a,b,d
SV7a,b
SV9

MF1
SV1a

63HS1
63LS
72C
CT12,22,3
CH11
DCL
LEVINV

Symbol
21S4a
63H1

L2

white

TB22

CX4

1

L3

L

Ground

black

white

red

black

red

*5

*5

Fan motor(Radiator panel)
Solenoid
For opening/closing the bypass
valve
circuit under the O/S
Heat exchanger capacity control
Heat exchanger capacity control
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit

black

CT3

SC-T

IGBT

TB7

THHS
Z24,25

TH4
TH5
TH7
TH8
THINV

TB8

+

+

W

white

MS
3~

V

white

Motor
(Compressor)

U

red

red

CT12

SC-U

C1

SC-V

RSH2

CN2

5
7

1

1
2

*6

1

red

Operation
ON signal

black

TB8

black

CT22

SC-W

CNDC
pink

3

CN4

orange

2

yellow

3

4

blue

Pump Interlock

*6

Explanation
Power supply
Terminal
block
Indoor/Heat source transmission
cable
Central control transmission
cable
Operation ON signal,
Pump Interlock
Thermistor Discharge pipe temperature
ACC inlet pipe temperature
Water inlet temperature
Water outlet temperature
Outlet temp.detect of heat
exchanger for inverter
IGBT temperature
Function setting connector

red

SC-R

t°
THHS

RSH1

R30 C30 C31 C32

+

SC-S

white

Symbol
TB1
TB3

TB-N

TB-P

4-way valve
Pressure
High pressure protection for the
switch
heat source unit
High pressure
Pressure
sensor
Low pressure
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
Current sensor(AC)
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DC reactor
Heat exchanger for inverter
Linear
expansion
valve

Explanation

L3

black

TB23

CX5

CX6

3 CN02

L2

Power supply
3~
60Hz
208/230V

TB1

red

F2
AC250V
6.3A T

CX2

CX3

Z2

CY3



CN01

CX1
F1
AC250V
6.3A T

Z1

U

DSA1

Noise Filter

C1

U
ZNR1

12
CN6

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/Error(Blink)
1

SC-P1

black

SV9

SV4a

SV7a

21S4a

SV1a

CN502

CN506

1

6
5

1

6
5

1

CN510
yellow

CN509
blue

CN508
3 black

6

1

CN507
3 red

6
5

1

3

6
5

CN504
1 green

3

1
2
3 CNOUT1
4 yellow
5
6

CN503
1 blue

3

1

2

CN505
1 black

3

CNAC2
2 black
1

red
CNAC

X14

X12

X09

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

X03

X02

X72

2

1

CNT01

SWU1
1's digit

LED1

CN03
black
F01
AC250V
3.15A T

1

1

CN102
1234

*4

CN215 2
1
black

54321
CNIT
red

red
1
CN211 2
CNIT
12345

21
CNS2
yellow

Indoor/Outdoor
transmission
cable

2
1
CN202 3
2
red
1
3
CN201 2
1

CN992
yellow

2
CN990 1

CNTYP4 2
1
green
4
CN213
2
red
1

CNTYP5 3
1
green

6
5
CNLVE 4
3
yellow 2
1

TP1 TP2

Central control
transmission
cable

TB7
M1 M2 S

LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line
TB3
M1 M2

4321
CN102

yellow
CNS2
CN41
1
4 OFF
12

CN40
1
4 ON

M-NET power
supply
circuit

CN04
3 red

CN3D
321

M-NET Board

3

blue
CN3N
321

LED1
Display
setting

TB7 Power
selecting
connector

Function setting

10
10
10
10
10
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1

LED2:CPU in operation

blue
yellow
CN63PW CN3K
12 4 321

*3

CN2

ON/OFF output
Error detection output

CN51
1
*3
3
4 Compressor
5

LED3:Lit when powered

12V

7
5
1

12
CN4

OFFON OFFON OFFON OFFON OFFON
1
1
1
1
1

12
CNT02

Control Board

1 3
CN801
yellow

Unit address setting

SWU2
10's digit

Power
failure
detection
circuit

G

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

12

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring
not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control
box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units
in the same refrigerant system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.
Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.
*6.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for
Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.
*7.Control box houses high-voltage parts.
Before inspecting the inside of
the control box,turn off the power,
keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage at both ends
of the main capacitor (C1) has dropped to
DC20V or less.

MF1 M
~

SV4d

SV4b

SV7b

CH11

red
A2
72C
A1
white

CPU power
supply circuit
ZNR01
U

CNDC
3 pink

Z24

Z25

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

1
2
3
1
2
3

M

TH4

THINV

63HS1

63LS

TH8

TH5

TH7

LEVINV

(

*7

SC-P2

INV Board

black

RELAY Board

4

CNAC4
1

1

(2) PQRY-P72, 96, 120THMU-A

+

red

43

23

24

72C

13
33

14

DCL 34
44

red

*5

R1

CNOUT2
yellow

CNPW
blue

CN83
7 5 3 1

654321

21

4

P

63H1

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

)

GB

HWE09080

CN1A

- 109 -

red

3

C10

TB1

black

1 CN1B

C9
C8
C7

C17

L1

L1

6
5
4
3

2
purple 1

460V

L1

L2

CN07

6
5
4
3

L3

C5

R6

L3

T03
(Transformer)

1

2

3

4

CNTR3

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

L1 L2 L2 L3

1

F5
AC 600V
3A F

CNTR2

Ground

F4
AC 600V
3A F

L

white

black
red
white
black

T02
(Transformer)

L2

L3



3

Diode
Bridge
F4
AC250V
6.3A T
C6
CN6 1
yellow
3
red

U

Z5

CN5
red 1
R4 D1 R5

TB21 TB22 TB23

L2

C4

CN06

2
purple 1

460V

㧗

CN4
3 blue

Noise
Filter

1

Power Source
‫ޓ‬3~
‫ޓ‬60Hz
‫ޓ‬460V

white

4

R1

R2

R3

C1

C2

F1
C3

F2

Z4
U
F3

DSA

G

Transformer box

1

Z1 Z2 Z3
U U U

F1,F2,F3
AC250V
6.3A T

1

CN2 3

6
5

G

5

6

7

8

INV Board

R30
R32
R34

black

white

red

ZNR1

SC-L3

Explanation

CT3

SC-L1

U

CT12

SC-L2

SC-U

t°
THHS

V

MS
3~

1

yellow

orange

black

TB8 1 2 3 4

black

CT22

SC-W

3
1
CNTYP
black

CN2

7
5

1
CN4 2

W Operation
ON signal
*7

white

white

SC-V

*7
Pump Interlock

Symbol
TB1
Terminal
block
TB3

Motor
(Compressor)

U

red

red

RSH1

C1

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/ Error(Blink)

21
CN6

RELAY Board

1

4

CNAC4

blue

MF1

SV4b

SV7b

5
72C
6

Explanation
Power supply
4-way valve
Indoor/Heat source transmission
Pressure High pressure protection for the
cable
switch
heat source unit
63HS1
Central control transmission
Pressure High pressure
TB7
cable
sensor
Low pressure
63LS
72C
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
Operation ON signal,
TB8
Pump Interlock
CT12,22,3 Current sensor(AC)
CH11
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor) TH2 Thermistor Subcool bypass outlet temperature
TH3
Pipe temperature
DCL
DC reactor
TH4
Discharge
pipe temperature
HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
Linear
LEV1
expansion flow in HIC circuit
TH5
ACC inlet pipe temperature
valve
Subcooled liquid refrigerant
Pressure control,Refrigerant flow TH6
LEV2a,b
temperature
rate control
TH7
Water inlet temperature
LEVINV
Heat exchanger for inverter
TH8
Water outlet temperature
MF1
Fan motor(Radiator panel)
Outlet temp.detect of heat
Solenoid For opening/closing the bypass
THINV
SV1a
exchanger for inverter
circuit under the O/S
valve
IGBT temperature
THHS
Heat exchanger capacity control
SV4a,b,d
Z24,25 Function setting connector
SV7a,b
Heat exchanger capacity control
SV9
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit

Symbol
21S4a
63H1

R31
R33
R35

C31
C33
IGBT
C35
C37

FT-N

SC-P1

black

C100
R5
*5
black
2
1
3 72C 4

R1

*6
FT-P

red



CNTR1

N

4
1
C30
C32
C34
C36

P

CN1

SC-P2

red

DCL

654321
CNOUT2
yellow

CN83
7 5 3 1

4 21
CNPW
blue

red

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units in the
same refrigerant system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.
Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.
*6.Control box houses high-voltage parts.
Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off the power,
keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage
between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
*7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for
Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

M
㨪

SV4d

SV9

SV4a

SV7a

21S4a

CH11

SV1a

CN502

CNAC2
black

CN506

1

6
5

1

6
5

1

CN510
yellow

CN509
blue

CN508
3 black

6

1

CN507
3 red

6
5

1

3

6
5

CN504
1 green

3

X14

X12

X09

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

CNAC
red

1
2
3 CNOUT1
4 yellow
5
6

X03

X02

2

1

12V

12
CNT01

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

2 CN72 ZNR01
1 red
U

CPU power
supply circuit

CNDC
3 pink

CN503
1 blue

3

1

2

2
1

1

10
SW5

G

*3

yellow
blue
CN63PW CN3K
12 4
321

10
SW3

12
CN4

CN04
3 red

M-NET Board

10
SW2

SW1
LED1
Display
setting

10

21

red
CNIT
12345

1

3

54321

CN215 2
black 1
1
CN211 2

3
CN202 2
red
1
3
CN201 2
1

CN992 2
yellow 1

2
CN990 1

2
CN212 1

CNTYP4 2
1
green
4
CN213 3
2
red
1

CNTYP5 3
1
green

CNTYP1 2
1
black

CNTYP2
black

6
5
4
CNLVE 3
2
1

6
5
CNLVC 4
3
red
2
1

6
5
CNLVB 4
3
red
2
1

6
5
4
CNLVA 3
2
1

63H1

Central control
transmission
cable

CNS2
CNIT
yellow
red
LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line
TB7
TB3
M1 M2
M1 M2 S
TP1 TP2

Indoor/Outdoor
transmission
cable

*4

4321
CN102

TB7 Power
selecting
CN40 connector
4 ON
1
yellow
CN41
CNS2
4 OFF
12
1

Function
setting

SW4

CN102
1234

10

M-NET power
supply circuit

1

blue
CN3N CN3D
321 321

LED2:CPU in operation

LED3:Lit when powered

CN2

LED1

1

7
5

12
CNT02

OFF ON OFF ON OFFON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

CN51
1
*3
3 Compressor ON/OFF output
4
5 Error detection output

Unit address
setting

SWU2 SWU1
10's 1's
digit digit

Control Board

Power
failure
detection
circuit

1 3
CN801
yellow

P

Z24

Z25

M

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

1
2
3
1
2
3

TH4

TH2

63HS1

63LS

TH8

TH5

TH3

TH7

TH6

THINV

LEVINV

M

LEV2b

M

LEV2a

t°

t

M
LEV1

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(3) PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

GB

HWE09080

CN1A

- 110 -

red

3

1

Z1 Z2 Z3
U U U

black

TB1

1 CN1B

C9
C8
C7

C10

C17

+

CN4
3 blue

L1

purple

460V

purple

460V

L3

C5

R6

R4

C6

+

D1

L2

1

2

6
5
4
3

CN07

1

2

6
5
4
3

CN06

L2

L3

3

-

Ground

F4
AC 600V
3A F

red
white
black

black

white

red

3

1

T03
(Transformer)

F5
AC 600V
3A F

1

2

3

4

CNTR3

1

2

3

4

CNTR2

2
3

4

L1 L2 L2 L3

CNTR1 1

F4
AC250V
6.3A T

T02
(Transformer)

L3

L

Z5

1

Diode
Bridge

CN6
yellow

U

R5

CN5
red

TB21 TB22 TB23

L2

Transformer box

L1

L1

C4

Noise
Filter

Power Source
3~
60Hz
460V

white

4

R1

R2

R3

C1

C2

F1
C3

F2

F3

Z4
U

DSA

1

+

+

+

+

+

5

6

7

8

black

white

red

1

2

R5

C100

CT3

SC-L3

SC-L1

U

ZNR1

*5
black

21
CN6

CT12

SC-L2

SC-U

t°
THHS

C1

SV4a,b,d
SV7a,b

MF1
SV1a

63HS1
63LS
72C
CT12,22,3
CH11
DCL
LEVINV

Symbol
21S4a
63H1

W

white
MS
3~

V

white

SC-V

Motor
(Compressor)

U

red

red

RSH1
1

TB8

1

red
2

orange
yellow
3

4

blue
*7
Pump Interlock

4-way valve
Pressure High pressure protection for the
switch
heat source unit
Pressure High pressure
sensor
Low pressure
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
Current sensor(AC)
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DC reactor
Heat exchanger for inverter
Linear
expansion
valve
Fan motor(Radiator panel)
For opening/closing the bypass
Solenoid
circuit under the O/S
valve
Heat exchanger capacity control
Heat exchanger capacity control

Explanation

*7
Operation
ON signal

black

black

CT22

SC-W

3
1
CNTYP
black

CN2

7
5

1
CN4 2

RELAY Board

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/ Error(Blink)

1



R35

R33

R31

C37

C35

C33
IGBT

SC-P1

3 72C 4
black

C31

FT-N

FT-P

red

*6

+

INV Board

R34

R32

R30

C36

C34

C32
+

N

4
1
C30

P

CN1

+

SC-P2

red

R1

3

1

CNAC4
4

TB8

TB7

TB1
TB3

Symbol
SV9

Solenoid
valve
Terminal
block

M
~

SV4d

SV9

SV4a

SV7a

21S4a

CH11

SV1a

CN502

CN506

1

6
5

1

6
5

1

CN510
yellow

CN509
blue

CN508
3 black

6

1

CN507
3 red

6
5

1

3

6
5

CN504
1 green

3

1
2
3 CNOUT1
4 yellow
5
6

CN503
1 blue

3

1

CNAC
red

X14

X12

X09

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

X03

X02

2

1

2 CN72 ZNR01
1 red
U

CNAC2
2 black

2
1

CPU power
supply circuit

CNDC
3 pink

Explanation
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit
Power supply
Indoor/Heat source transmission
cable
Central control transmission
cable
Operation ON signal,
Pump Interlock

MF1

SV4b

SV7b

5
72C
6

1

THHS
Z24,25

*3

CN102
1234

CN04
3 red

M-NET Board

M-NET power
supply circuit

1

CN3D
321

red
CNIT
12345

Indoor/Outdoor
transmission
cable

6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2

2
1

54321
CNIT
red

CN211

CN215
black

TP1 TP2

Central control
transmission
cable

TB7
M1 M2 S

t°

1
2
3
1
2
3

3
2
1

t°

t°

t°

t°

3
2
1

Z24

Z25

CN202
red

2
1

2
1

2
1

4

1

3

CN201

CN992
yellow

CN990

CN213
red

CNTYP4 2
1
green

CNTYP5 3
1
green

CNTYP2
black

CNLVE

LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line

21
CNS2
yellow

TB3
M1 M2

yellow
CNS2
12

*4

4321
CN102

CN41
4 OFF
1

Explanation
Thermistor Discharge pipe temperature
ACC inlet pipe temperature
Water inlet temperature
Water outlet temperature
Outlet temp.detect of heat
exchanger for inverter
IGBT temperature
Function setting connector

G

blue
CN3N
321

LED1
Display
setting

TB7 Power
selecting
connector
CN40
1
4 ON

Function
setting

10
10
10
10
10
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1

LED2:CPU in operation

yellow
CN3K
321

12
CN4

LED1

CN2

Compressor ON/OFF output
Error detection output

*3

1

7
5

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

12
CNT02

LED3:Lit when powered

3
4
5

1

CN51

Unit address
setting

SWU2 SWU1
10's
1's
digit
digit

blue
CN63PW
12 4

12V

1 3
CN801
yellow

Control Board

Power failure
detection circuit

Symbol
TH4
TH5
TH7
TH8
THINV

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

12
CNT01

63H1

M

TH4

THINV

63HS1

63LS

TH8

TH5

TH7

LEVINV

(

F1,F2,F3
AC250V
6.3A T

1

3

6
5

G

DCL

5

CN83

CNOUT2
yellow

7

654321

21

CNPW
blue

4

P

(4) PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A

CN2

G

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting
input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the heat source units
in the same refrigerant system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.
Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after
insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.
*6.Control box houses high-voltage parts.
Before inspecting the inside of the control box,
turn off the power,keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N
on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
*7.Refer to the Data book for wiring terminal block for
Pump Interlock and Operation ON signal.

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

)

GB

HWE09080

- 111 -

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

PS1

3
2
1

3
2
1

1

DSA

ZNR01

ZNR02

X6

4

3

2

CN11

CN05
(Red)

LEV1

LEV3

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

SW5

SW4

CN07
(Yellow)

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

ON

OFF

8

SW1

CN12

1

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

3

5

7

5

3

1

3

1

CN36(Green)
X21

X33

1

8

1

X7
SW2

X8

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

7

6

5

4

7

5

3

1

CN28(Blue)

X31

X3

X4

7

5

3

1

CN26

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

CNTR
(Red)

X32

10

1

CN02

2

3

ON

1

X5

CN10

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

2

CN03
(Yellow)

3

2

1

1
2

3

1
2

CNP1
(Black)

3

1
2

CONT.B

TR

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

T1

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

T4

T3

T2

3

2

1

4

3

3

1
2

1
2

SVM1

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission Line

G

G

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V 60Hz

BREAKER(15A)

FUSE(15A)

TB01 TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT
L1
L2
PULL BOX

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

(Symbol explanation)
Symbol
Name
Transformer
TR
TH11,12,15,16 Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
LEV1,3
Pressure sensor
PS1,3
Circuit BC controller
CONT.B
board
Terminal block
TB01
(for power source)
Terminal block
TB02
(for Transmission)
SV1~4A,B,C
Solenoid valve
SVM1
Solenoid valve
T1~4
Terminal
F01
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the BC Controller

(1) CMB-P104NU-G model

GB

HWE09080

- 112 -

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

PS1

3
2
1

3
2
1

1

CN11

1 2 3 4 5 6

LEV1

LEV3

SW5

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

SW4

CN05
(Red)

OFF

ON

OFF

8

SW1

CN07
(Yellow)

4

3

2

1

DSA

ZNR01

5

TB01
L1
L2

G

ZNR02

CN12

1

G

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V 60Hz

3

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

3

1

5

3

1

1 1

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

BREAKER(15A)

FUSE(15A)

PULL BOX

T1

T5

T4

T3

SV5B
SV5A
SV5C

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

2
3
3

1

4

3

2

T6

SVM1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

1 CMB-P106NU-G ONLY

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission line

T2

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

CN36(Green)

X21

X35

X11

X12

CN31(Yellow)

X34

X9

1

CN30(Black)
X10

X33

8

1

X7
SW2

X8

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

7

6

5

4

7

5

3

1

CN28(Blue)
X6

X31

X3

X4

7

5

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X32

10

1

CN02

2

3

ON

1

X5

CN10

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

2

CN03
(Yellow)

3

1

CNTR
3
(Red)
CN26
X2

2

1

1
2

3

1
2

CNP1
(Black)

3

1
2

CONT.B

TR

Name
Transformer
Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
Pressure sensor
Circuit BC controller
board
Terminal block
(for power source)
Terminal block
(for Transmission)
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Terminal
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F
Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

TB02
SV1~6A,B,C
SVM1
T1~6
F01

TB01

CONT.B

Symbol
TR
TH11,12,15,16
LEV1,3
PS1,3

(Symbol explanation)

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(2) CMB-P105,106NU-G models

GB

- 113 -

3
2
1

TB02
SV1~10A,B,C
SVM1
T1~10
F01

TB01

Symbol
TR
TH11,12,15,16
LEV1,3
PS1,3
REL.B
CONT.B

1

ZNR01

3

ZNR02

CN38

1

X8

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.

LEV1

CN05
(Red)

8

LEV3

SW5

SW4

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN07
(Yellow)

OFF

1

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

4
ON

2

3

ON
OFF

1

1 3

5

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

X21

3

1

CN36(Green)

X35

X11

CN31(Yellow)
X12

X34

X9

2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

CN12

250VAC
6.3A F

DSA F01

7

5

3

1

CN30(Black)
X10

X7
SW1

X33

SW2

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

8

CN11

CN10

7

6

5

4

7

CN28(Blue)

X31

X3

X4

5

3

1

CN26

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

CNTR
(Red)

X32

10

CN50

3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

X5

6 5 4 3 2 1

X6

CN51

2

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

CN02

1

1

1
2

3

1
2

CN03
(Yellow)

Name
Transformer
Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
Pressure sensor
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
Terminal block
(for power source)
Terminal block
(for Transmission)
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Terminal
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

(Symbol explanation)

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

CNP1
(Black)

2

G

TB01
L1
L2

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

T1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

T6

T5

T4

T3

2

1

4

T2

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

SV5B
SV5A
SV5C

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

G

FUSE(15A)

PULL BOX

3
1

CN39

3

3

2

2

SVM1
16
16

1

1

3

2

2

1

3

5

15 14 13
15 14 13

4

T10
3

4

3

1

2

1

3

5

7

1

2

12 11 10
12 11 10

4

T9
3

4

CN53

6 5 4 3 2 1

CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY

7

1

1

CMB-P1010NU-G ONLY

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V 60Hz
BREAKER(15A)

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

CN35(Blue)

1

X20

2

X19

3

SV10C
SV10A
SV10B
X39

3

CN34(Black)

1
2

X18

PS1

X17

CONT.B

3

8
8

3

4

9
9

1

5

4

1

6
6

3

5

1

CN52

7

2 1

4
4

3

2

5
5

3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7

1

2

7
7

4

T7
1

2

T8
3

4

X16

3
2
1

X15

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission line

X37

SV9C
SV9A
SV9B
X38

SV8C
SV8A
SV8B

X14

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

CN32

SV7C
SV7A
SV7B
X13

HWE09080
X36

TR

REL.B

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(3) CMB-P108,1010NU-G models

GB

CN33(Red)

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

- 114 -

2

1

3

2

1

LEV1

LEV3

SW5

SW4

CN05
(Red)

1

8

8

SW1

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

1

SW2

10

CN07
(Yellow)

CN11

CN10

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

1 2 3 4 5 6

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1
2

3

1
2

1

CN02

2

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

3
2
1

3

CNVCC1 CN03
(Yellow)
CNP1 (Blue)
(Black)

3

4

ZNR01

1
3

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

CN12

5

ZNR02

X7

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

X21

5

3

1

3

1

CN36(Green)

X35

X11

CN31(Yellow)
X12

X34

X9

CN30(Black)
X10

X33

X8

2
3

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

X32

X5

X6

1

8

7

6

5

CN28(Blue)

5

3

1

4

X31

X3

X4

7

5

3

1

CN26

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

CNTR
(Red)

7

CNOUT3

DSA

3

3

2

1

CNOUT1

1

CN38

G

1

T1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

SV5B
SV5A
SV5C

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

BREAKER(15A)

TO NEXT
INDOOR UNIT POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V
PULL BOX
60Hz

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

G FUSE(15A)

TB01
L1
L2

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

16
16

3

3

T10

2

2

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

1
2
3
4

7

1

1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

5

3

1

15 14 13
15 14 13

4

4

X20

1
2

X19

PS1

3

3

T9

2

2

5

3

1

12 11 10
12 11 10

4

4

X18

CONT.B

X17

SV10C
SV10A
SV10B
X39

SV9C
SV9A
SV9B
X38

3
2
1

7

1

1

5

7
7

2

2

3

8
8

3

3

T8

1

9
9

4

4

X16

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission line

X15

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

7

1

1

5

4
4

2

2

3

5
5

3

3

T7

1

6
6

4

4

X14

SV8C
SV8A
SV8B
X37

SV7C
SV7A
SV7B
X13

HWE09080
X36

TR

7

1

1

1

3

2

1

CNVCC2
(Blue)

3

X57

X55

X56

CN45(Green)

X54

X52

X53

CN44(Yellow)

X51

X49

X50

CN43(Red)

X48

X46

X47

CN42

X45

X43

X44

CN41(Green)

X42

X40

X41

CN40
(Yellow)

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

REL.B

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

TB02
SV1~16A,B,C
SVM1
T1~16
F01

TB01

Symbol
TR
TH11,12,15,16
LEV1,3
PS1,3
REL.B
CONT.B

T11

T12

1

1
2
3

1

3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

T16

T15

T14
3

2

SV13B
SV13A
SV13C

SV12B
SV12A
SV12C

SV11B
SV11A
SV11C

SVM1

SV16B
SV16A
SV16C

SV15B
SV15A
SV15C

SV14B
SV14A
SV14C

CMB-P1016NU-G ONLY

T13
4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

2

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2
2
3

1
1

Name
Transformer
Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
Pressure sensor
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
Terminal block
(for power source)
Terminal block
(for Transmission)
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Terminal
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

(Symbol explanation)

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(4) CMB-P1013,1016NU-G models

GB

CN39
CN32

CN33(Red)

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

3
2
1

1

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

LEV1

LEV2

LEV3

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

SW5

SW4

8

1 2 3 4 5 6

1

1

SW1

SW2

CN06
(Blue)

OFF

ON

OFF

1

CN07
(Yellow)

4

3

2

10

ZNR02

CN12

1

3

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

DSA

5

X33

8

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

3

3

1

CN46(Yellow)
X60

1

CN36(Green)
X21

X35

X11

X12

7

5

3

1

CN31(Yellow)

X34

X9

CN30(Black)
X10

X7

CN11

X8

7

1

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

6

5

CN10

X32

4

7

5

3

1

CN28(Blue)

X31

X3

X4

3

CN26

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

3

CN05
(Red)

3

X5

ZNR01

1

CN38

2

ON

2

CN02

X6

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

2

1

1
2

3

1
2

CNP1
(Black)

3

G

TB01
L1
L2

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

T1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

SV5C

SV5B
SV5A

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

G

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

PULL BOX

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

2

1

1

3

2

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

4

3

3
4

2

1

2

1

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V
60Hz

4
4

3

3

3
3

2

2

1
1

3
1

CN53

16
16

T10

3

3

2

2

7

1

1

6 5 4 3 2 1

5

3

1

15 14 13
15 14 13

4

4

T9

3

3

2

2

7

1

1

3

1

7
7

7

1

5

5
5

3

6
6

1

4
4

REL.B

1

7

2 1
3

2

4

T7
3

4

CN52

5

8
8

9
9

2
3

2

4

T8
3

4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

5

3

1

12 11 10
12 11 10

4

4

1

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

CMB-P1010NU-GA ONLY

Name
Transformer
Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
Pressure sensor
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
Terminal block
(for power source)
Terminal block
(for Transmission)
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Terminal
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

CN39

2
2

1

1

TB02
SV1~10A,B,C
SVM1,2
T1~10
F01

TB01

Symbol
TR
TH11,12,15,16
LEV1~3
PS1,3
REL.B
CONT.B

SVM2
SVM1

1

CN35(Blue)

CNTR
(Red)

X20

CN50

X19

CN03
(Yellow)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SV10C
SV10A
SV10B
X39

3

6 5 4 3 2 1

CN34(Black)

PS1

CN51

X18

1
2

X17

3
2
1

(Symbol explanation)

X16

CONT.B

CN33(Red)

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission line

CN32

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

X15

SV9C
SV9A
SV9B
X38

SV8C
SV8A
SV8B
X37

SV7C
SV7A
SV7B
X14

- 115 -

X13

HWE09080
X36

TR

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(5) CMB-P108,1010NU-GA models

GB

1

1 2 3 4 5 6

LEV3

LEV2

- 116 -

LEV1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN05
(Red)

CN06
(Blue)

CN11

CN10

CN13
(Red)

CNP3

CN07
(Yellow)

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1
2

3

1
2

1 2 3 4 5 6

3

2

1

2

1

1

1

SW5

SW4

SW1

SW2

8

8

1

10

4

CN12

1
3

250VAC
6.3A F

DSA F01

ZNR01

ZNR02

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

7

5

3

3

3

1

CN46(Yellow)
X60

1

CN36(Green)
X21

X35

X11

1

CN31(Yellow)
X12

X34

X9

1

CN30(Black)
X10

X33

X7

CNOUT3

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

X32

X5

X8

3

3

CN28(Blue)
X6

X31

X3

X4

7

5

3

1

CN26

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

CNTR
(Red)

2

5

3

CN38

1

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

CNOUT1

Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal
block.Never connect power line
to it.
2.The initial set values of switch
on CONT.B are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

TH16

TH15

TH12

TH11

PS3

3
2
1

2

CNVCC1 CN03 CN02
CNP1 (Blue) (Yellow)
(Black)

3

G

TB01
L1
L2

G

T1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

SV5B
SV5A
SV5C

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V
PULL BOX
60Hz

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

TO NEXT
INDOOR UNIT

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

16
16

3

3

T10

2

2

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

1
2
3
4

7

1

1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

5

3

1

15 14 13
15 14 13

4

4

X20

3

X19

1
2

3

3

T9

2

2

5

3

1

12 11 10
12 11 10

4

4

X18

3
2
1

X17

SV10C
SV10A
SV10B
X39

SV9C
SV9A
SV9B
X38

PS1

7

1

1

5

7
7

2

2

3

8
8

3

3

T8

1

9
9

4

4

X16

CONT.B

X15

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission line

7

1

1

T7

5

3

1

2

2

4
4

3

3

5
5

6
6

4

4

X14

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

X13

SV8C
SV8A
SV8B
X37

SV7C
SV7A
SV7B
X36

HWE09080
7

1

1

CN39

TR

1

X42

X40

X41

X57

X55

X56

CN45(Green)

X54

X52

X53

CN44(Yellow)

X51

X49

X50

CN43(Red)

X48

X46

X47

CN42

X45

X43

X44

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

CNVCC2
(Blue)
CN40
(Yellow)

3

2

CN41(Green)

1

3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

REL.B

T11

1
2
3

1

3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

T16

T15

T14

T13

T12
4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

2

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

SVM1
SVM2

SV16B
SV16A
SV16C

SV15B
SV15A
SV15C

CMB-P1016NU-GA ONLY
SV14B
SV14A
SV14C

SV13B
SV13A
SV13C

SV12B
SV12A
SV12C

SV11B
SV11A
SV11C

(Symbol explanation)
Symbol
Name
Transformer
TR
TH11,12,15,16 Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
LEV1~3
Pressure sensor
PS1,3
REL.B
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
CONT.B
Terminal block
TB01
(for power source)
Terminal block
TB02
(for Transmission)
SV1~16A,B,C Solenoid valve
SVM1,2
Solenoid valve
T1~16
Terminal
F01
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(6) CMB-P1013,1016NU-GA models

GB

CN32

CN33(Red)

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

HWE09080

- 117 -

TH15

TH12

1

4

3

2
1

LEV3

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN07
(Yellow)

OFF

ON

OFF

SW5

SW4
8

8

SW1

DSA

ZNR01

ZNR02

CN12

1

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

3

5

X33

SW2
1

8

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)
X8

X32

X7

CN11

CN10

7

5

3

1

CN28(Blue)

X31

X3

X4

7

6

5

4

3

7

5

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

3

1

CN26

CNTR
(Red)

X5

10

1

CN02

2

X6

ON

1

2

CN13
(Red)

2

CN03
(Yellow)

3

1

1
2

CONT.B

TR

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

1

T2

T1

4

3

2

1

4

3

T4

T3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
Transmission Line

G

G

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V
60Hz

BREAKER(15A)

FUSE(15A)

TB01 TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT
L1
L2
PULL BOX

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
line to it.
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

(Symbol explanation)
Symbol
Name
Transformer
TR
Thermistor sensor
TH12,15
Expansion valve
LEV3
Circuit BC controller
CONT.B
board
Terminal block
TB01
(for power source)
Terminal block
TB02
(for Transmission)
SV1~4A,B,C
Solenoid valve
T1~4
Terminal
F01
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(7) CMB-P104NU-GB model

GB

TH15

TH12

1

CN07
(Yellow)

LEV3

1 2 3 4 5 6

4

OFF

ON

OFF

3

2

1

1

SW5

8

8

SW1

SW4

SW2

ZNR01

ZNR02

CN12

DSA F01
250VAC
6.3A F

1 3
5

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

X35

X11

7

5

3

1

CN31(Yellow)
X12

X34

X9

CN30(Black)
X10

X33

ON

8

1

X7

CN11

X8

7

5

3

1

CN29(Green)

7

6

CN10

X32

5

7

5

3

1

CN28(Blue)

X31

X3

X4

3

4

7

5

3

1

CN26

3

1

CN27(Red)

X30

X1

X2

CNTR
(Red)

X5

10

3

CN38

1

2

CN50

X6

CN13
(Red)

CN02

1

1
2

CN03

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

G

TB01
L1
L2

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

T6

T5

T4

T3

T2

T1

SV6B
SV6A
SV6C

SV5B
SV5A
SV5C

SV4B
SV4A
SV4C

SV3B
SV3A
SV3C

SV2B
SV2A
SV2C

SV1B
SV1A
SV1C

G

CN39

3
1

16
16

5

3

1

15 14 13
15 14 13

POWER SUPPLY
~208V-230V
60Hz
FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

PULL BOX

TO NEXT INDOOR UNIT

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

1
2

4

3

4

2

3

1

1
2

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

X20

1

CN35(Blue)

2

X19

1

X39

2

7

7

CN33(Red)

2

7

1

1

CN32

T7

5

3

1

1

7

2 1

2

4
4

3

3

REL.B

Name
Transformer
Thermistor sensor
Expansion valve
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
Terminal block
TB01
(for power source)
Terminal block
TB02
(for Transmission)
SV1~8A,B,C Solenoid valve
T1~8
Terminal
F01
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

Symbol
TR
TH12,15
LEV3
REL.B
CONT.B

5
5
6
6

4

4

CN52

5

3

8
8

3

2

7
7

T8
3

1

9
9

4

4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

5

3

1

12 11 10
12 11 10

X18

3

CN34(Black)

CONT.B

X17

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

X38

TR

X16

(Symbol explanation)

X14

SV8C
SV8A
SV8B
X15

- 118 -

X37

SV7C
SV7A
SV7B
X13

HWE09080
X36

Note:1.TB02 is transmission
terminal block.
Never connect power
Indoor/outdoor (heat source)
line to it.
Transmission line
2.The initial set values
of switch on CONT.B
are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(8) CMB-P108NU-GB model

GB

- 119 -

M

t°

t°

1
2
3
4
5
6

CN07
(Yellow)

CN12

1
3 5

F01
250VAC
6.3A F

7

5

3

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

X35

X11

X12

7

5

3

1

CN31(Yellow)

X34

X09

X10

CN30(Black)

X33

X07

X08

CN29(Green)

X32

X05

X06

CN28(Blue)

X31

X03

X04

CN27(Red)

X30

X01

X02

1

CN26

CNTR(Red)

SV1A

3 T1

1

4

4

3 T6

2

2
3

1

4

3 T5

2

1

4

3 T4

2

1

4

3 T3

2

1

4

3 T2

2

1

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

SV6C

SV6A

SV6B

SV5C

SV5A

SV5B

SV4C

SV4A

SV4B

SV3C

SV3A

SV3B

SV2C

SV2A

SV2B

SV1C

SV1B

2

4

4

1

2
3

1

Indoor/outdoor
Transmission line

16
16

G

G

FUSE(15A) BREAKER(15A)

TO NEXT
INDOOR UNIT
POWER SUPPLY
TB01
~208V-230V
PULL BOX
L1
L2

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

2.The initial set values of swith
on CONT.B are as follows.
SW1:0
SW2:0

U

DSA

ZNR02

U

3 1

ZNR01

CNOUT3

3
4

CN11

3

4

2

1

1

2

8

8

4

3

2

1

CNOUT1

7

8

CN38

LD1:CPU in
operation

6

SW6

SW5

8

7

1

SW4

CONT.B

5

ON
OFF

ON
OFF

1

8

SW2 SW1

1

6

CN10

CN13
(Red)

ON
OFF

1

10

5

4

2 1

Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal
block.Never connect power line
to it.

LEV3

TH15

TH12

3

2

1

1
2

3 2 1

CNVCC1 CN03 CN02
(Blue) (Yellow)

3 2 1

TB02
S(SHIELD)
M2
M1

3

3

T10

2

2

CNOUT2

CNOUT4

1
2
3
4

7

1

1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

5

3

1

15 14 13
15 14 13

4

4

SV10C

X20

3

T9

3

2

2

5

3

1

12 11 10
12 11 10

4

4

SV9C

X18

SV10A

X19

SV9A

X17

SV10B

X39

SV9B

X38

7

1

1

CN33(Red)
REL.B

5

7
7

2

2

3

8
8

3

T8

3

1

9
9

4

4

SV8C

X16

7

1

1

7

1

1

5

4
4

2

2

3

5
5

3

T7

3

1

6
6

4

4

SV7C

X14

SV8A

X15

SV7A

X13

SV8B

X37

SV7B

X36

HWE09080
CN39

TR

3 2 1

CNVCC2
(Blue)

X57

X55

X56

CN45(Green)

X54

X52

X53

CN44(Yellow)

X51

X49

X50

CN43(Red)

X48

X46

X47

CN42

X45

X43

X44

CN41(Green)

X42

X40

X41

CN40
(Yellow)

1 3

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

7

5

3

1

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3T16

2

1

4

3T15

2

1

4

3T14

2

1

4

3T13

2

1

4

3T12

2

1

4

3T11

2

1

SV16C

SV16A

SV16B

SV15C

SV15A

SV15B

SV14C

SV14A

SV14B

SV13C

SV13A

SV13B

SV12C

SV12A

SV12B

SV11C

SV11A

SV11B

(Symbol explanation)
Symbol
Name
Transformer
TR
Thermister sensor
TH12,15
Expansion valve
LEV3
REL.B
Circuit Relay
board BC controller
CONT.B
Terminal block
TB01
(for power source)
Terminal block
TB02
(for Transmission)
SV1~16A,B,C Solenoid valve
T1~T16
Terminal
F01
Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(9) CMB-P1016NU-HB model

GB

CN32

CN34(Black)

CN35(Blue)

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

[3] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster

Terminal block for power supply
(TB1)
250V 5A
L
Red Red Red

Red
Red

100V/200VAC

White

White

Black
1

Varistor

3
E

Noise filter

Green/Yellow

U

White

White

White

White

2

4

Black

Red
Varistor
U

Green

DSA
Red
Red
Blue

Grounding

White
Choke coil
Red

White Red

4

1

3
2
1
CN2

Stabilized power supply

2
3

Black
Black
CN1

Blue
CN2

1

2
CN3

1

2

1

2

CN4

Electronic control board

S
White

White

Red

Red

Black

Black

Red

Red

Terminal block 2 for
B transmission line (TB3)
Expanded (indoor unit) side
A

CN1
2

1
S

HWE09080

- 120 -

Terminal block 1 for
B transmission line (TB2)
Expanded (heat source unit) side
A

GB

VI Refrigerant Circuit
[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram ........................................................................................... 123
[2] Principal Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 126

HWE09080

- 121 -

GB

- 122 -

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
VI Refrigerant Circuit

[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram
1. Heat source unit
(1) PQHY-P72, P96, P120 models
ST1

21S4a

BV1

Solenoid valve block

CV1

CV7a
SV4a

SV9

ST17
CJ1

SV4b

SV4d

TH8
63H1

CJ2

63HS1

SV7a

SV7b

63LS
CP1
Water circuit

TH7

O/S
THINV
ST3

SV1a
TH5

TH4

LEVINV ST13

Component
cooler heat
exchanger

CV8
CV3a
CV4a

CV6a

LEV2b

Acc

Comp

BV2

TH6

TH3

TH2

ST2
LEV2a

HIC
LEV1

(2) PQRY-P72, P96, P120 models

21S4a

Solenoid valve block

CV7a
SV4a

SV4d

SV4b

63LS

ST17
CJ1

TH8
63H1
CJ2

63HS1

SV7a

SV7b

CP1
TH7

O/S
THINV
ST3

SV1a

Component cooler
heat exchanger
TH5

TH4

Water circuit

LEVINV ST13
CV8
CV3a

CV2a

CV5a
BV1

CV4a
Comp

HWE09080

ST1

CV6a

Acc

SV9

- 123 -

BV2

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
2. BC controller
(1) CMB-P104 - P1010NU-G

Solenoid valve block

TH15

Gas/Liquid
separator

LEV3
TH12
PS1
TH11

PS3
LEV1

TH16
Check valve block

SVM1

(2) CMB-P108, P1013, P1016NU-GA (main)

Solenoid valve block

TH15

Gas/Liquid
separator

LEV3
TH12
PS1
TH11

SVM2

PS3
LEV1

TH16

LEV2

Check valve block
SVM1

HWE09080

- 124 -

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
(3) CMB-P104, P108NU-GB (sub)

Solenoid valve block

TH12
CP

TH15
LEV3
HIC-C

Check valve block

(4) CMB-P1016NU-HB (sub)

Solenoid valve block

TH12
CP

TH15
LEV3
HIC-C

Check valve block

HWE09080

- 125 -

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

[2] Principal Parts and Functions
1. Heat source unit
Part
name

Symbols
(functions)

Compressor

MC1
(Comp1)

High
pressure
sensor

63HS1

Notes

Usage
Adjusts the amount of circulating
refrigerant by adjusting the operating frequency based on the operating pressure data

1) Detects high pressure
2) Regulates frequency and provides high-pressure protection

Specifications
Low-pressure shell scroll
compressor
Wirewound resistance
20°C[68°F] :
0.268ohm(THMU)
0.981ohm(YHMU)
63HS1
123

Connector

Pressure
0~4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69
Pressure [psi]
=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

1
2
3

Low
pressure
sensor

63LS

1) Detects low pressure
2) Provides low-pressure protection

63LS
123

Connector

Pressure
0~1.7 MPa [247psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.173V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283
Pressure [psi]
=(0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283) x 145
1
2
3

Pressure
switch

63H1

Thermis- TH4
tor
(Discharge)

1) Detects high pressure
2) Provides high-pressure protection
1) Detects discharge air temperature
2) Provides high-pressure protection
0°C[32°F] :698kohm
10°C[50°F] :413kohm
20°C[68°F] :250kohm
30°C[86°F] :160kohm
40°C[104°F] :104kohm
50°C[122°F] : 70kohm
60°C[140°F] : 48kohm
70°C[158°F] : 34kohm
80°C[176°F] : 24kohm
90°C[194°F] :17.5kohm
100°C[212°F] :13.0kohm
110°C[230°F] : 9.8kohm

HWE09080

- 126 -

Check method

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

4.15MPa[601psi] OFF setting

Degrees Celsius
R 120 = 7.465k
R 25/120 = 4057
Rt =
7.465 exp 4057

1
273 t

Resistance
check
1
393

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
Part
name

Symbols
(functions)

Thermis- TH2
tor
TH3
(Pipe
temperature)

Notes

Usage

PQHY
only

LEV1 is controlled based on the
TH2, TH3, and TH6 values

PQHY
only

Controls defrosting during heating
operation
1) Frequency control
2) LEV1 is controlled according
to the amount of subcool at
the heat exchanger outlet,
which is calculated based on
the HPS data and TH3 value.

TH7
(Water inlet
temperature)

1) Detects water inlet temperature
2) Protects water heat exchanger from high and low temperatures
3) Controls water heat exchanger

TH8
(Water outlet
temperature)

1) Detects water inlet temperature
2) Protects water heat exchanger from freezing up

TH5

TH6

HWE09080

Check method
Resistance
check

Degrees Celsius
R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

1
273 t

1
273

0°C[32°F]: 15kohm
10°C[50°F]: 9.7kohm
20°C[68°F]: 6.4kohm
25°C[77°F]: 5.3kohm
30°C[86°F]: 4.3kohm
40°C[104°F]: 3.1kohm

Water heat exchanger is controlled based on the 63LS and
TH5 values.
PQHY
only

LEV1 is controlled based on the
TH2, TH3, and TH6 values

THINV

Determines the LEV that controls
refrigerant flow on the component
cooler

THHS
Inverter
heat sink temperature

Controls inverter cooling fan
based on THHS temperature

THBOX
Control box internal temperature detection

Solenoid
valve

Specifications

Degrees Celsius
R 50
= 17k
R 25/120 = 4016
R t = 17 exp 4016

1
273

t

1
323

0°C[32°F]: 161kohm
10°C[50°F]: 97kohm
20°C[68°F]: 60kohm
25°C[77°F]: 48kohm
30°C[86°F]: 39kohm
40°C[104°F]: 25kohm

SV1a
Discharge-suction
bypass

1) High/low pressure bypass at
start-up and stopping, and
capacity control during lowload operation
2) High-pressure-rise prevention

SV4a - SV4d
Heat
exchanger
capacity control

Controls heat source unit heat exchanger capacity

SV7a,7b
Heat
exchanger
capacity control

Controls heat source unit heat ex- AC208 - 230V
changer capacity
Closed while being powered/
open while not being powered

SV9

High-pressure-rise prevention

- 127 -

AC208 - 230V
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered

Continuity
check with a
tester

AC208 - 230V
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
Part
name

Symbols
(functions)

Notes

Usage

Specifications

Check method

Heater

CH11

Heats the refrigerant in the compressor

Cord heater
1035 ohm 51W

Resistance
check

4-way
valve

21S4a

Changeover between heating and
cooling

AC208-230V
Dead: cooling cycle
Live: heating cycle

Continuity
check with a
tester

Electronic
expansion
valve

LEV1
(for SC control)

PQHY
only

Regulates the amount of bypass
flow from the heat source unit liquid pipe during cooling

12 VDC
Stepping motor driven valve
opening
0-480 pulses (direct driven)

Same as with
the indoor
LEV.
The resistance
values differs
from that of the
LEVs on indoor unit.
(Refer to the
section on
Troubleshooting the
LEV(page 310
))

LEV2a
LEV2b
(Refrigerant
flow control

PQHY
only

Controls the refrigerant flow during heating

12 VDC
Stepping motor driven valve
opening
1400 pulses

Same as with
the indoor
LEV.

HWE09080

- 128 -

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
2. Indoor Unit
Part
Name

Symbol
(functions)

Linear
LEV
expansion valve

Notes

Usage

Specification

Check method

1) Adjusts superheat at the
indoor heat exchanger
outlet during cooling
2) Adjusts subcool at the
heat exchanger outlet of
the indoor unit during
cooling

DC12V
Opening of stepping motor
driving valve 0-(1400) pulses

Refer to the section
"Continuity Test with a
Tester".
Continuity between
white, red, and orange.
Continuity between
yellow, brown, and
blue.
White

M

Red
Orange
Yellow Brown Blue

Thermistor

HWE09080

TH1
(Suction air
temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

TH2
(Pipe temperature)

1) Indoor unit control (Frost
prevention, Hot adjust)
2) LEV control during heating operation (subcool
detection).

TH3
(Gas pipe
temperature)

LEV control during cooling operation (superheat detection)

TH4
Outdoor air
temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

Temperature
sensor (Indoor air temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

- 129 -

Resistance check
R0=15k
R0/80=3460
Rt =
15exp{3460(

1
1
)}
273+t 273

0°C [32°F]:15kohm
10°C [50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C [68°F]:6.4kohm
25°C [77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C [86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C [104°F] :3.1kohm

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
3. BC controller
(1) G type
Part name
Pressure
sensor

Symbols
(functions)
PS1
(High pressure side)
PS3
(Intermediate pressure)

Thermistor

Solenoid
valve

Specifications

1) Detects high pressure
2) LEV control

PS1
123

1) Detects intermediate
pressure
2) LEV control

Connector

Check method

Pressure
0~4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69
Pressure [psi]
=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145
1
2
3

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

LEV control
(Liquid level control)

TH12
(Bypass
outlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15
(Bypass inlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH16
(Liquid refrigerant
temperature)

LEV control (Subcool)

SVM1

Opens during cooling and de- AC208-230V
frost modes
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powProvides refrigerant to indoor ered
unit in cooling operation

SV B

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in heating operation

SV C

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

LEV1
LEV3

HWE09080

Usage

TH11
(Liquid inlet
temperature)

SV A

LEV

Part
code

R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

1
273 t

1
273

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm
10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm
25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

1) Liquid level control
DC12V
2) Pressure differential con- Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor
trol
0-2000 pulses

- 130 -

Continuity
check with a
tester

Same as
indoor LEV

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
(2) GA type
Part name
Pressure
sensor

Symbols
(functions)
PS1
(High pressure side)
PS3
(Intermediate pressure)

Thermistor

Solenoid
valve

Specifications

1) Detects high pressure
2) LEV control

PS1
123

1) Detects intermediate
pressure
2) LEV control

Connector

Check method

Pressure
0~4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69
Pressure [psi]
=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145
1
2
3

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

LEV control
(Liquid level control)

TH12
(Bypass
outlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15
(Bypass inlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH16
(Liquid refrigerant
temperature)

LEV control (Subcool)

SVM1

Opens during cooling and de- AC208-230V
frost modes
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powPressure differential control
ered

R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

1
273 t

1
273

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm
10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm
25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

SV A

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

SV B

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in heating operation

SV C

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

LEV1
LEV2

1) Liquid level control
DC12V
2) Pressure differential con- Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor
trol
0-2000 pulses
Subcool control

LEV3

HWE09080

Usage

TH11
(Liquid inlet
temperature)

SVM2

LEV

Part
code

- 131 -

Continuity
check with a
tester

Same as
indoor LEV

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
(3) GB type
Part name
Thermistor

Solenoid
valve

LEV

HWE09080

Symbols
(functions)

Part
code

Usage

TH12
(Bypass
outlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15
(Bypass inlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

SV A

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

SV B

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in heating operation

SV C

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

LEV3

Pressure differential control

Specifications

R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

- 132 -

1
273 t

Check method

1
273

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm
10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm
25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm
AC208-230V
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered

Continuity
check with a
tester

DC12V
Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor
0-2000 pulses

Same as
indoor LEV

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
(4) HB type
Part name
Thermistor

Solenoid
valve

LEV

HWE09080

Symbols
(functions)

Part
code

Usage

TH12
(Bypass
outlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

TH15
(Bypass inlet temperature)

LEV control (Superheat)

SV A

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

SV B

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in heating operation

SV C

Provides refrigerant to indoor
unit in cooling operation

LEV3

Pressure differential control

Specifications

R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

- 133 -

1
273 t

Check method

1
273

0°C[32°F] : 15kohm
10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm
25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm
AC208-230V
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered

Continuity
check with a
tester

DC12V
Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor
0-2000 pulses

Same as
indoor LEV

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

HWE09080

- 134 -

GB

VII Control
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

HWE09080

Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches ....................................................... 137
Controlling the Heat source Unit .................................................................................... 143
Controlling BC Controller ............................................................................................... 160
Operation Flow Chart..................................................................................................... 161

- 135 -

GB

- 136 -

[ VII Control ]
VII Control

[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches
1. Heat source unit
(1) Control board

Function according to switch setting
Switch

Switch setting timing

Function
OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Units that require switch
setting
Note.2
OC

OS

C

C

C

C

B

B

A

-

SWU

1-2

Unit address setting

Set to 00 or 51-100 with the dial switch

Before power on

SW1

1-10

For self-diagnosis/
operation monitoring

Refer to the LED monitor display on the
heat source unit board.

Anytime after power on

1

Centralized control
switch

Without connection
to the centralized
controller

With connection to
the centralized con- Before power on
troller

2

Deletion of connection information

Normal control

Deletion

(OC) Storage of IC/
OC error history

C

C

(OS) Storage of OS
error history

(OC) Deletion of IC/
Anytime after power on
OC error history
(When switched from OFF
(OS) Deletion of
to ON)
OS error history

-

Pump down mode

After being energized and
while the compressor is
stopped

A

Normal control

-

A

-

3

Deletion of error history SW

Before power on

SW2
4

Pump down mode

5
6

Power on signal output switch

7

During Thermo-ON

During ThermoOFF

Anytime after power on

8

-

-

-

-

-

-

9
10

-

-

-

-

-

-

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) Refer to "VII [2] Controlling the Heat source Unit" for details.(page 143)

HWE09080

- 137 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

Function according to switch setting
Switch

OFF

SW3

Switch setting timing

Function
ON

OFF

ON

1

Test run mode: enabled/disabled

SW3-2 disabled

SW3-2 enabled

Anytime after power on

2

Test run mode: ON/
OFF

Stops all ICs

Sends a test-run
signal to all IC

After power on and when
SW3-1 is on.

3

Water heat exCN51-3,5 signal out- Heat source unit erchanger coupling
put switch
ror output
prevention output

Anytime after power on

4

Water heat exchangIneffective
er freeze prevention

Anytime after power on

Effective
Note 4

Units that require switch
setting
Note.2
OC

OS

A

-

A

-

C

C

A

-

5
6
7
8
9

-

-

-

-

-

-

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

1
2

-

-

-

Anytime after being energized (except during initial startup mode.
Automatically cancelled
90 minutes after compressor startup)

A

-

C

C

C

C

-

-

3

Refrigerant amount
adjustment

4

Low-noise mode/
Low-noise mode
step demand switch(Note 3)
ing

SW4
5
6

7
8
9
10

Cumulative compressor operation
time data deletion
-

Normal operation
mode

Cumulative compressor operation
time data is retained.

Refrigerant amount
adjust mode

Step demand mode Before being energized
Cumulative compressor operation
time data is deleted.

-

-

Anytime after power on
(when the unit is turned
on)
-

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) The noise level is reduced by controlling the compressor frequency.
A setting of CN3D is required.(page 24)
4) If the inlet water temperature (TH7) drops below 5ºC [41ºF] while the compressor is stopped, or the outlet water temperature
(TH8) drops below 3ºC [37ºF], Cooling-only operation will be performed to prevent freeze-ups.
This operation will terminate when one of the following conditions is met: 1) Both the TH7 and TH8 readings (water temperature) exceed 10ºC [50ºF], 2) Two hours have passed since the beginning of the Cooling-only operation, or 3) Signal to resume
normal operation is received.

HWE09080

- 138 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

Function according to switch setting
Switch

OFF
1
2
3
4
5
SW5

Switch setting timing

Function

Low-noise mode
selection

Capacity priority
mode(Note 3)

ON

OFF

-

ON
-

Low-noise mode

Before being energized

Units that require switch
setting
Note.2
OC

OS

A

-

6
7

-

-

-

-

-

-

8
9
10

Backup heating

Ineffective

Effective

Any time after power on

A

-

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) When set to the capacity priority mode and if the following conditions are met, the quiet mode will terminate, and the unit will
go back into the normal operation mode.
Cooling-only/Cooling-main: High pressure is high.
Heating-only/Heating-main: Low pressure is low.
(2) INV board
Functions are switched with the following connector.

Connector

Function

Function according to connector
Enabled

CN6 shortcircuit connector

Enabling/disabling the following error
detection functions;
ACCT sensor failure
(5301 Detail No. 115)
ACCT sensor circuit failure
(5301 Detail No.117)
IPM open/ACCT erroneous wiring
(5301 Detail No. 119)
Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring
(5301 Detail No.120)

Error detection enabled

Disabled

Setting timing
Enabled

Disabled

Error detecAnytime after power on
tion disable
(No load operation is possible.)

CN6 short-circuit connector is mated with the mating connector.
Leave the short-circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the
equipment from damage.

HWE09080

- 139 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2. Function of the switch (Indoor unit)
(1) Dipswitches
1) SW1,3

Switch

SW1

Function according to switch setting

Function

Notes

1

Room temperature
detection position

2

Clogged filter detection

3

Filter check reminder time setting

4

Outside air intake

5

Remote display option

6

Humidifier control

OFF

ON

Indoor unit inlet

Built-in sensor on
the remote controller

Not available

Available

Forced heating operation
at OA temp of 5 C or below
Fan speed setting for
Heating Thermo-OFF

100h

2500h

Disabled

Enabled

Fan output

Thermo-ON signal

OFF

ON
Set to ON (built-in sensor on the remote controller)
on All Fresh (PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) model units

Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

During heating operation Always on while in the heating mode

Fan speed setting for
Heating Thermo-OFF

7

Switch setting timing

Very Low

Low

Not available

Available

According to the
SW1-7 setting

Applicable to All Fresh model units
(PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only

Preset speed

8
-

SW3

-

-

9

Self-recovery after power failure

Disabled

10

Power source start-stop

Disabled

Enabled

Heat pump

Cooling only

Enabled

While the unit is stopped
(Remote controller OFF)

Applicable to All Fresh model units
(PEFY-P-NMHU-E-F) only

1

Unit model selection

2

Louver

Not available

Available

3

Vane

Not available

Available

4

Vane swing function

Not available

Available

5

-

-

-

Vane angle limit setting
for cooling operation

Downblow B,C

Horizontal

Always set to Downblow B or C on
PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

Initial vane position

Enabled

Disabled

PLFY-P-NLMU-E model only

7

Automatic LEV value
conversion function

Not available

Available

8

Heating 4 C[7.2 F] up

Enabled

Disabled

9

SHm setting

2

5

The setting depends on the
model and type.

10

SCm setting

10

15

The setting depends on the
model and type.

6

Always set to OFF on PKFY-P-NBMU-E model units

Set to OFF on floor-standing
(PFFY) type units

Note 1. Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings.(Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells.)
Note 2. If both SW1-7 and SW1-8 are set to ON, the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo-OFF.
To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build-up of warm air around the indoor unit, use the built-in temperature sensor on the remote controller (SW1-1)
instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor.
Note 3. By setting SW3-1, SW1-7, and SW1-8 to a certain configuration, the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo-OFF. See the table below for details.
Switch setting

Fan speed during Thermo-OFF

SW3-1 SW1-7 SW1-8
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON

ON
OFF
ON

HWE09080

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Heating

Cooling

Cooling-only/heat pump

Very Low
Low

Preset speed

Heat pump

Preset speed

Cooling-only

Preset speed
Stop

Stop

Stop
Stop

Heat pump

- 140 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Address switch
Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems. Refer to the installation manual for the heat source unit for details
on how to make the address setting.
Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10's digit and 1's digit.
(Example)
When setting the address to "3", set the 1's digit to 3, and the 10's digit to 0.
When setting the address to "25", set the 1's digit to 5, and the 10's digit to 2.
3. Function of the switch 
(1) MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA)
The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover. Operate the switches to perform the remote controller main/sub setting or other function settings. Normally, do not change the settings of switches other than the SW1 (main/
sub switching switch). (All the switches are set to "ON" at factory setting.)

ON

1

2

3

4

Switching switch

Switch

ON

OFF

Remote controller
main/sub setting

Main

Sub

2

At power on of the
remote controller

Normal
startup

3

Cooling/heating display
set by automatic setting

4

Suction temperature display
(discharge temperature display)

1

Function

Remote controller

Operation by switch settings

Switch setting timing

When two remote controllers are connected
to one group, set either of the remote
controllers to "Sub".

Before power on

Timer mode
startup

When the program timer (only few stock
products are available) is connected, set to
"Timer mode startup" to resume the operation
with timer mode after power is restored.

Before power on

Displayed

Not displayed

When the automatic mode is set and the
"Cooling"/"Heating" display is not necessary,
set to "Not displayed".

Before power on

Displayed

Not displayed

When the suction temperature (discharge
temperature) display is not necessary,
set to "Not displayed".

Before power on

The MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA) does not have the switches listed above. Refer to the installation manual for the function setting.

HWE09080

- 141 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) ME remote controller (PAR-F27MEA)
Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch.

4 56

78 9

78 9

4 56

10's digit 1's digit
(left)
(right)

01
23

23

78 9

23

01

01

4 56

01
23

78 9

Rotary switch

45 6

Remote controller unit
Example: In case of address 108

Address setting range

Setting method

Main remote controller

101-150

Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the
same group.

Sub remote controller

151-200

Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the
same group.

Setting of rotary switch

Address No.

01-99*1

101-199 with the 100's digit automatically being set to 1*2

00

200

*1. At factory shipment, the rotary switch is set to 01.
*2. The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200. When the dials are set to
a number between 01 and 99, the 100's digit is automatically set to [1]. When the dials are set to 00, the 100's digit is
automatically set to [2].
To set addresses, use a precision slotted screw driver [2.0 mm [0.08 in] (w)], and do not apply than 19.6N.
The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch.
4. Switch functions  (Control board)
Function according to switch setting
Switch
1

Function
Model setting

2-5

ON

R410A

-

Always leave this switch to OFF.

-

-

-

1

2

-

SW4
6

Switch setting timing
OFF

No. of ports

*1

Before being energized

7, 8

-

-

-

-

1-6

-

-

-

-

SW5

7

Model setting

Refer to the table below.

Before being energized

8

Model setting

Refer to the table below.

Before being energized

*1. When a junction pipe kit was used to merge two ports to connect the indoor units with a total capacity of between P31
and P54, turn DIP SW4-6 to ON. When connecting a main and a sub BC controller, change the SW setting on only the
main BC controller. (It is not necessary to change the SW setting on the sub BC controller. )
Model setting
SW5-8
Switch
OFF
OFF

ON
G type

SW5-7
ON

HWE09080

GAtype

GB (HB) type

- 142 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

[2] Controlling the Heat source Unit
-1- Outline of Control Method
The heat source units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the
same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).
The setting of heat source unit can be verified by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW1).

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Display
The unit is designated as the OC: “oc” appears on the display.
The unit is designated as OS: “oS” appears on the display

The OC determines the operation mode and the control mode, and it also communicates with the indoor units.
The OS exercises autonomous distributed control (over defrost, error detection, and actuator control etc.) according to the
operation/control mode signals that are sent from the OC.

-2- Startup sequence rotation
At the initial startup, heat source units start up in the order of "OC and OS."
Startup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped. (Even after two hours of operation, startup sequence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation.)
In a system with multiple heat source units (OC and OS), when the integrated operation time of the unit in operation (either
OC or OS) reaches one hour during a cooling operation at low outside temperature, that unit will stop and the other unit will
go into operation.
Refer to [-13-Control at Initial Start-up] for the initial startup.
Performing startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS. Only startup sequence is changed.
Startup sequence of the heat source units can be checked with the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the OC.

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Display
OC→OS: “oc” and the “OC” address appear alternately on the display.
OS→OC: “oS” and the “OS” address appear alternately on the display.

-3- Initial Control
When the power is turned on, the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority.
During the initial processing, control processing of the operation signal is suspended. (The control processing is resumed after
the initial processing is completed. Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each
of the LEV opening. This process will take up to 5 minutes.)
During the initial processing, the LED monitor on the heat source unit's control board displays S/W version -> refrigerant type
-> heat pump -> cooling only and capacity -> and communication address in turn every second.

-4- Control at Start-up
The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz.
When the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the initial start-up mode (to be described later) has been completed (with a restriction on the frequency).

HWE09080

- 143 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-5- Bypass Control
Bypass solenoid valves (SV1a), which bypass the high- and low- pressure sides, perform the following functions.
(1) Bypass solenoid valve (SV1a) (ON = Open)
SV1a

Operation
ON

OFF

When the compressor on each heat source
unit starts up

ON for 4 minutes.

After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes
after restart

ON for 4 minutes.

During cooling or heating operation with the
compressor stopped

Always ON.
Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less

After the operation has stopped

ON for 3 minutes.
Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less

During defrost operation

ON

When low pressure (63LS) drops
While the compressor is operating at the
minimum frequency and when the low pres- below 0.23MPa[33psi].
sure (63LS) drops (3 or more minutes after
compressor startup)

When low pressure (63LS) exceeds 0.38MPa[55psi].

When high pressure (63HS1) rises

When 63HS1 is or below
3.43MPa[497psi] and 30 seconds
have passed

When 63HS1 exceeds
3.62MPa[525psi]

(2) Bypass solenoid valve (SV9) (ON = Close)
SV9

Operation
When high pressure (63HS1) rises during
the heating operation

OFF

ON

When 63HS1 exceeds 3.50MPa
[507psi]

When the pressure is
2.70MPa[391psi]or below

Others

HWE09080

Always ON

- 144 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-6- Compressor Frequency Control
Depending on the capacity required, the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature
(0°C [32°F] = 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation, and condensing temperature (49°C [120°F] = 2.88 MPa [418 psi])
during heating operation.
The table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation.
The OS in the multiple-heat source-unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the
OS based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines.
Frequency/cooling (Hz)

Frequency/heating (Hz)

Max

Min

Max

Min

P72 model

66

35

66

15

P96 model

90

35

80

15

P120 model

114

35

104

15

Model

The maximum frequency during heating operation is affected by the water temperature to a certain extent.
(1) Pressure limit
The upper limit of high pressure (63HS1) is preset, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every 15
seconds.
The actuation pressure is when the high-pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3.58MPa[519psi].
(2) Discharge temperature limit
Discharge temperature (TH4) of the compressor in operation is monitored, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency
is decreased every minute.
Operating temperature is 115°C [239°F].
(3) Periodic frequency control
Frequency control other than the ones performed at start-up, upon status change, and for protection is called periodic frequency control (convergent control) and is performed in the following manner.
Periodic control cycle
Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed
30 seconds after compressor start-up
30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit
The amount of frequency change
The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature (Te) and
condensing temperature (Tc).

HWE09080

- 145 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-7- Refrigerant Recovery Control 
Recovery of refrigerant is performed during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the unit while
it is stopped (unit in fan mode), or inside the indoor unit that is in cooling mode or in heating mode with thermo off. It is also
performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat source heat
exchanger.
(1) During heating operation
Starting refrigerant recovery mode
The refrigerant recovery mode in heating starts when all of the following three conditions are met:
15 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.
TH4 > 115°C [239°F]
Frequencies below 50 Hz
Refrigerant recovery
1) Refrigerant is recovered with the LEV on the applicable indoor unit (unit under stopping mode, fan mode, cooling, heating with
thermo off) being opened for 30 seconds.
Opening of LEV during refrigerant recovery
Opening of indoor unit LEV: 400 pulses

30 seconds

Initial opening of LEV

Start

Finish

2) Periodic capacity control of the heat source units and periodic LEV control of the indoor units will be suspended during refrigerant recovery operation; they will be performed after the recovery has been completed.
(2) During cooling operation
Starting refrigerant recovery mode
The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all the following conditions are met:
30 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.
When the unit keeps running for 3 minutes in a row or more with high discharge temperature
TH4 > 105°C [221°F] or 63HS1 > 3.43 MPa [497 psi] (35 kg/cm2G) and SC0 > 10°C [18°F]
Refrigerant recovery
The opening of LEV1 is increased and periodic control begins again.

-8- Refrigerant Recovery Control 
Refrigerant recovery is performed for each BC port during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the units that are stopped (in the fan mode), in the cooling mode, or in the heating Thermo-OFF mode.
It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the heat
source heat exchanger.
Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main
mode)
The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all of the following conditions are met:
1) When 5 minutes have passed in the Heating-only or Heating-main mode or 30 seconds have passed in the Cooling-only or
Cooling-main mode since the completion of the previous refrigerant recovery cycle AND the when following conditions are
met.
TH4 > 105°C [221°F]
2) When the port is not in the 4-minute restart delay mode
Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main
mode)
1) When the port is in the cooling Thermo-OFF, fan, or stop mode
SV C at the port turns on for 30 seconds. ( indicates port No.)
2) The opening of LEV1 and LEV3 is increased.

-9- Capacity Control of Heat Exchanger
(1) Control method
Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a constant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation temperature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 
(1) Control method
Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the heat source unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a constant condensing temperature of (water temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation temperature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 ) 
The OC, OS1, and OS2 controls the subcool coil individually.
The LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the subcool at the heat source unit heat exchanger outlet that
is calculated from the values of high pressure (63HS1) and liquid piping temperature (TH3), or the superheat that is calculated
from the values of low pressure (63LS) and the bypass outlet temperature (TH2) of the subcool coil.
LEV opening is controlled based on the values of the inlet (TH6) and the outlet (TH3) temperatures of the subcool coil, high
pressure (63HS1), and discharge temperature (TH4). In a single-heat source-unit system, the LEV is closed (0) in the heating
mode, while the compressor is stopped, and during cooling Thermo-OFF. In a multiple-heat source-unit system, the LEV closes (0) during heating operation, while the compressor is stopped, or during cooling Thermo-OFF. The LEV opens to a specified position when 15 minutes have passed after Thermo-OFF. (65 pulses)
LEV1 outputs 0 pulse during the defrost cycle, and 300 pulses if either of the following formulas are satisfied: 63LS<2kgf/cm2
or TH4100ºC [212ºF].

-12- Refrigerant flow control (Linear expansion valve )
Refrigerant flow is controlled by each unit in the combined models during heating. Refrigerant flow control is performed by the
OC, OS1, and OS2 individually. The valve opens to a specified angle during cooling (Opening: 1400 pulses)
Valve opening is controlled based on the values of high pressure (63HS1), discharge temperature (TH4), low pressure(
63LS), and piping temperature (TH5).
The valve moves to the predetermined position while the unit is stopped.

-13- Control at Initial Start-up
When started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power on, the unit goes into the initial startup mode.
At the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC, OS1, and OS2, they will go into the normal control mode.
1. Flowchart of initial operation
(1) P72, P96, P120 models
Initial startup mode starts.

50 F 60Hz
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

Initial startup mode complete

HWE09080

- 149 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) P144, P168, P192, P216, P240 models

Initial startup mode starts.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
F 60Hz

The total operating load of the indoor unit
after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.
(*1 Qj 50)

No

Yes

The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the
compressor on the OS starts up.

*2

The compressor on the OC starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OC and OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.
*3

Both the OC and OS stop.
The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated.

The compressor on the OS starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

*2
The air conditioning load is too small
for both the OC and the OS to
simultaneously stay in operation.

Initial startup mode complete

*3
The air conditioning load is
high enough for both OC and OS to
simultaneously stay in operation.

*1

HWE09080

Qj:Total capacity (model name) code

- 150 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) P264, P288, P312, P336, P360 models 
Initial startup mode starts.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
F 60Hz

No

The total operating load of the indoor unit
after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.
( *1 Qj 50)
Yes

The total operating load of the indoor unit after
5 minutes of operation is between P96 and P400.
(50 < *1 Qj< 200)

Yes

No

The compressor on the OS remains in operation, and the
compressors on the OS1 and OS2 start up.

*2

50 F 60Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or F < 50Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC remains in operation,
and the compressor on the OS1 starts up.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
*3
50 F 60Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OC and OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.
*4

*2
The air conditioning load is
too small for the OC, OS1,
and OS2 to simultaneously
stay in operation.
*3
The air conditioning load is
too small for both OC and
OS1, or OS1 and OS2 to
simultaneously stay in
operation.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The startup sequence of the OC, OS1,
and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1, and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The compressor on the OS1 remains in operation,
and the compressor on the OS2 starts up.
50 F 60Hz (both OS1 and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OS1 and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

*4
The air conditioning load is
high enough for OC, OS1
and OS2 to simultaneously
stay in operation.

The compressor on the OS1 starts up.

*5

50 F 60Hz (OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.
The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1, and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

*5
The air conditioning load is
high enough for both OC
and OS1, or OS1 and OS2
to simultaneously stay in
operation.

The compressor on the OS2 starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

Initial startup mode complete

*1

HWE09080

Qj:Total capacity (model name) code

- 151 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-14- Emergency Operation Mode
1. Problems with the heat source unit
Emergency operation mode is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when
one of the heat source units in the P144 through P240 models is in trouble or when one or two of the heat source units in the
P264 through P360 models are in trouble.
This mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Starting the emergency operation
When an error occurs, the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller.
The error is reset using the remote controller.
If an error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1) above, (See the table below.), the retry operation
starts.
4) If the same error is detected during the retry operation (step 3 above), an emergency operation can be started by resetting
the error via the remote controller.
Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)
Trouble source

Compressor
Inverter

Thermistor

TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7
TH8

Power

Error codes that permit an
emergency operation

Error code description

0403
4220, 4225
4230
4240
4250, 4255
5110
5301
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107

Serial communication error
Bus voltage drop
Heatsink overheat protection
Overload protection
Overcurrent relay trip
Heatsink temperature sensor failure (THHS)
Current sensor/circuit failure
Subcool heat exchanger bypass outlet temperature sensor failure
Pipe temperature sensor failure
Discharge temperature sensor failure
Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure
Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure
Outside air temperature sensor failure

5108
4102

Water outlet temperature sensor fault
Open phase

4115

Power supply sync signal abnormality

Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units)
OC failure
pattern
Trouble
OC
Normal
OS
Emergency Cooling Permitted
operation Heating Permitted
Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OS failure
pattern
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

60%

Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units)

OC
OS1
OS2
Emergency
operation

Cooling
Heating

Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure
pattern

OS1 failure
pattern

OS2 failure
pattern

Trouble
Normal
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

60%

OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure
pattern
pattern
pattern
Trouble
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Trouble
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

40%

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,
some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

HWE09080

- 152 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Ending the emergency operation
1) End conditions
When one of the following conditions is met, emergency operation stops, and the unit makes an error stop.
When the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours.
When the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours.
When an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation.
2) Control at or after the completion of emergency operation
At or after the completion of emergency operation, the compressor stops, and the error code reappears on the remote controller.
If another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode, the unit repeats the procedures in section (1)
above.
To stop the emergency mode and perform a current-carrying operation after correcting the error, perform a power reset.
2. Communication circuit failure or when some of the heat source units are turned off
This is a temporary operation mode in which the heat source unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit
failure occurs or when some of the heat source units are turned off.
(1) Starting the emergency operation (When the OC is in trouble)
1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller.
2) Reset the error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation.
Precautions before servicing the unit
When the OC is in trouble, the OS temporarily takes over the OC's function and performs an emergency operation. When this
happens, the indoor unit connection information are changed.
In a system that has a billing function, a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear on
the TG-2000A. Even if this message appears, do not change (or set) the refrigerant system information on the TG-2000A.
After the completion of an emergency operation, the correct connection information will be restored.
(2) Starting the emergency operation (When the OS is in trouble)
1) A communication error occurs. -> An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes.
Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)
Trouble source
Circuit board failure or the power
to the heat source units is off

HWE09080

Error codes that permit an
emergency operation
6607
6608

- 153 -

Error code description
No acknowledgement error
No response error

GB

[ VII Control ]
Emergency operation pattern (2 heat source units)

OC
OS
Emergency Cooling
operation Heating
Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure OS failure
pattern
pattern
Trouble Normal
Normal Trouble
Permitted Permitted
Permitted Permitted
Capacity that matches
the total capacity of the
operable heat source
units

Emergency operation pattern (3 heat source units)

OC
OS1
OS2
Emergency
operation

Cooling
Heating

Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure
pattern

OS1 failure
pattern

OS2 failure
pattern

Trouble
Normal
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure
pattern
pattern
pattern
Trouble
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Trouble
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable heat source units

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,
some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

(3) Ending the emergency operation
When communication is restored, the emergency mode is cancelled, and the units go into the normal operation mode.

HWE09080

- 154 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-15- Control Method 

Control method

The control system configuration for the PQRY models is shown in the chart below.

Daisy-chained
non-polar 2-wire
transmission line

Data signal exchange
between system equipment

Non-polar 2-wire
serial communication
method

Calculation, processing

16-bit CPU
microcomputer operation
processing

*

System control
Adjustment of refrigerant flow rate
Adjustment of rotation speed of
compressor or fan

Autonomous distributed
control system
(F2-VPM control)

Rotation speed control of compressor
or fan depending on the refrigerant
pressure value and the changing speed

Heat source unit

Self-contained capacity control depending
on the load

Indoor unit

Refrigerant distribution control depending
on the operation mode

BC controller

Autonomous distributed control system : A system that consists of three independent sub control systems,
instead of a single centralized control system, that work together
to maintain the overall control of the entire system.

HWE09080

- 155 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-16- Cooling/heating Circuit Control and General Function of System Equipment

Operation
status

Gas
Two-phase
Liquid

Schematic diagram of refrigerant circuit

High-pressure gas

4-way valve

Check valve

Selector valve
L

M
A
O

Lowpressure
pipe

Heat exchanger

Pressure

Low-pressure two-phase
L

Low-pressure
gas

M

Gas

Heat exchanger

L

L

M

Cooling
only

Schematic diagram of refrigerating cycle

A

Liquid

LEV
L
M

Gas-liquid
separator
High-pressure
liquid

Indoor unit

Highpressure
pipe

Heat source unit

LEV

M

High-pressure
liquid

Enthalpy
(energy)

O

Gas-liquid mixture

BC controller

High-pressure gas

Cooling
N
A

Lowpressure
gas

M

L

Cooling Low-pressure two-phase
N

O

L
M

J G I
L
K

Cooling

B

N

Cooling
main

L

F

D

G

E

B

N
M

High-pressure
liquid

K

L

Lowpressure
two- phase

O

M

High-pressure liquid

O

L

M

L

M

L

A

M

Heating
only

A

E

J

Low-pressure gas

F

H

High-pressure
two-phase I

A

D C
H

Heating

Highpressure
gas

C

M

L

M

Highpressure
gas
F

F

High-pressure
liquid

O

Low-pressure gas

Heating
J
A

B

Lowpressure
two- phase

C

D

Heating High-pressure liquid
B

M

C

D

C

D

Heating
B

Heating
main

A

D

Cooling
H
K

Highpressure
gas
I

E

HWE09080

B

C
E F

G

Low-pressure
gas

F

Lowpressure
two- phase

K

J

H

G

High-pressure
liquid

I

- 156 -

M

GB

[ VII Control ]

-17- Operation Mode 
(1) Indoor unit operation mode
The operation mode can be selected from the following 5 modes using the remote controller.
1

Cooling mode

2

Heating mode

3

Dry mode

4

Fan mode

5

Stopped mode

(2) Heat source unit operation mode
1

Cooling mode

All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode.

2

Heating mode

All indoor units in operation are in heating mode.

3

Stopped mode

All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode.

When the heat source unit is performing a cooling operation, the operation mode of the connected indoor units that are not in
the cooling mode (Stopped, Fan, Thermo-OFF) cannot be changed to heating from the remote controller. If this attempt is
mode, "Heating" will flash on the remote controller. The opposite is true when the heat source unit is performing a heating
operation. (The first selection has the priority.)

HWE09080

- 157 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-18- Operation Mode 
(1) Indoor unit operation mode
The operation mode can be selected from the following 6 modes using the remote controller.
1

Cooling mode

2

Heating mode

3

Dry mode

4

Automatic cooling/heating
mode

5

Fan mode

6

Stopping mode

(2) Heat source unit operation mode
1

Cooling only mode

All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode.

2

Heating only mode

All indoor units in operation are in heating mode.

3

Cooling main mode

Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes.

4

Heating main mode

Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes.

5

Stopping mode

All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode.

When units in cooing and heating coexist, the operation mode (cooling main mode or heating main mode) will be determined
by the heat source unit, based on the refrigerant pressure and speed variation data.
(3) Operation pattern for automatic cooling/heating mode
When the automatic cooling/heating mode is selected from remote controller functions, the indoor temperature will be detected in pattern as shown in the figure below, and the operation mode (cooling or heating) will automatically be selected.

Switches to cooling mode
1 C [2 F]

Temperature
rise

1.5 C
[3 F]

1.5 C
[3 F]

Cooling

Fan

Fan

Cooling operation under
Thermo-ON conditions
Set temperature
(Variable between 19 C and 28 C
[ 67 F and 83 F])
Heating operation under Thermo-ON conditions

Heating

1 C [2 F]

Switches to heating mode

(4) Relationship between the operation mode and the load capacity (kW) (within a system)

0

100(%)
Heating load

Cooling load
Cooling load
capacity

Heating load
capacity
Heating =
X 100
load (%) Cooling load + Heating load
capacity
capacity

X100 = Cooling
Cooling load + Heating load
load (%)
capacity
capacity

100(%)

0
Cooling only
mode

Cooling main
mode

Heating main
mode

Heating only
mode

Total heat recovery mode

HWE09080

- 158 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-19- DEMAND Control
Cooling/heating operation can be prohibited (Thermo-OFF) by an external input to the heat source units.

When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, the 4-step DEMAND control is enabled.
Eight-step demand control is possible in the system with two heat source units.
Twelve-step demand control is possible in the system with three heat source units.
Refer to Chapter II [3] 2.(7) "Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the heat source unit (various connection options)" for details.(page 22)

HWE09080

- 159 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

[3] Controlling BC Controller
1. Control of SV A, SV B, and SV C
SV A, SV B, and SV C turn on or off depending on the operation mode of the branch.
Mode

Port

Cooling

Heating

Stopped

SV A

ON

OFF

OFF

SV B

OFF

ON

OFF

SV C

ON

OFF

OFF

2. Control of SVM1 and 1b
SVM turns on or off depending on the operation mode.
Operation mode

Cooling only

Cooling main

Heating only

Heating main

Stopped

SVM1,1b

ON

Pressure differential control*1

OFF

OFF

OFF

*1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within
a certain range.
3. Control of LEV
LEV opening (sj) is controlled as follows depending on the operation mode.
Operation mode

Cooling only

Cooling main

Heating only

Heating main

Stopped

110

110*3

1200

Pressure differential control*2

Pressure differential control*2

60

60

60

60

LEV1
G,GA
type

2000

LEV2
(only GA type)

GB,HB
type

LEV3

Superheat control*4

LEV3

Superheat control*4

Liquid level
control*1differential control*2

Superheat control*4

*1. Liquid level control: The liquid level detected by the liquid inlet temperature (TH11 sensor) is controlled so as to be within
a certain range.
*2. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlle every minute so as to be within
a certain range.
*3. Can be 110 or more due to pressure rise on the liquid side (PS1).
*4. Superheat control: The amound of superheat that is calculated on the bypass inlet and outlet temperature (G, GA,
:TH12,TH15, GB, HB: TH12, TH15) is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range.
4. Control of SVM2, and 2b
Operation mode

Cooling only

Cooling main

Heating only

Heating main

Stopped

SVM2,2b

OFF

OFF

Pressure differential control*1

Pressure differential control*1

OFF

*1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and PS3) is controlled every minute so as to be within
a certain range.

HWE09080

- 160 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

[4] Operation Flow Chart
1. Mode determination flowchart 
(1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode)

Start
Normal operation
Breaker
turned on

Error

NO

Unit in the stopped state

YES
1
Operation SW
turned on

From heat source unit

YES

NO
1. Protection function
self-holding cancelled.
*Note 1
2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
Remote controller
display lit off

*Note 2
NO
Error mode
YES

YES

Operation mode
Auxiliary heater
ON

NO
1. Auxiliary heater OFF
2. Low fan speed for
1 minute

YES

3-minute
drain pump ON

Error stop

Error display

Cooling mode

Heating mode

Dry mode

Fan mode

Self-holding of
protection function

Cooling display

Heating display

Dry display

Fan display

FAN stop

Drain pump
ON
NO

Error command
to heat source unit

Indoor unit LEV
fully closed.

*Note 1

*Note 3
YES
Prohibition
NO

Refer to 2-(1)
Cooling operation.

*Note 3
YES

*Note 3
YES

Prohibition

Prohibition

NO

NO

Refer to 2-(2)
Heating operation.

Refer to 2-(3)
for dry operation.

Fan operations

Prohibition
"Blinking display on
the remote controller"

Operation command to heat source unit (to 2 )

*Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. If some of the indoor units are
experiencing a problem (except water leakage), only those indoor units that are experiencing the problems will stop.
If the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all connected indoor units will stop.
*Note 3. The operation will be prohibited when the set cooling/heating mode is different from that of the heat source unit.

HWE09080

- 161 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Heat source unit (cooling and heating modes)

Start

Normal operation
Error

NO

Breaker
turned on

Unit in the stopped state

YES
"HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on
the remote controller
NO

*Note 1
Indoor units
registered to the
remote controller
YES

NO
1. Protection function self-holding cancelled.
2. LEV1 fully closed.

2

From indoor unit

Operation
command

YES
Operation
mode

Cooling / Heating

*Note 2
Error mode

YES
Error stop

NO
72C ON

1. 72C OFF
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. All solenoid valves OFF

*Note 3
Operation
mode

Refer to Cooling/Dry
Operation 2-(1) and 2-(3)

Error display on the
heat source unit LED
Self-holding of
protection function

Error command to
indoor unit

Refer to heating
Operation 2-(2).

Operation command to indoor unit To 1 .

*Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address,

and for the group information will start. During this, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote
controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" keeps
blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat source unit
stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor
unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display.
*Note 3. The heat source unit operates according to the operation mode commanded by the indoor unit. However, when the
heat source unit is running a cooling operation, come of the operating indoor units will stop, or the operation of these
indoor units will be prohibited even when the indoor unit mode is switched from fan mode to heating mode.
This also applies when the heat source unit is running a heating operation.

HWE09080

- 162 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2. Operations in each mode
(1) Cooling operation

Cooling operation

Normal operation
During test run mode

4-way valve OFF

Indoor unit fan
operation

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

*Note 1

YES

NO
NO
Thermostat ON

YES
YES

3-minute restart
prevention

NO
1. Inverter output 0Hz
2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening
3. All solenoid valves OFF
4. 72C OFF

1. Inverter frequency control
2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 control
LEV2a, LEV2b fully opened
3. Solenoid valve control
4. 72C control

*Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

HWE09080

- 163 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Heating operation

Normal operation
Heating operation

Unit in the stopped state
During test run mode

NO
4-way valve ON

Test run mode
ON

YES

NO
NO
Thermostat ON

YES
YES

3-minute restart
prevention

NO
1. Indoor unit fan operation at
Very Low speed
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 Fully closed
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening
4. All solenoid valves OFF
5. Heat source unit fan stop
6. 72C OFF

HWE09080

1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control
2. Inverter frequency control
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1,LEV2a, LEV2b control
4. Solenoid valve control
5. 72C control

- 164 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) Dry operation

Dry operation

Normal operation
Thermostat ON

4-way valve OFF

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

YES
*Note 2

NO
Thermostat ON
NO

Suction temperature
18°C[64°F]

YES
*Note 1
1. Indoor unit fan stop
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 fully closed.
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening.
4. Solenoid valve OFF
5. 72C OFF

1. Heat source unit (compressor)
intermittent operation
2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations
(Synchronized with the compressor:
low speed, OFF operations)

1 or 2

*Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18°C [64°F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the
indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature
becomes 18°C [64°F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit,
and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor
is turned on.
*Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation
(ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation.

HWE09080

- 165 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
1. Mode determination flowchart 
(1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode)

Start
Normal operation
Breaker
turned on

Error
Stop

NO

YES

1

Operation SW
turned on

NO

YES

*Note 1

1. Protection function
self-holding cancelled.
2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
Remote controller
display lit off

*Note 2
NO
Error mode
YES

YES

Auxiliary heater
ON
NO

1. Auxiliary heater OFF FAN stop
2. Low fan speed for
1 minute

YES

Drain pump
ON
NO

3-minute drain
pump ON

Operation mode
Error stop

Error display

Cooling mode

Heating mode

Dry mode

Automatic
cooling/heating mode

Fan mode

Self-holding of
protection function

Cooling display

Heating display

Dry display

Auto COOL/HEAT
display

Fan display

Error command
to heat source unit

Indoor unit
LEV fully closed.
*Note 1

*Note 3
YES

*Note 3
YES

*Note 3
YES

*Note 3
YES

Prohibition

Prohibition

Prohibition

Prohibition

NO

NO

NO

NO

Refer to 2-(1) for
cooling operation.

Refer to 2-(2) for
heating operation.

Refer to 2-(3) for
dry operation.

Auto
cooling/heating mode

Fan operations

Prohibition
"Blinking display on
the remote controller"

1

1

*Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source unit side.
If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem
will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop.
*Note 3. If multiple indoor units are connected to a port and there is a discrepancy in the operation mode between the
indoor unit and the port, the operation will be prohibited. (Operation mode blinks on the remote controller, the
Fan stops, indoor unit LEV becomes fully closed.)

HWE09080

- 166 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Heat source unit (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes)

Start

Normal operation

Breaker
turned on

Error

NO

Unit in the stopped state

YES

"HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks
on the remote controller

*Note 1

NO

Indoor units
registered to the
remote controller

YES

2

NO

Operation
command

Protection function
self-holding cancelled.

YES
fan

Operation
mode

Cooling only, Heating only
Mixture of units in cooling and heating
*Note 2

1. 52C1 4-way valve OFF
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. All solenoid valves OFF

YES
Error mode
NO
72C ON

Error stop

*Note 3
Mixture of units in cooling and heating
Operation
mode
Operation
mode

Cooling Only

Heating Only

Cooling Main

Error display on the
heat source unit LED

*Note 4
Self-holding of
protection function

Heating Main

Operation command
to the BC controller

Operation command to the BC controller

2

*Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address,
and for the group information will start. During this, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the
remote controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing,
"HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes
after power on.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the heat source unit side. The heat
source unit stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of
even a single indoor unit will keep the heat source unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display.
*Note 3. The units will follow the operation mode commands from the BC controller
*Note 4. When the operation mode commands from the BC controllers are mixed (both cooling and heating), the
actual operation mode is determined by the heat source unit.

HWE09080

- 167 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) BC controller (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes)

Start

Breaker
turned on

Normal operation
Error

NO

Unit in the stopped state

YES
NO

Operation
command
YES

Protection function
self-holding cancelled.

1. Determination of operation mode
(Cooling only, Heating only, Mixture
of units in cooling and heating)
2. Transmitted to the heat source unit

Reception of operation mode
command from the heat source unit

*Note 1
YES
Error mode
NO
Fan

Operation
mode
All units in the
same mode

Solenoid valves OFF
LEV Fully closed

Cooling Only

Mixture of units in cooling and heating

Operation
mode

Error stop

Operation
mode

Heating Only

Error command to
heat source unit

Self-holding of
protection function

Cooling Main

Heating Main

Error command to
indoor unit

3

Note 1. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or heat source
unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are
experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the heat source unit is experiencing a problem,
all the connected units will stop.

HWE09080

- 168 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2. Operations in each mode
(1) Cooling operation

Cooling operation

Normal operation
During test run mode

4-way valve OFF

Indoor unit fan
operation

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

*Note 1

YES

NO
NO

Thermostat
ON

YES

YES

3-minute restart
prevention

NO
1. Inverter output 0Hz
2. Indoor unit LEV, Oil return LEV fully closed
3. Solenoid valves OFF
4. BC controller solenoid valves OFF
5. BC controller LEV fully closed

1. Inverter frequency control
2. Indoor unit LEV, Oil returnLEV control
3. Solenoid valve control
4. BC controller solenoid valve control
5. BC controller control

*Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the
ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

HWE09080

- 169 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Heating operation

Normal operation

Heating operation

Unit in the stopped state
During test run mode

4-way valve ON

Test run mode
ON

YES

NO
NO

YES

Thermostat
ON

YES

3-minute restart
prevention

NO
1. Indoor unit fan operation at
Very Low speed
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV fully open
4. Solenoid valve OFF
5. BC controller solenoid valve control
6. BC controller LEV control

HWE09080

1. Indoor-heat source unit fan control
2. Inverter frequency control
3. Indoor unit LEV fully open
4. Solenoid valve control
5. BC controller solenoid valve control
6. BC controller LEV control

- 170 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) Dry operation

Dry operation

Normal operation
Thermostat ON

4-way valve OFF

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

YES
*Note 2

NO
Thermostat ON
NO

Suction temperature
18 C[64 F]

YES
*Note 1
1. Indoor unit fan stop
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
4. Solenoid valve OFF
5. BC controller Solenoid valve OFF
6. BC controller LEV fully closed

1. Heat source unit (compressor)
intermittent operation
2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations
(Synchronized with the compressor:
low speed, OFF operations)

1

2

*Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C [64 F], the heat source unit (compressor) and the
indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature
becomes 18 C [64 F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The heat source unit, the indoor unit,
and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor
is turned on.
*Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and heat source unit intermittent operation
(ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation.

HWE09080

- 171 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

HWE09080

- 172 -

GB

VIII Test Run Mode
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

HWE09080

Items to be checked before a Test Run ......................................................................... 175
Test Run Method ........................................................................................................... 176
Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount ......................................................... 177
Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount .................................................................................. 177
Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode................................................................................... 182
The following symptoms are normal. ............................................................................. 186
Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) .................................................................. 187

- 173 -

GB

- 174 -

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
VIII Test Run Mode

[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run
(1) Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors.
(2) Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and
make sure it reads at least 1.0Mohm.
Do not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1.0Mohm.
Do not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the controller board.
The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm immediately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant
in the compressor.
If insulation resistance reads at least 1Mohm, by turning on the main power and powering the crankcase heater for at least
12 hours, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up.
Do not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller.
(3) Check that the valve on the gas pipe and liquid pipe are fully open.
Securely tighten the cap.
(4) Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply.
(5) [When a transmission booster is connected]
Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the heat source units.
If the heat source units are turned on first, the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized.
In case the heat source units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on, perform a power reset on the heat
source units after turning on the power booster.
(6) Turn on the main power to the unit at least 12 hours before test run to power the crankcase heater.
Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage.
(7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, perform a test run with the
power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE09080

- 175 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[2] Test Run Method
The figure shows an MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA).

ON/OFF button

Set Temperature buttons
Down

Fan Speed button

Up
TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
TIMER
Hr
ON
AFTER

AFTER OFF

ERROR CODE

FUNCTION
FILTER

FC

FC

WEEKLY
SIMPLE
AUTO OFF

ONLY1Hr.

Operation Mode button

TEMP.

MENU
BACK

Louver button
Operation button)
(

MONITOR/SET

PAR-21MAA

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

FILTER

DAY

CHECK TEST

OPERATION

CLOCK

Test Run button

CLEAR

Vertical Air Direction button

To preceding
operation number.
Ventilation button
(
Operation button)
To next operation
number.

Operation procedures
Turn on the main power.

"PLEASE WAIT" appears on the LCD for up to five minutes. Leave
the power on for 12 hours. (Energize the crankcase heater.)

Press the Test button twice.

Operation mode display "TEST RUN" and OPERATION MODE are
displayed alternately.

Press the Operation Mode button.

Make sure that the air is blowing out.

Switch to cooling (or heating) operation by pressing the Operation Mode button.
Make sure that cold (or warm) air blows out.
Press the Fan Speed button.

Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button.

Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button

or the Louver button.

Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button.
Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment, such as ventilation equipment.
Cancel the test run by pressing the ON/OFF button.

Stop

Note 1: Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions.
2: The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours.
3: The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run.
4: The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote
controller during test run.
5: On some models, "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear on the display when the Vane Control button is pressed. This is normal.
6: If an external input is connected, perform a test run using the external input signal.
7: Perform simultaneous all-system operation for 15 minutes or longer because system error detection may take 15 minutes maximum.

HWE09080

- 176 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount
It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners
before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system.
1. Operating characteristic and refrigerant amount
The following table shows items of particular importance.
1) During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation.
2) During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation.
3) General tendency of discharge temperature
Discharge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant.
Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge
temperature.
The higher the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.
The lower the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.
4) When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60°C [18 to 108°F] higher
than the low pressure saturation temperature (Te).
-> If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is
smaller than 5°C [9°F], an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected.

[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount
1. Symptoms
Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms:
Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system, thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system.
Then, adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode.
The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1500 (overcharged refrigerant) on
the controller.

Overcharged refrigerant

The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency, and there is a problem with
performance.

Insufficient refrigerant amount

The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1102 (abnormal discharge temperature) on the controller.

2. Amount of refrigerant
(1) To be checked during operation
Operate all indoor units in either cooling-only or heating-only mode, and check such items as discharge temperature, subcooling, low pressure, suction temperature, and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system.
Symptoms

Conclusion

Discharge temperature is high. (Normal discharge temperature is below 95°C [203°F].)
Low pressure is unusually low.

Slightly undercharged refrigerant

Suction superheat is large. (Normal suction superheat is less than 20°C [36°F].)
Compressor shell bottom temperature is high. (The difference between the compressor shell
bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is greater than 60°C [108°F].)
Discharge superheat is small. (Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10°C [18°F].)
Compressor shell bottom temperature is low. (The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is less than 5°C [9°F].)

HWE09080

- 177 -

Slightly overcharged
refrigerant

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3. Amount of refrigerant to be added
The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to the heat source units.
The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site.
Heat source unit model

P72

P96

P120

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in
the heat source unit (kg)

5.0

5.0

5.0

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in
the heat source unit [lbs]

11.0

11.0

11.0

(1) Calculation formula
The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft])
Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.29x L1) + (0.2 x L2) + (0.12 x L3) + (0.06 x L4) + (0.024 x L5) +ǩ
Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.12x L1' ) +(2.15 x L2' ) + (1.29 x L3' ) + (0.65 x L4' ) + (0.26 x L5' ) + ǩ
L1 : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe (m)
L2 : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L3 : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe (m)
L4 : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L5 : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe (m)
ǩ, ǩ' : Refer to the table below.

L1'
L2'
L 3'
L 4'
L 5'

Total capacity of
connected indoor units

ǩ(kg)

ǩ'(oz)

-

27

2.0

71

28

-

54

2.5

89

55

-

126

3.0

106

127

-

144

3.5

124

145

-

180

4.5

159

181

-

234

5.0

177

235

-

273

6.0

212

274

-

307

8.0

283

308

-

342

9.0

318

343

-

411

10.0

353

412

-

480

12.0

424

481

-

14.0

494

: Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe [ft]

Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg)
Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz.
(Example: 178.21Q\ to 179oz)

HWE09080

- 178 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Example: PQHY-P144TSHMU-A/YSHMU-A

9.52
(3 m)

9.52
(1 m)

9.52 (10 m)
15.88 (10 m)

×

Liquid
separator

9.52
(10 m)

9.52
(20 m)

9.52
(10 m)

9.52
(10 m)

6.35
(10 m)

15.88 (30 m)
96
model

[3/8"]
[9 ft]

48
model

[3/8"]
[3 ft]

30
model

24
model

06
model

[3/8"][32 ft]
[3/4"] [32 ft]

×

Liquid
separator
[3/8"]
[65 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[1/4"]
[32 ft]

[3/4"][98 ft]
96
model

48
model

30
model

24
model

06
model

(3) Sample calculation
All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.
15.88 : 30 m + 10 m = 40 m
9.52 : 3 m + 1m + 10 m + 10 m + 20 m + 10 m + 10 m = 64 m
6.35 : 10 m
According to the above formula
Amount of refrigerant to be charged (kg) = (0.2 X 40) + (0.06 X 64) + (0.024 X 10) + 5.0 = 17.08kg
The calculation result would be 17.08, and it is rounded up to the nearest 0.1.
The final result will be as follows:
Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 17.1kg
All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.
[3/4"] : [98 ft] + [32 ft] = [130 ft]
[3/8"] : [9 ft] + [3 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] + [65 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] = [205 ft]
[1/4"] : [32 ft]
According to the above formula
Amount of refrigerant to be charged (oz) = (2.15 X 130) + (0.65 X 205) + (0.26 X 32) + 177 = 598.07oz
The calculation result would be 598.07 oz, and it is rounded up to the nearest 1 oz.
The final result will be as follows:
Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 599 oz

CAUTION
Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may
result in performance loss.

HWE09080

- 179 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
4. Amount of refrigerant to be added 
The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to theheat source units.
The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site.
Heat source unit model

P72

P96

P120

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant
in the heat source unit (kg)

5.0

5.0

5.0

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant
in the heat source unit [lbs]

11.0

11.0

11.0

(1) Calculation formula
The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft])
Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.36 x L1) + (0.23 x L2) + (0.16 x L3) + (0.11 x L4)+ (0.2 x L5)
+ (0.12 x L6) + (0.06 x L7) + (0.024 x L8) + ǩ1 + ǩ2 + ǩ3 + ǩ4
Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.88 x L1' ) + (2.48 x L2' ) + (1.73 x L3' ) + (1.19 x L4' )+ (2.16 x L5' )
+ (1.30 x L6' ) + (0.65 x L7' ) + (0.26 x L8' ) + ǩ1' + ǩ2' + ǩ3' + ǩ4'
L1'
L2'
L3'
L4'
L5'
L6'
L7'
L8'

L1 : Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe (m)
L2 : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe (m)
L3 : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe (m)
L4 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe (m)
L5 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L6 : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe (m)
L7 : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L8 : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe (m)
ǩ1,ǩ2,ǩ3,ǩ4, ǩ1' , ǩ2' , ǩ3' , ǩ4' : Refer to the table
below.

Heat source unit
total index

Amount for the BC
controllers (main/sub)

ǩ1(kg)

ǩ1' (oz)

P72

: Length of ø28.58[1-1/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]
: Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]
: Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe [ft]
: Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe [ft]
: Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe [ft]

BC controller (sub)
1

1.0

35

2

2.0

71

P96

Total capacity of
connected indoor
units

28

Amount for the Indoor
unit

ǩ4(kg)

ǩ4' (oz)

-

27

2.0

71

-

54

2.5

89

P120

55

-

126

3.0

106

P144

127

-

144

3.5

124

P168

145

-

180

4.5

159

P192

181

-

234

5.0

177

P216

235

-

273

6.0

212

P240

274

-

307

8.0

283

308

-

342

9.0

318

343

-

411

10.0

353

412

-

480

12.0

424

481

-

14.0

494

3.0

106

Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg)
Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz. (Example: 78.21oz to 79oz)

HWE09080

- 180 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Example

Heat source unit 1
Heat source unit 2

h4
Branch joint kit
5

F

G
A

BC controller

h1

BC controller(HB)

D

h3

Branch joint
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

Reducer (P06 - P18)
(Supplied with the BC Controller)

h2

BC controller(HB)

E

B

Junction pipe kit

a (CMY-R160-J)

b

c

(Optional accessory)
1

e

C

H H′

h1

Indoor

Branch joint
(CMY-Y202-G2)
(CMY-Y102L-G2)
(CMY-Y102S-G2)

2

3

Indoor

Indoor

(P06 - P54)

(P72 or P96)

d

f

h1

4

Indoor

Indoor

Maximum of 3 units per port
Total capacity of P54 or below

6

Indoor

(3) Sample calculation

When

Indoor unit1:30 model
Indoor unit2:96 model
Indoor unit3:12 model
Indoor unit4:15 model
Indoor unit5:12 model
Indoor unit6:24 model

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:

28.58
9.52
9.52
9.52
9.52
22.2
19.05

[1-1/8"]
[3/8"]
[3/8"]
[3/8"]
[3/8"]
[7/8"]
[3/4"]

40m [131ft]
10m [32ft]
20m [65ft]
5m [16ft]
5m [16ft]
3m [9ft]
1m [3ft]

a:
b:
c:
d:
e:
f :

9.52
9.52
6.35
6.35
6.35
9.52

[3/8"]
[3/8"]
[1/4"]
[1/4"]
[1/4"]
[3/8"]

10m[32ft]
5m[16ft]
5m[16ft]
10m[32ft]
5m[16ft]
5m[16ft]

The aggregate length of each liquid pipe type.
28.58
A = 40m[131ft]
22.2
F = 30m[98ft]
19.05
G = 1m[3ft]
9.52
C+D+E+a+b+f = 50m[164ft]
6.35
c+d+e = 20m[65ft]

The final result will be as follows:
Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 40×0.36+3×0.23+1×0.16+50×0.06+20×0.024+7.5+2+2+5
= 35.3kg

HWE09080

- 181 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode
1. Procedures 
Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode.
When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the
refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed.
SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.
Operation
When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling.
1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the values of TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4,
TH3, TH6, and Tc values on the OC, OS1, and OS2 by following the flowchart. The TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc values can be
displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS1, and OS2.
2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant
amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes).
When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate.
TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F].
The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on.
TH3-TH6 on the heat source unit is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less.
Wait until the TH3-TH6 reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to
determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate.
3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa[290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made.
4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW43 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4
1 2 3 4 5

6

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH3

7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

ON

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH6
1 2 3 4 5

6

7 8 9 10

Self-diagnosis swithes on Tc

7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

ON

HWE09080

6

ON

6

7 8 9 10

ON

- 182 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

Start
Turn on SW4-3 on the OC.

YES
NO

Put all indoor units in the test run mode
and run the units in cooling mode.

Has the initial start-up
mode been completed?

*Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart.

NO

YES
Has it been at least
30 minutes since
start up?

NO

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,
OS2 at or below 100°C [212°F]?
Note 1

NO

YES
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the lowpressure side.

YES

Has the operating frequency
of the compressor on the OC, OS1,
and OS2 become stable?
Note 3

NO

YES
Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after
adjusting the refrigerant amount to
determine its adequacy.
Note 2

Does 8°C [14.4°F] Tc-TH3 12°C [21.6°F] hold true?
(Use the largest “Tc - TH3” value of the
OC, OS1, and OS2.)

NO

Note 1

YES
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Does Tc-TH6 20°C [36°F] hold true?
(Check this item on the unit whose “Tc – TH3” value was
used in the step above.)
Note 1

YES

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes
after adjusting the refrigerant amount
and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2
Does the following hold true?
Tc-TH3 8°C [14.4°F]

NO

YES

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the
refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,
OS2 at or below 95°C [203°F]

Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

Gradually draw out
refrigerant from the service
port on the low pressure side.

YES

Adjustment complete
Turn off SW4-3 on the OC.
Note 4

CAUTION
Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

CAUTION
Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may
result in performance loss.

HWE09080

- 183 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2. Procedures 
Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode.
When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the heat source unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the
refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed.
SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.
Operation
When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling.
1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the TH4 value, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4, SC11, SC16, and Tc
values on the OC, OS by following the flowchart. The TH4, SC11, and SC16 values can be displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS.
2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant
amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes).
When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate.
Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and
27°F].
The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on.
Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less.
Wait until the Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate.
SC11: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller inlet; SC16: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller outlet
3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa [290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made.
4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW43 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4
1 2 3 4 5

6

Self-diagnosis swithes on SC11
1 2 3 4 5

7 8 9 10

6

7 8 9 10

ON

ON

Self-diagnosis swithes on SC16
1 2 3 4 5

6

7 8 9 10

ON

Use these switches to check the TH4, SC11, and SC16.

HWE09080

- 184 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Start
Turn on SW4-3 on the OC.

YES
NO

Put all indoor units in the test run mode
and run the units in cooling mode.

*Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart.

NO

Has the initial start-up
mode been completed?

YES
NO

Has it been at least
30 minutes since
start up?

YES
Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS
at or below 100°C [212°F]?
Note 1

NO

Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the lowpressure side.

YES
Has the
operating frequency
of the compressor on the OC, OS
become stable?
Note 3

NO

YES
NO

Does SH ≥ 5K [41ºF] hold
true for all indoor units?

YES
Has the indoor unit
LEV opening stabilized?
Note 2

YES
Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the
refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after
adjusting the refrigerant amount to
determine its adequacy.
Note 2

5K[41°F] ≤ SC11?
Note 2

NO

Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

YES
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Does 10 ≤ SC16 ≤ 30K [86ºF]
hold true?
Note1

YES
NO

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the
refrigerant amount and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2

Does 10K [50ºF] > SC16
hole true?

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the
refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2

Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS
at or below 95°C [203°F]?

YES

NO

YES

Gradually add refrigerant
from the service port on
the low pressure side.

Gradually draw out
refrigerant from the service
port on the low pressure side.

Adjustment complete
Turn off SW4-3 on the OC.
Note 4

CAUTION
Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

CAUTION
Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may
result in performance loss.

HWE09080

- 185 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[6] The following symptoms are normal.

Symptoms

Remote controller
display

The indoor unit does not start
after starting cooling (heating)
operation.

"Cooling (heating)"
icon blinks on the
display.

The fan speed does not reach
the set speed when operation
switch is turned on.
When the main power is
turned on, the display shown
on the right appears on the indoor unit remote controller for
5 minutes.
The drain pump keeps running after the unit has
stopped.

Normal display

Unlit

When the auxiliary heater is turned on, the fan operates for one minute
after stopping to dissipate heat.

STAND BY

The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or
until the pipe temperature reaches 35°C[95°F], then it operates at low
speed for 2 minutes, and finally it operates at the set speed.
(Pre-heating stand-by)

"HO" or "PLEASE
WAIT" icons blink
on the display.

Unlit

The drain pump is running
while the unit is stopped.
Normal display

Sound of the refrigerant flow is
heard from the indoor unit immediately after starting operation.

Normal display

HWE09080

The system is starting up. Wait until the blinking display of "HO" or
"PLEASE WAIT" go off.

The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the
cooling mode is stopped.
When drain water is detected, the drain pump goes into operation even
while the unit is stopped.

Indoor unit and BC controller
make noise during cooling/
heating changeover.

Warm air sometimes comes
out of the indoor units that are
not in the heating mode.

The unit cannot perform a heating (cooling) operation when other indoor
units are performing a cooling (heating) operation.
After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical position, the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position.
Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while
the unit is in the defrost mode, pre-heating stand-by mode, or when the
thermostat triggers unit off.

The auto vane adjusts its position by itself.

The fan keeps running after
the unit has stopped.

Cause

This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal.

Normal display

This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is normal.

This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept
slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not operating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the compressor. It is part of a normal operation.

- 186 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data)
1. Single unit
(1) Cooling operation
Heat source unit model
Item
DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80°F/67°F]

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

29.4[85]

m3/h

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8 ]

5 [16-3/8 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

25 [82]

25 [82]

-

Hi

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

11.8 [27]

13.0 [29]

Current

A

17.7

23.3

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

66

90

325/325

387/387

80

100

1400

1400

2.20/0.81 [319/117]

2.27/0.81 [329/117]

[G/h]
[gpm]

No. of connected units
Indoor
unit

Unit
No. of units in operation
Model

-

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

Heat source water flow rate

Operating
conditions

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

34 [93]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

47 [117]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

6 [43]

6 [43]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

Heat exchanger outlet

- 187 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Heat source unit model
Item
PQHY-P120YHMU-A
Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

m3/h
[G/h]
[gpm]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Heat source water flow rate
No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3
-

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

35 [115]
Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

13.6 [30]

Current

A

23.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

114

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

325/325/387
Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

Sectional
temperatures

Heat
source
unit

100
1400

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

10 [32-3/4 ]

-

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

36/36/48

MPa
[psi]

2.30/0.81 [334/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

Accumulator inlet

8 [46]

Accumulator outlet

8 [46]
°C [°F]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 188 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
Heat source unit model
Item
DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

21.1[70]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8 ]

5 [16-3/8 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

25 [82]

25 [82]

-

Hi

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

11.8 [27]

13.0 [29]

Current

A

18.6

25.2

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

60

72

332/332

406/406

0

0

1400

1400

2.64/0.80 [383/116]

2.90/0.80 [421/116]

Heat source water flow rate

/h
[G/h]
[gpm]

No. of connected units
Indoor
unit

Unit
No. of units in operation
Model

-

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

Heat
source
unit

73 [163]

80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

37 [99]

38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

70 [158]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

m3

Operating
conditions

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

- 189 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Heat source unit model
Item
PQHY-P120YHMU-A
Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Heat source water flow rate

m /h
[G/h]
[gpm]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3
-

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

35 [115]
Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

13.6 [30]

Current

A

28.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

332/332/406
Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

MPa
[psi]

HWE09080

2.68/0.80 [389/116]
81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

Accumulator outlet

4 [39]
°C [°F]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

0
1400

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

10 [32-3/4 ]

-

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

36/36/48

4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

LEV inlet

39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 190 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2. 2-unit combination
(1) Cooling operation
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P144YSHMU-A
PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/36/36

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

20.3 [45]

Current

A

42.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

66

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

66
325/325/325/325

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

80

80

1400

1400

2.20/0.81 [319/117]

2.20/0.81 [319/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

33 [91]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

47 [117]

47 [117]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 191 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P168YSHMU-A
PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.1 [51]

Current

A

42.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

78

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

78
325/325/387/387

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

90

90

1400

1400

2.23/0.81 [323/117]

2.23/0.81 [323/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

33 [91]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

47 [117]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 192 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P192YSHMU-A
PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

24.6 [54]

Current

A

51.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

90
387/387/387/387

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

100

100

1400

1400

2.27/0.81 [329/117]

2.27/0.81 [329/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

34 [93]

34 [93]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 193 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P216YSHMU-A
PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

5
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

5
-

36/36/48/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

52.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

98

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

98
325/325/387/387/387

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

159

159

1400

1400

2.28/0.81 [331/117]

2.28/0.81 [331/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

35 [95]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 194 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P240YSHMU-A
PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C[80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

36/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

32.7

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

105

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

105
325/325/325/325/387/387

Pulse

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P120YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

159

159

1400

1400

2.30/0.81 [334/117]

2.30/0.81 [334/117]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

35 [95]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 195 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P144YSHMU-A
PQHY-P72YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/36/36

Main pipe
pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

20.3 [45]

Current

A

25.5

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

60

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

Heat
source
unit

0

1400

1400

2.64/0.80 [383/116]

2.64/0.80 [383/116]
77 [171]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

0

77 [171]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

60
332/332/332/332

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 196 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P168YSHMU-A
PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/48/48

Main pipe
pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.1 [51]

Current

A

44.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

66

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

Sectional
temperatures

1400

1400

2.80/0.80 [406/116]

2.80/0.80 [406/116]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

0

77 [171]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

0

77 [171]

Discharge (TH4)

Heat
source
unit

66
332/332/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P72YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 197 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P192YSHMU-A
PQHY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

48/48/48/48

Main pipe
pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

24.6 [55]

Current

A

51.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

72

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

Sectional
temperatures

1400

1400

2.90/0.80 [421/116]

2.90/0.80 [421/116]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

0

80 [176]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

0

80 [176]

Discharge (TH4)

Heat
source
unit

72
406/406/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 198 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P216YSHMU-A
PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

5
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

5
-

36/36/48/48/48

Main pipe
pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

55.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

81

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

Sectional
temperatures

1400

1400

2.75/0.80 [399/116]

2.75/0.80 [399/116]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

0

81 [178]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

0

81 [178]

Discharge (TH4)

Heat
source
unit

81
332/332/406/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P96YHMU-A

LEV inlet

35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 199 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQHY-P240YSHMU-A
PQHY-P120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/-[70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

3/h

Heat source water flow rate

m
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

36/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

33.5

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

Sectional
temperatures

1400

1400

2.68/0.80 [389/116]

2.68/0.80 [389/116]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [°F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

0

81 [178]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

0

81 [178]

Discharge (TH4)

Heat
source
unit

90
332/332/332/332/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

PQHY-P120YHMU-A

LEV inlet

35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 200 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3. 3-unit combination
(1) Cooling operation
3-unit combination
PQHY-P264YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP96YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

48/48/48/48/36/36
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.5 [52]

Current

A

62.6

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

82

82

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

141

138

1400

1400

1400

2.25/0.81

2.25/0.81

2.25/0.81

[326/117]

[326/117]

[326/117]

65 [149]

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

34

[93]

34

[93]

34

[93]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

19

[67]

19

[67]

19

[67]

47

[117]

47

[117]

47

[117]

19

[65]

6

[42]

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

130

Discharge (TH4)

Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

Indoor
unit

82

387/387/387/387/325/325

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP72YHMU-A

LEV inlet
Heat exchanger outlet

- 201 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P288YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP96YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

48/48/48/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25.5 [57]

Current

A

69.9

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

90

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

141

185

1400

1400

1400

2.27/0.81

2.27/0.81

2.27/0.81

[329/117]

[329/117]

[329/117]

65 [149]

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

34

[93]

34

[93]

34

[93]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

19

[67]

19

[67]

19

[67]

40

[104]

40

[104]

40

[104]

19

[65]

6

[42]

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

141

Discharge (TH4)

Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

Indoor
unit

90

387/387/387/387/387/387

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

LEV inlet
Heat exchanger outlet

- 202 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P312YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

54/54/54/54/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25.5 [57]

Current

A

77.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

95

95

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

141

185

1400

1400

1400

2.28/0.81

2.28/0.81

2.28/0.81

[331/117]

[331/117]

[331/117]

65 [149]

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

34

[93]

34

[93]

34

[93]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

19

[67]

19

[67]

19

[67]

40

[104]

40

[104]

40

[104]

19

[65]

6

[42]

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

141

Discharge (TH4)

Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

Indoor
unit

95

395/395/395/387/387/387

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

LEV inlet
Heat exchanger outlet

- 203 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P336YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

7
7
-

48/48/48/48/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.5 [59]

Current

A

84.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

100

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

141

141

185

1400

1400

1400

2.29/0.81

2.29/0.81

2.29/0.81

[332/117]

[332/117]

[332/117]

65 [149]

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35

[95]

35

[95]

35

[95]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

19

[67]

19

[67]

19

[67]

40

[104]

40

[104]

40

[104]

19

[65]

6

[42]

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

100

Discharge (TH4)

Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

Indoor
unit

100
387/387/387/387/387/387/387

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

LEV inlet
Heat exchanger outlet

- 204 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P360YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

29.4 [85]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

7
7
-

54/54/54/54/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [ 32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

75 [246-1/16]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.8 [60]

Current

A

89.0

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

105

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

MPa
[psi]

100

100

100

1400

1400

1400

2.30/0.81

2.30/0.81

2.30/0.81

[334/117]

[334/117]

[334/117]

65 [149]

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35

[95]

35

[95]

35

[95]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

8

[46]

19

[67]

19

[67]

19

[67]

42

[105]

42

[105]

42

[105]

19

[65]

6

[42]

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

105

Discharge (TH4)

Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

Indoor
unit

105
395/395/395/395/387/387/387

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP120YHMU-A

LEV inlet
Heat exchanger outlet

- 205 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
3-unit combination
PQHY-P264YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP96YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

48/48/48/48/36/36
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.5 [52]

Current

A

66.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

70

70

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

0

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)
Heat exchanger outlet
Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom
Indoor
unit

HWE09080

70

406/406/406/406/332/332

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP72YHMU-A

1400

1400

1400

2.81/0.80

2.81/0.80

2.81/0.80

[408/116]

[408/116]

[408/116]

77 [171]

77 [171]

77 [171]

5 [41]

5 [41]

5 [41]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40

40

[104]

LEV inlet

38

[100]

Heat exchanger inlet

70

[158]

- 206 -

[104]

40

[104]

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P288YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP96YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

48/48/48/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25.5 [57]

Current

A

71.0

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

72

72

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

0

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)
Heat exchanger outlet
Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom
Indoor
unit

HWE09080

72

406/406/406/406/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

1400

1400

1400

2.90/0.80

2.90/0.80

2.90/0.80

[421/116]

[421/116]

[421/116]

80 [176]

80 [176]

80 [176]

5 [41]

5 [41]

5 [41]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40

40

[104]

LEV inlet

39

[102]

Heat exchanger inlet

70

[158]

- 207 -

[104]

40

[104]

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P312YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

6
6
-

54/54/54/54/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25.5 [57]

Current

A

71.7

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

78

78

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

0

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)
Heat exchanger outlet
Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom
Indoor
unit

HWE09080

78

414/414/414/414/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

1400

1400

1400

2.82/0.80

2.82/0.80

2.82/0.80

[409/116]

[409/116]

[409/116]

80 [176]

80 [176]

80 [176]

5 [41]

5 [41]

5 [41]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40

40

[104]

LEV inlet

38

[100]

Heat exchanger inlet

70

[158]

- 208 -

[104]

40

[104]

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P336YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

7
7
-

48/48/48/48/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

65 [213-1/4]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.5 [59]

Current

A

79.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

83

83

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

0

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)
Heat exchanger outlet
Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom
Indoor
unit

HWE09080

83

406/406/406/406/406/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP96YHMU-A

1400

1400

1400

2.72/0.80

2.72/0.80

2.72/0.80

[395/116]

[395/116]

[395/116]

81 [178]

81 [178]

81 [178]

5 [41]

5 [41]

5 [41]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40

40

[104]

LEV inlet

39

[102]

Heat exchanger inlet

70

[158]

- 209 -

[104]

40

[104]

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3-unit combination
PQHY-P360YSHMU-A

Item
PQHYP120YHMU-A

PQHYP120YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70°F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [°F]

21.1 [70]

Heat source water flow rate

m3/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

No. of units in operation
Model

Branch pipe

7
7
-

54/54/54/54/48/48/48
5 [16-3/8]

m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Heat source
unit

75 [246-1/16]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.8 [60]

Current

A

84.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

90

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

SC (LEV1)

High pressure (after O/S)/
Low pressure (before accumulator)

Pulse

0

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)
Heat exchanger outlet
Accumulator inlet
Heat
source Accumulator outlet
unit
Sectional
Compressor inlet
temperatures

°C [°F]

Compressor shell bottom
Indoor
unit

HWE09080

90

414/414/414/414/406/406/406

LEV2
Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit

Main pipe
Pipe
length

PQHYP120YHMU-A

1400

1400

1400

2.68/0.80

2.68/0.80

2.68/0.80

[389/116]

[389/116]

[389/116]

81 [178]

81 [178]

81 [178]

5 [41]

5 [41]

5 [41]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40

40

[104]

LEV inlet

39

[102]

Heat exchanger inlet

70

[158]

- 210 -

[104]

40

[104]

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
4. Single unit
(1) Cooling only operation
Heat source unit model
Item
Model name of BC controller

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

29.4[85]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8]

5 [16-3/8]

10 [32-3/4]

10 [32-3/4]

25 [82]

25 [82]



Hi

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

11.8 [27]

13.0 [29]

Current

A

17.7

23.3

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

66

90

325/325

387/387

2000//160

2000//170

2.20/0.81
[319/117]

2.27/0.81
[329/117]

2.10/2.10
[305/305]

2.17/2.17
[315/315]

Indoor
unit

m
[G/h]
[gpm]
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model



Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Refrigerant charge

Indoor unit
LEV opening

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

CMB-P104NU-G

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80 °F/67 °F]

No. of connected units

Pressure
switch

CMB-P104NU-G
DB/WB

Heat source water flow rate

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

3/h

Operating
conditions

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

34 [93]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

47 [117]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

6 [43]

6 [43]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

Heat exchanger outlet

- 211 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Heat source unit model
Item
PQRY-P120YHMU-A
Model name of BC controller

CMB-P104NU-G

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C
[80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4[85]

m3/h
[G/h]
[gpm]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Heat source water flow rate
No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3


Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

35 [115]
Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

13.6 [30]

Current

A

23.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

105

Indoor unit
LEV opening

325/325/387
Pulse

BC controller (1/2/3)
Pressure
switch

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

10 [32-3/4]



Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

36/36/48

2000//180
MPa
[psi]

2.30/0.81
[334/117]
2.20/2.20
[319/319]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

Accumulator inlet

8 [46]

Accumulator outlet

8 [46]
°C [ °F]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 212 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating only operation
Heat source unit model
Item
Model name of BC controller

21.1°C/
[70 °F/]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

21.1[70]

m3/h

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8]

5 [16-3/8]

10 [32-3/4]

10 [32-3/4]

25 [82]

25 [82]



Hi

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

11.8 [27]

13.0 [29]

Current

A

18.6

25.2

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

60

72

332/332

406/406

110//520

110//590

2.64/0.80
[383/116]

2.90/0.80
[421/116]

2.61/2.29
[378/332]

2.87/2.55
[416/370]

[G/h]
[gpm]

Indoor
unit

Unit
No. of units in operation
Model



Main pipe
Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Refrigerant charge

Indoor unit
LEV opening

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)
High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

Heat
source
unit

73 [163]

80 [176]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

37 [99]

38 [100]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

70 [158]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

CMB-P104NU-G

21.1°C/
[70 °F/]

Pipe
length

Pressure
switch

CMB-P104NU-G
DB/WB

No. of connected units

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Indoor temperature

Heat source water flow rate

Operating
conditions

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

- 213 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Heat source unit model
Item
PQRY-P120YHMU-A
Model name of BC controller

CMB-P104NU-G

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/
[70 °F/]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1[70]

m3/h
[G/h]
[gpm]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Heat source water flow rate
No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3


Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

35 [115]
Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

13.6 [30]

Current

A

28.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

332/332/406
Pulse

BC controller (1/2/3)
Pressure
switch

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110//660
MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

Heat
source
unit

2.68/0.80
[389/116]
2.64/2.32
[383/336]
81 [178]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

Accumulator outlet

4 [39]
°C [ °F]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

10 [32-3/4]



Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

36/36/48

4 [39]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

LEV inlet

39 [102]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 214 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
5. 2-unit combination
(1) Cooling only operation
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P144YSHMU-A
PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4 [85]

m3/h
Heat source water flow rate

G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


36/36/36/36

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

20.3 [45]

Current

A

42.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

66

Indoor unit
LEV opening

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

66
325/325/387/387

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

2000/2000/210
MPa
[psi]

2.20/0.81
[319/117]

2.20/0.81
[319/117]
2.10/2.10
[305/305]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

33 [91]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

47 [117]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 215 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P168YSHMU-A
PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4 [85]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.1 [51]

Current

A

42.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

78

Indoor unit
LEV opening

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

78
325/325/387/387

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

2000/2000/210
MPa
[psi]

2.23/0.81
[323/117]

2.23/0.81
[323/117]
2.13/2.13
[309/309]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

33 [91]

33 [91]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

47 [117]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 216 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P192YSHMU-A
PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4 [85]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [148]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

24.6 [55]

Current

A

51.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

90

Indoor unit
LEV opening

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

90
387/387/387/387

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

2000/2000/220
MPa
[psi]

2.27/0.81
[329/117]

2.27/0.81
[329/117]
2.17/2.17
[315/315]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

34 [93]

34 [93]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 217 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P216YSHMU-A
PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4 [85]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

5
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

5


36/36/48/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

52.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

98

98
325/325/387/387/387

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

2000/2000/230
MPa
[psi]

2.28/0.81
[331/117]

2.28/0.81
[331/117]
2.18/2.18
[316/316]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

35 [95]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 218 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P240YSHMU-A
PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

29.4 [85]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6


36/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

32.7

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

105

105
325/325/325/325/387/387

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

Sectional
temperatures

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

Heat
source
unit

Indoor
unit

HWE09080

PQRY-P120YHMU-A

2000/2000/240
MPa
[psi]

2.30/0.81
[334/117]

2.30/0.81
[334/117]
2.20/2.20
[319/319]

Discharge (TH4)

65 [149]

65 [149]

Heat exchanger outlet

35 [95]

35 [95]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

8 [46]

Compressor inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Compressor shell bottom

42 [108]

42 [108]

Accumulator inlet
Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger outlet

6 [43]

- 219 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating only operation
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P144YSHMU-A
PQRY-P72YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1 [70]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


36/36/36/36

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [147]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

20.3 [45]

Current

A

25.5

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

60

Indoor unit
LEV opening

332/332/332/332

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110/110/870
MPa
[psi]

Heat
source
unit

2.61/2.29
[378/332]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

2.64/0.80
[383/116]

77 [171]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

2.64/0.80
[383/116]

77 [171]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

60

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 220 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P168YSHMU-A
PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1 [70]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [147]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

23.1 [51]

Current

A

44.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

66

Indoor unit
LEV opening

332/332/406/406

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110/110/870
MPa
[psi]

Heat
source
unit

2.77/2.45
[402/355]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

2.80/0.80
[406/116]

77 [171]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

2.80/0.80
[406/116]

77 [171]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

66

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P72YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 221 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P192YSHMU-A
PQRY-P96YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1 [70]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

IIndoor
unit

4

No. of units in operation

4


48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

45 [147]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

24.6 [55]

Current

A

51.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

72

Indoor unit
LEV opening

406/406/406/406

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110/110/980
MPa
[psi]

Heat
source
unit

2.87/2.55
[416/370]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

2.90/0.80
[421/116]

80 [176]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

2.90/0.80
[421/116]

80 [176]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

72

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

Unit
Model

Pipe
length

Heat source
unit

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

LEV inlet

37 [99]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 222 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P216YSHMU-A
PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1 [70]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

5
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

5


36/36/48/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

55.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

81

81
332/332/406/406/406

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110/110/1050
MPa
[psi]

Heat
source
unit

2.72/2.40
[395/348]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

2.75/0.80
[399/116]

81 [178]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

2.75/0.80
[399/116]

81 [178]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

PQRY-P96YHMU-A

LEV inlet

35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 223 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2-unit combination
Item

PQRY-P240YSHMU-A
PQRY-P120YHMU-A

Model name of BC controller

CMB-P108NU-GA

Indoor temperature

DB/WB

21.1°C/- [70 °F/-]

Heat source water temperature

°C [ °F]

21.1 [70]

m3
Heat source water flow rate

/h
G/h
gpm

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

5.76
[1522]
[25.4]

No. of connected units
Operating
conditions

Indoor
unit

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6


36/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Pipe
length

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

65 [213]


Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

26.2 [58]

Current

A

33.5

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Refrigerant charge

Heat source
unit

Indoor unit
LEV opening

90

90
332/332/332/332/406/406

Pulse
BC controller (1/2/3)

Pressure
switch

High pressure (63HS1)/
Low pressure (63LS)
BC controller on the liquid side
(PS1)/Intermediate part (PS3)

110/110/1120
MPa
[psi]

Heat
source
unit

2.64/2.32
[383/336]

Heat exchanger outlet

5 [41]

5 [41]

Accumulator inlet

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

4 [39]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator outlet
°C [ °F]
Compressor shell bottom

HWE09080

2.68/0.80
[389/116]

81 [178]

Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

2.68/0.80
[389/116]

81 [178]

Discharge (TH4)

Sectional
temperatures

PQRY-P120YHMU-A

LEV inlet

35 [95]

Heat exchanger inlet

70 [158]

- 224 -

GB

IX Troubleshooting
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

HWE09080

Error Code Lists ............................................................................................................. 227
Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller................................................. 230
Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise......................................................... 303
Troubleshooting Principal Parts ..................................................................................... 306
Refrigerant Leak ............................................................................................................ 343
Compressor Replacement Instructions.......................................................................... 347
Servicing the BC controller ............................................................................................ 353
Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display ................................... 356

- 225 -

GB

- 226 -

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
IX Troubleshooting

[1] Error Code Lists

4300

01

Serial communication error

O

1102

1202

-

Discharge temperature fault

O

1301

-

-

Low pressure fault

O

1302

1402

-

High pressure fault

O

1500

1600

-

Refrigerant overcharge

O

-

1605

-

Preliminary suction pressure fault

O

2000

2100

-

Pump interlock error

O

2134

2234

-

Abnormal water temperature

O

2135

2235

-

Water heat exchanger freeze up

O

2500

-

-

Drain sensor submergence

O

2502

-

-

Drain pump fault

O

2503

-

-

Drain sensor (Thd) fault

O

2600

-

-

Water leakage

O

2601

-

-

Water supply cutoff

O

4102

4152

-

Open phase

O

4106

-

-

Transmission power supply fault

O

4115

-

-

Power supply signal sync error

O

4116

-

-

RPM error/Motor error

4220

O

[108]

Abnormal bus voltage drop

O

[109]

Abnormal bus voltage rise

O

[111]

Logic error

O

[131]

Low bus voltage at startup

O

4330

-

Heatsink overheat protection

O

4240

4340

-

Overload protection

O

[101]

IPM error

O

[102]

ACCT overcurrent (H/W detection)

O

[103]

DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection)

O

[104]

Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault

O

[105]

Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor

O

[106]

Instantaneous overcurrent

O

[107]

Overcurrent

O

Heatsink overheat protection at startup

O

4260

5101

HWE09080

Notes

O
O

O

4320

4230

4250

LOSSNAY

0403

Error code definition

BC controller

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

Indoor unit

Preliminary
error
code

Heat source unit

Error
Code

Remote controller

Searched unit

4350

-

1202

-

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Return air temperature
(TH21)
OA processing unit inlet
temperature (TH4)

- 227 -

O
O

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Indoor unit pipe temperature (TH22)
5102

1217

-

Temperature sensor
fault

O
O

Indoor unit gas-side pipe
temperature (TH23)
5103

1205

00

Temperature sensor
fault

O

OA processing unit gasside pipe temperature
(TH3)
Pipe temperature at heat
exchanger outlet (TH3)

O

O

OA processing unit intake
air temperature (TH1)

5104

1202

-

Temperature sensor
fault

O

Outside temperature
(TH24)
Heat source unit discharge
temperature (TH4)

O

1204

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Accumulator inlet temperature (TH5)

O

5106

1216

-

Temperature sensor
fault

HIC circuit outlet temperature (TH6)

O

5107

1221

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Water inlet pipe (TH7)

O

5108

1218

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Water outlet pipe (TH8)

O

5112

1215

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Component cooler heat exchanger outlet (THINV)

O

5110

1214

01

Temperature sensor
fault

Heatsink temperature
(THHS)

O

5111

-

-

5112

-

-

5115

-

-

5116

-

-

5201

-

-

High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)

O

5201

1402

-

High-pressure sensor fault
(Heat source unit HPS/BC controller PS1)

O

5203

-

-

Intermediate pressure sensor fault
(BC controller PS3)

HWE09080

Detectable
only by the AllFresh type indoor units

O

5105

Temperature sensor
fault
(BC controller)

Liquid inlet temperature
(TH11)

O

Bypass outlet temperature
(TH12)

O

LEV3 outlet temperature
(TH15)

O

LEV3 inlet temperature
(TH16)

O

- 228 -

Notes

O

OA processing unit pipe
temperature (TH2)
HIC bypass circuit outlet
temperature (TH2)

Remote controller

Error code definition

LOSSNAY

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

BC controller

Preliminary
error
code

Indoor unit

Error
Code

Heat source unit

Searched unit

O
O

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

5301

[115]

ACCT sensor fault

O

[117]

ACCT sensor circuit fault

O

[119]

Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector

O

[120]

Faulty ACCT wiring

O

Remote controller

Error code definition

LOSSNAY

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

BC controller

Preliminary
error
code

Indoor unit

Error
Code

Heat source unit

Searched unit

4300

5701

-

-

Loose float switch connector

6201

-

-

Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory
error)

O

6202

-

-

Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)

O

6600

-

-

Address overlaps

O

O

6601

-

-

Polarity setting error

O

6602

-

-

Transmission processor hardware error

6603

-

-

6606

-

6607

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Transmission line bus busy error

O

O

O

O

O

-

Communication error between device and transmission processors

O

O

O

O

O

-

-

No ACK error

O

O

O

O

O

6608

-

-

No response error

O

O

O

O

O

6831

-

-

MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)

O

O

6832

-

-

MA remote controller signal transmission error
(Synchronization error)

O

O

6833

-

-

MA remote controller signal transmission error (H/
W error)

O

O

6834

-

-

MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)

O

O

7100

-

-

Total capacity error

O

7101

-

-

Capacity code setting error

O

7102

-

-

Wrong number of connected units

O

7105

-

-

Address setting error

O

7106

-

-

Attribute setting error

7107

-

-

Port setting error

7110

-

-

Connection information signal transmission/reception error

7111

-

-

Remote controller sensor fault

7113

-

-

Function setting error

O

7117

-

-

Model setting error

O

7130

-

-

Incompatible unit combination

O

HWE09080

Notes

O

O
O

O
O

- 229 -

O
O

O

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller
1. Error Code

0403
Serial communication error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor.
Detail code 01: Between the control board and the INV board
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Faulty wiring
Check the following wiring connections.
1) Between Control board and Fan board
Control board FAN board
CN2
CN21
CN4
CN4
CN332

CN18V

2) Between Control board and INV board

Control board

INV board

CN2
CN2
CN4
CN4
(2) INV board failure and Control board failure
Replace the INV board or the Fan board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is reset.
Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 230 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1102
Discharge temperature fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If the discharge temperature of 120 °C [248°F] or more is detected during the above operation (the first detection), the heat
source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.
2) If the discharge temperature of 120° C [248°F] or more is detected again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the
second stop of the heat source unit described above, the mode will be changed to 3 - minute restart mode, then the heat
source unit will restart in 3 minutes.
3) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected (the third detection) within 30 minutes after the stop of the
heat source unit described above (regardless of the first or the second stop), the heat source unit will make an error stop, and
the error code "1102" will be displayed.
4) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the heat
source unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.
5) For 30 minutes after the stop (the first stop or the second stop) of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on
the LED display.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Gas leak, gas shortage

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
evaluation.(page 177)

(2)

Overload operation

Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor/
heat source units.

(3)

LEV failure on the indoor unit

(4)

BC controller LEV malfunction
Cooling only : LEV3
Cooling main : LEV1,2,3
Heating only or heating
main : LEV3

(5)

BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction
-> Cooling only or defrost

(6)

BC controller SVA malfunction
-> Cooling only or cooling main

Perform a heating operation and check the operation.
Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit
BC controller LEV1,2,3
Heat source unit LEV2a,2b
BC controller SVM1,2
BC controller SVA,C
Heating: LEV on the indoor unit
Heat source unit LEV2a,2b
BC controller LEV3
BC controller SVB
BC controller SV4a - 4d
Refer to the page on troubleshooting LEV.(page 310)

(7)

BC controller SVB malfunction
-> Heating only or heating main

(8)

Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d,7a,7b
:heating only, heating main

(9)

Heat source unit LEV1 actuation failure
Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation
failure

(10)

Port address setting error.

Confirm the port address of the indoor unit.

(11)

Closed ball valve

Confirm that the ball valve is fully open.

(12)

Insufficient heat source water flow, heat
source water supply cutoff, dirty or clogged
water heat exchangerHeating

Check the water heat exchanger for clogging.
Check the heat source water circulation pump.

(13)

Gas leak between low and high pressures
(4-way valve failure, Compressor failure, Solenoid valve (SV1a) failure)

Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the operation.

(14)

Thermistor failure
(TH4)

Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260)

(15)

Input circuit failure on the controller board
thermistor

Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor.

HWE09080

- 231 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1301
Low pressure fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0.098MPa [14psi] immediately before
start-up, the operation immediately stops.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inner pressure drop due to a leakage.

(2)

Low pressure sensor failure

(3)

Short-circuited pressure sensor cable due to
torn outer rubber

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing.

(5)

Disconnected wire

(6)

Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the
controller board

HWE09080

Check method and remedy
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the low pressure
sensor.(page 307)

- 232 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1302
High pressure fault 1 (Heat source unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation (the first detection), the heat
source stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.
2) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the first stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and
restarts after 3 minutes automatically.
3) If the pressure of 3.87MPa [561psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor (the third detection) within 30 minutes of the
second stop of the heat source unit, the heat source unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1302" will be displayed.
4) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.
5) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
6) The heat source unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects
4.15+0,-0.15 MPa [601+0,-22 psi]
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Indoor unit LEV actuation failure  Heating

(2)

BC controller LEV malfunction Heating only or heating main :
Indoor LEV 3

(3)

BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction
->Cooling only
BC controller SVA and SVC malfunction
->Cooling only or cooling main
BC controller SVB malfunction ->Heating only or heating main
Solenoid valve SV malfunction 4a-4d ->Cooling only or cooling
main

(4)
(5)

Perform a heating operation and check the operation.
Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit
Heat source unit LEV1,2,3
BC controller LEV2a,2b
BC controller SVM1,1b,2,2b
BC controller SVA
Heating: LEV on the indoor unit
BC controller LEV3
BC controller SVM2,2b
BC controller SVB,SV4a - 4d
Refer to the page on troubleshooting for LEV
and solenoid valve.(page 310)

(6)

Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failureCooling

(7)

Port address setting error.

Confirm the port address of the indoor unit.

(8)

Refrigerant service valve actuation failure

Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully

(9)

Short cycle on the indoor unit side

(10)

Clogged filter on the indoor unit

Check the indoor units for problems and correct
them, if any.

(11)

Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor unit fan

(12)

Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit

(13)

Insufficient heat source water flow

(14)

Heat source water supply cutoff

(15)

Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger
Items (13) through (15) above reduce the condensing capability of the unit, resulting in high-pressure rise during heating operation.

(16)

Solenoid valve (SV1a) malfunction
The by-pass valve (SV1a) can not control rise in high pressure.

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the solenoid valve.(page 308)

(17)

Thermistor failure (TH3, TH7)

Check the thermistor resistor.(page 260)

(18)

Pressure sensor failure

(19)

Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input
circuit on the controller board
Thermistor mounting problem (TH3, TH7)

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the
high pressure sensor. (page 306)
Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the
LED monitor.
Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the
LED monitor.

(20)

Check the water heat exchanger for clogging.
Check the heat source water circulation pump.

(21)

Disconnected male connector on the pressure switch (63H1) or
disconnected wire

(22)

Voltage drop caused by unstable power supply voltage

HWE09080

- 233 -

Check the input voltage at the power supply terminal TB1.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1302
High pressure fault 2 (Heat source unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the pressure of 0.098MPa [14psi] or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start-up, it will trigger an
abnormal stop, and error code "1302" will be displayed.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inner pressure drop due to a leakage.

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high
pressure sensor.(page 306)

(2)

Pressure sensor failure

(3)

Shorted-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn
outer rubber

(4)

A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor
is missing or contact failure

(5)

Disconnected pressure sensor cable

(6)

Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the
controller board

1. Error Code

1500
Refrigerant overcharge
2. Error definition and error detection method
An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat.
1) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied during operation (first detection), the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3minute restart mode, and starts up in three minutes.
2) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied again within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second
detection), the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and the error code "1500" appears.
3) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied 30 minutes or more after the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the same
sequence as Item "1 above (first detection) is followed.
4) For 30 minutes after the stop of the heat source unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Overcharged refrigerant

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
evaluation.(page 177)

(2)

Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board

Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sensor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(3)

Faulty mounting of thermistor (TH4)

Check the temperature and pressure readings on the
thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(4)

Heat source unit LEV2a and LEV2b actuation failureHeating

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV.
(page 310)

HWE09080

- 234 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2000
Pump interlock error
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) This error is detected by the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4).
2) If it is detected that the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) is open (first detection) during operation or immediately before startup,
the heat source unit stops and goes into the 10-minute restart delay mode.
3) If the pump interlock circuit (TB8 3-4) has remained open for continuous 10 minutes (second detection) since the first stoppage
of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2000" appears on the LED.
4) For the 10 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED.
5) This error is indicated on the LED only when Dip switch SW2-8 on the control board of the heat source unit is set to OFF.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Heat source water circulation pump fault

Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2)

Broken wire

Check the field wiring for proper installation and conduction.

(3)

Loose connectors or contact failure

Check the connectors for proper connection.

(4)

Interlock signal input circuit fault on the relay board

(5)

Interlock signal input circuit fault on the control
board

HWE09080

- 235 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2134
Abnormal water temperature
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected (first detection) during operation, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes.
2) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected again (second detection)
within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2134"
appears on the LED.
3) If a water inlet pipe temperature (TH7) of 5°C[41ºF] or below OR 50°C[122ºF] or above is detected after 30 minutes of the first
stoppage of the heat source unit, this is considered as the first detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above
is followed.
4) The period of 30 minutes after a stoppage of the heat source unit is considered a preliminary error, and a preliminary error
code appears on the LED display.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Heat source water circulation pump fault

Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2)

Cooling tower or heater problem

Check the cooling tower and heater, and correct any problems found.

(3)

Thermistor fault (TH7)

Check thermistor resistance.

(4)

Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control
board

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

(5)

Improper installation of thermistor (TH7)

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

HWE09080

- 236 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2135
Water heat exchanger freeze up
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If either of the following conditions is detected (first detection) during operation, the heat source unit stops, goes into the 3minute restart delay mode, and automatically restarts after three minutes.
Water outlet pipe temperature (TH8) of 4°C[39ºF] or below is detected.
All of the following conditions are continuously met for one minute during Heating-all or Heating-main operation: Compressor frequency < Minimum frequency + 20 AND Evaporation temperature (Te) < -2ºC[28°F] AND Accumulator inlet pipe temperature (TH5)  3°C[37ºF].
2) If the conditions above (1) are met again within 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit (second detection),
the unit will make an abnormal stop, and the error code "2135" will appear on the LED.
3) If the conditions above (1) are met again after 60 minutes of the first stoppage of the heat source unit, it is considered the first
detection, and the sequence as described in section 1) above is followed.
4) For the 60 minutes from the time the heat source stopped is considered a preliminary error, and it is indicated on the LED.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Heat source water circulation pump fault

Operate the pump, and check for proper operation.

(2)

Heater problem

Check the heater, and correct any problems found.

(3)

Poorly maintained field-installed water pipes

Identify and remove the cause of water flow reduction, such
as a clogged strainer or cavitation.

(4)

Dirty or clogged water heat exchanger

Check the pressure difference between the unit's inlet and
outlet.

(5)

Thermistor fault (TH5, TH8)

Check thermistor resistance.

(6)

Thermistor signal input circuit fault on the control
board

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

(7)

Improper installation of thermistor (TH5, TH8)

Check the sensor reading on the LED.

HWE09080

- 237 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2500
Drain sensor submergence (Models with a drain sensor)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If an immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and
when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being
detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.(Applicable to the units manufactured in or after October 1996)
2) If the immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval, this is considered water leakage, and "2500" appears on the monitor.
3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.
4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:
One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.
The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.
Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature -10°C[ -18°F]
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping
Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2)

Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor
Trickling of water along the lead wire
Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1)

Check for proper lead wire installation.

2)

Check for clogged filter.

(3)

Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve

Replace the relay.

(4)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain sensor circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit
control board.

HWE09080

- 238 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2500
Drain sensor submergence (Models with a float switch)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If an immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and
when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being
detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.
2) If the drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above-mentioned condition is
detected two consecutive times, water leakage error water leakage is detected, and "2500" appears on the monitor.
3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.
4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:
One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.
The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.
Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C[-18°F]
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping
Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2)

Stuck float switch
Check for slime in the moving parts of the float
switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(3)

Float switch failure

Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and
turned off.


Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor
(except during the Cooing/Dry mode)
6 minutes

Drain pump
output

6 minutes

ON
OFF
ON

Float switch
OFF
input

15
seconds

15
seconds

15
seconds

Submergence of
Sensor in the air
the sensor
Preliminary water leakage
Within 1-hour period

HWE09080

- 239 -

Submergence of
the sensor

15
seconds

Sensor in the air

15
seconds

Submergence of
the sensor
Water leakage

Within 1-hour period

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2502
Drain pump fault (Models with a drain sensor)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) Make the drain sensor thermistor self-heat. If the temperature rise is small, it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in
water. This condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.
2) If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain pump error, and
"2502" appears on the monitor.
3) This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation.
4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met.
"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10 °C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.
The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times.
The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage
of the heat source unit.
5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant
circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. "2502" appears on the monitor of the units that
came to an error stop.
6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit
Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit
Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same
refrigerant circuit.
Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.
(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)
that caused the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain pump failure

Check for proper functioning of the drain pump.

(2)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3)

Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor
Trickling of water along the lead wire
Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1)

Check for proper lead wire installation.

2)

Check for clogged filter.

(4)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain pump drive circuit failure
Drain heater output circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit
control board.

(5)

Items (1) through (4) above and an indoor unit electronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks.

HWE09080

- 240 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2502
Drain pump fault (Models with a float switch)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON/OFF signal from the float switch.
Submergence of the sensor
When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in
water.
Sensor in the air
When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed
in water.
2) If it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected, this is considered a drain pump failure, and "2502" appears on the monitor.
The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds, including the time it takes for the first immersion of the sensor tip to be detected.
3) Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped.
4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit (system stoppage) are met.
"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature - 10°C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.
It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more.
The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage
of the heat source unit.
5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the heat source unit in the same refrigerant
circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the heat source unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop.
6) Forced stoppage of the heat source unit
Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of heat source unit
Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the heat source unit that is connected to the same
refrigerant circuit.
Forced stoppage of the heat source unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.
(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)
that caused the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain pump failure

Check for proper functioning of the drain pump
mechanism

(2)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3)

Stuck float switch
Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(4)

Float switch failure

Check the resistance with the float switch turned
on and turned off.

(5)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain pump drive circuit failure
Float switch input circuit failure

Replace indoor unit control board.

(6)

Items (1) through (5) above and an indoor unit electronic
valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for
leaks.

HWE09080

- 241 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2503
Drain sensor (Thd) fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds, this condition is considered to be a preliminary
error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.
If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain sensor error.(If
the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected, normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes.)
This error is detected when one of the following conditions are met.
During Cool/Dry operation
Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than - 10°C[ -18°F] (except during the defrost cycle)
When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited.
Drain pump is in operation.
One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off.
Short: 90 °C [194 °F] or above
Open: - 20 °C [-4 °F] or below
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Faulty connector (CN31) insertion.

1)

Check for connector connection failure.
Reinsert the connector, restart the operation, and check for
proper operation.

(2)

Broken or semi-broken thermistor wire

2)

Check for a broken thermistor wire.

(3)

Thermistor failure

3)

Check the resistance of the thermistor.
0°C[32 °F]:6.0k
10°C[50 °F]:3.9k
20°C[68°F]:2.6k
30°C[86°F]:1.8k
40°C[104 °F]:1.3k

(4)

Indoor unit control board (error detection circuit)
failure

4)

Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs
when the unit is operated with the No.-1 and No.-2 pins on
the drain sensor connector (CN31) being short-circuited.
If the above item checks out OK, there are no problems with
the drain sensor.
Turn off the power and turn it back on.

HWE09080

- 242 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2600
Water leakage
2. Cause, check method and remedy
Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier.

1. Error Code

2601
Water supply cutoff
2. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

The water tank of the humidifier is empty.

Check the amount of supply water.
Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection.

(2)

The solenoid valve for humidification is OFF.

Check the connector.

(3)

Disconnected float switch

Check the connecting part.

(4)

Poor operation of float switch

Check for the float switch.

(5)

Frozen water tank

Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost, and
turn it on again.

HWE09080

- 243 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4102

(THMU-A)

Open phase
2. Error definition and error detection method
An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.
The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.
The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy
Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(1)

Power supply problem
Open phase voltage of the power supply
Power supply voltage drop

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Wiring failure

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is
188 V or above.
If the voltage is below 188V, check the wiring connection between
the noise filter board CN02 and control board CNAC.
Confirm that the wiring between TB23 and INV board SC-T is put
through CT3.

(4)

Blown fuse

Check that F01 on the control board is not blown.
->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault
of the actuator.

(5)

CT3 failure

Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation.

(6)

Control board failure

Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the
problem.

HWE09080

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is 188 V or
above.

- 244 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4102

(YHMU-A)

Open phase
2. Error definition and error detection method
An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.
The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.
The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy
Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(1)

Power supply problem
Open phase voltage of the power supply
Power supply voltage drop

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Wiring failure

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is
190 V or above.
If the voltage is below 190, check the wiring between noise filter
CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC.
Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board
SC-L3 is put through CT3.

(4)

Blown fuse

Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse.
->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault
of the actuator.

(5)

CT3 failure

Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation.

(6)

Control board failure

Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the
problem.

HWE09080

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter
board is 414V or above.

- 245 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4106

2. Error definition and error detection method
Transmission power output failure
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Cause
Wiring failure
Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected.
Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem.
Transmission voltage detection circuit failure

4. Check method and remedy
Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the
same refrigerant circuit.


2.

Error definition and error detection method
Transmission power reception failure

3.

Cause
One of the heat source units stopped supplying power, but no other heat source units start supplying power.

4.

Check method and remedy
Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit on all heat source units in the
same refrigerant circuit.

HWE09080

- 246 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4115

(THMU-A)

Power supply signal sync error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power supply error

Check the voltage of the power supply terminal
block (TB1).

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Faulty wiring

Check fuse F01 on the control board.

(4)

Wiring failure
Between noise filter board CN02 and control board
CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 188 V or above.

(5)

Control board failure

If none of the items described above is applicable,
and if the trouble reappears even after the power is
switched on again, replace the control board.

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is
188 V or above.

1. Error Code

4115

(YHMU-A)

Power supply signal sync error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power supply error

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Faulty wiring

Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a
blown fuse.

(4)

Wiring failure
Between noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control
board CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 190 V or above.

(5)

Control board failure

If none of the items described above is applicable,
and if the trouble reappears even after the power is
switched on again, replace the control board.

HWE09080

Check the voltage of the power supply terminal
block (TB1).
Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on
the noise filter board is 414V or above.

- 247 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4116
RPM error/Motor error
2. Error definition and error detection method
LOSSNAY
The motor keep running even if the power is OFF.
The thermal overload relay is ON. (Only for the three-phase model)
Indoor unit
If detected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm, the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes.If detected
again, the display will appear.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Board failure

Replace the board.

(2)

Motor malfunction

Check for the motor and the solenoid switch.

(3)

Solenoid switch malfunction

HWE09080

- 248 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220

(THMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 160V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Power supply environment
Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.
Check whether the power voltage is 188V or less across all phases.
(2) Voltage drop detected
4220
Check the voltage between the tab terminal TB-P and TB-N on the INV board while the inverter is stopped. -> Check the following items if it is 253V or above.
1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V.
Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V.
2) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to (3).
3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.
4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections
Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Between the INV board and C1.
Replace 72C if no problems are found.-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V.
1) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.
2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.
3) Check the connection to SC-P1 and SC-P2 on the INV board.
4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found.
(3) Control board failure
Check that 200 VAC is applied to connector CN505 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or
the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse.
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

HWE09080

- 249 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220

(YHMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Power supply environment
Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.
Check whether the power voltage (Between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, and L1 and L3) is 414V or less across all phases.
(2) Voltage drop detected
4220
Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or
above, check the following items.
1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 289V.
Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V.
2) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. ->Go to (3).
3) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout.
4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections
Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL.
Replace 72C if no problems are found.
5) Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board (Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module).
Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than
420 V, check the following items.
1) Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter.
2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.
3) Check the connection to SC-L1 and SC-L2 on the INV board.
4) Check the in-rush current resistor value.
5) Check the 72C resistance value.
6) Check the DCL resistance value.
Replace the INV board if no problems are found.
(3) Control board failure
Check that 12VDC is applied to connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or
the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse.
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

HWE09080

- 250 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220

(THMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 400V is detected during inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Different voltage connection
Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).
(2) INV board failure
If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.
In the case of 4220: INV board
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

4220

(YHMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 830V is detected during inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Different voltage connection
Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).
(2) INV board failure
If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.
In the case of 4220: INV board
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

4220

(THMU-A)

Logic error (Detail code 111)
2. Error definition and error detection method
H/W error
If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
In the case of 4220
Cause
(1)

External noise

(2)

INV board failure

Check method and remedy

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

HWE09080

- 251 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220

(YHMU-A)

Logic error (Detail code 111)
2. Error definition and error detection method
H/W error
If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
In the case of 4220
Cause
(1)

External noise

(2)

INV board failure

Check method and remedy

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].(page 335)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

4220
Low bus voltage at startup (Detail code 131)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When Vdc 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Inverter main circuit failure
Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error
Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 252 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4230

(THMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH is detected.
Model

TOH

P72, P96, P120 models

100°C [212°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Air passage blockage

(2)

THHS failure

Check method and remedy
Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked
1)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT.
->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

4230

(YHMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Air passage blockage

(2)

THHS failure

Check method and remedy
Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked
1)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2)

Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor.
->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

HWE09080

- 253 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4240

(THMU-A)

Overload protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > TOL" is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter
operation.
Model

Imax(Arms)

P72, P96, P120 models

35

Model

TOL

P72, P96, P120 models

95°C [203°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2)

Power supply environment

Power supply voltage is 188 V or above.

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 328)

(4)

Compressor failure

Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.
-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

4240

(YHMU-A)

Overload protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > 95°C [203°F] " is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during
inverter operation.
Model

Imax(Arms)

P72, P96, P120 models

19

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2)

Power supply environment

Power supply voltage is 414 V or above.

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 333)

(4)

Compressor failure

Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.
-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 335)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

HWE09080

- 254 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250

(THMU-A)

IPM error (Detail code 101)
2. Error definition and error detection method
IPM error signal is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

4250

(YHMU-A)

IPM error (Detail code 101)
2. Error definition and error detection method
IPM error signal is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335)
Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no
problems are found.
(Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

HWE09080

- 255 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250

(THMU-A)

Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)
Overcurrent (Detail code 107)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Overcurrent 123 Apeak or 42 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 330)
Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no
problems are found.
(Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

4250

(YHMU-A)

Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)
Overcurrent (Detail code 107)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Overcurrent 94 Apeak or 22 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].(page 335)
Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board if no
problems are found.
(Refer to "Troubleshooting" for IGBT module related problems)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

HWE09080

- 256 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250
Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault (Detail code 104)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When IPM/IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Grounding fault compressor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2)

Inverter output related

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1]-[4].

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 257 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250
Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor (Detail code 105)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Short - circuited compressor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2)

Output wiring

Check for a short circuit.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

1. Error Code

4260

(THMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection at startup
2. Error definition and error detection method
The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
Model

TOH

P72, P96, P120 models

100°C [212°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Same as 4230 error

1. Error Code

4260

(YHMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection at startup
2. Error definition and error detection method
The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Same as 4230 error

HWE09080

- 258 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5101
Return air temperature sensor (TH21) fault (Indoor unit)
Return air temperature sensor (TH4) fault (OA processing unit)

5102
Pipe temperature sensor (TH22) fault (Indoor unit)
Pipe temperature sensor (TH2) fault (OA processing unit)

5103
Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH23) fault (Indoor unit)
Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH3) fault (OA processing unit)

5104
Intake air temperature sensor (TH1) fault (OA processing unit)
Intake air temperature sensor (TH24) fault (All-fresh (100% outdoor air) type indoor unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON, the heat source unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes. When
the error is not restored after 3 minutes (if restored, the heat source unit runs normally), the heat source unit makes an error
stop.
Short: detectable at 90°C [194°F] or higher
Open: detectable at -40°C [-40°F] or lower
Sensor error at gas-side cannot be detected under the following conditions.
During heating operation
During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Thermistor failure

(2)

Connector contact failure

(3)

Disconnected wire or partial disconnected
thermistor wire

(4)

Unattached thermistor or contact failure

(5)

Indoor board (detection circuit) failure

HWE09080

Check method and remedy
Check the thermistor resistor.
0°C [32°F]: 15 kohm
10°C [50°F]: 9.7 kohm
20°C [68°F] : 6.4 kohm
30°C [86°F] : 4.3 kohm
40°C [104°F] : 3.1 kohm
Check the connector contact.
When no fault is found, the indoor board is a failure.

- 259 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5102
HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH2) fault (Heat source unit)

5103
Heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor (TH3) fault (Heat source unit)

5104
Discharge temperature sensor (TH4) fault (Heat source unit)

5105
Accumulator inlet temperature sensor (TH5) fault (Heat source unit)

5106
HIC circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH6) fault (Heat source unit)

5107
Outside temperature sensor (TH7) fault (Heat source unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short (high temperature intake) or an open (low temperature intake) of the thermistor is detected (the first detection),
the heat source unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts when the detected temperature of the thermistor.
When a short or an open is detected again (the second detection) after the first restart of the heat source unit, the heat source
unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the normal range.
When a short or an open is detected again (the third detection) after the previous restart of the heat source unit, the heat
source unit makes an error stop.
When a short or an open of the thermistor is detected just before the restart of the heat source unit, the heat source unit makes
an error stop, and the error code "5102", "5103", 5104", "5105", "5106"or "5107" will appear.
During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
A short or an open described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost mode, or for 3
minutes after defrost mode.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Thermistor failure

Check thermistor resistance.

(2)

Pinched lead wire

Check for pinched lead wire.

(3)

Torn wire coating

Check for wire coating.

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing or
contact failure

Check connector.

(5)

Disconnected wire

Check for wire.

(6)

Thermistor input circuit failure on the control
board

Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED
monitor.
When the temperature is far different from the actual temperature, replace the control board.



TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7

HWE09080

Short detection
70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )
110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )
240 C [464 F ] and above (0.57 k )
70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )
70 C [158 F ] and above (1.14 k )
110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

-40
-40
0
-40
-40
-40

C [ -40
C [ -40
C [ 32
C [ -40
C [ -40
C [ -40

- 260 -

Open detection
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (698 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k

)
)
)
)
)
)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5110
Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

INV board failure

Check method and remedy
If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace
the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter " under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 261 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5201
High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less during the operation, the heat source unit stops once, turns to
anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0.098MPa [14psi] or
more.
If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less just before the restart, the heat source unit makes an error stop,
and the error code "5201" will appear.
During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
A error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

High pressure sensor failure

(2)

Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak

(3)

Torn wire coating

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure

(5)

Disconnected wire

(6)

High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board

HWE09080

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of
the high pressure sensor.
(IX [4] -1- (page 306))

- 262 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the formula "output current < 2 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
P72 and P96 models
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter open output phase

Check the output wiring connections.

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 330)

(3)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 330)

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 328)

1. Error Code

5301

(YHMU-A)

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the formula "output current < 1.5 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter open output phase

Check the output wiring connections.

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(3)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 333)

1. Error Code

5301
ACCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code 117)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

Refer to section -6-"Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 263 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301
Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

1. Error Code

5301
Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup. (Detection of
improperly mounted ACCT sensor)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(4)

INV board failure

Replace the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE09080

- 264 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5701
Loose float switch connector
2. Error definition and error detection method
Detection of the disconnected float switch (open-phase condition) during operation
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) CN4F disconnection or contact failure
Check for disconnection of the connector (CN4F) on the indoor unit control board.

1. Error Code

6201
Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built-in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Remote controller failure
Replace the remote controller.

1. Error Code

6202
Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error is detected when the built-in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Remote controller failure
Replace the remote controller.

HWE09080

- 265 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6600
Address overlaps
2. Error definition and error detection method
An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

Two or more of the following have the same address:
Heat source units, indoor units, LOSSNAY units, controllers such as M-NET remote controllers.

6600 "01" appears on the remote controller
Unit #01 detected the error.
Two or more units in the system have 01 as their address.

Find the unit that has the same address as that of the
error source.
Once the unit is found, correct the address. Then,
turn off the heat source units, indoor units, and
LOSSNAY units, keep them all turned off for at least
five minutes, and turn them back on.

1. Error Code

6601
Polarity setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M-NET transmission line.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

No voltage is applied to the M-NET transmission
line.

(2)

M-NET transmission line is short-circuited.

HWE09080

Check method and remedy
Check if power is supplied to the M-NET transmission
line and correct any problem found.

- 266 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6602
Transmission processor hardware error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Although "0" was surely transmitted by the transmission processor, "1" is displayed on the transmission line.
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause
1) When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or heat source transmission line is performed or is changed while
the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, the wave shape will be changed, and an error will be detected.
2) Grounding fault of the transmission line
3) When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different heat source units, the male power supply connectors on the
multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).
4) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS, the male power supply
connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit.
5) Controller failure of the source of the error
6) When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line
7) Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control (in case of grouped indoor units connected to different
heat source units or in case of the system connected with MELANS)
4. Check method and remedy
YES

Is the transmission line work
performed while the power is on?

Turn off the power source of heat sourceindoor units, and turn them on again.

NO
Check the power source of the indoor unit.
NO

198 / 264V?

Faulty power source work

YES
Check the transmission line work is performed
and the shielded wire is treated properly.
Grounding fault or does the shielded
wire contact with the transmission line?

YES

Improper transmission line work

NO
System ?

Single-heat source-unit
system

Multiple-heat source-unit
system

System with the power supply
unit for transmission lines

Confirm that the power supply
connector on the heat source
unit is not plugged into CN40.

Confirm that the power supply
connector on the heat source
unit is not plugged into CN40.

Is the male power supply connector
connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) on only one
of the heat source unit?

YES

NO
Tightly reconnect the male power
supply connector to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40).

Investigation into the
transmission line noise

Noise exist?

NO

Is the male power supply connector
connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) ?
YES
Disconnect the male
power supply on
CN40 and connect it to CN41

*For the investigation method, follow

YES

Investigation into the
cause of the noise

NO
Controller failure of the
source of the error

Correct the error.

HWE09080

- 267 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6603
Transmission line bus busy error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4-10 minutes in a row due to bus-busy
Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4-10 minutes in a row due to noise
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

The transmission processor cannot be transmitted as the short-wavelength voltage like noise exists consecutively on the transmission line.

(2)

Error source controller failure

No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure. If noise exists, investigate the noise.
-> No noise indicates that the error source controller is a
failure.
-> If noise exists, investigate the noise.

1. Error Code

6606
Communication error between device and transmission processors
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental
erroneous operation of the controller of the error
source.

(2)

Error source controller failure

HWE09080

- 268 -

Turn off the power source of the heat source and the indoor units.(When the power source is turned off separately, the microcomputer will not be reset, and the error will
not be corrected.)
-> If the same error occurs, the error source controller is
a failure.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(1) System with one heat source unit
Error
source
address

Error display

Detection
method

Heat
ME resource
mote conunit (OC) troller
(RC)
MA remote controller
(MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
IC transmission to
OC

BC controller
(BC)

Indoor
unit (IC)

LOSSNAY
(LC)

ME remote
controller (RC)

HWE09080

ME remote controller
(RC)
MA remote controller
(MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
IC transmission to
BC

ME remote controller
(RC)
MA remote controller
(MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
RC transmission to
IC

ME remote controller
(RC)
MA remote controller
(MA)

ME remote controller
(RC)
MA remote controller
(MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
IC transmission to
LC

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
IC transmission to
RC

Cause
(1)

Contact failure of transmission line of OC or IC

(2)

Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring.
Farthest:200 m [656ft] or less
Remote controller wiring:
10m [32ft] or less

(3)

Erroneous sizing of transmission line (Not within the
range below). Wire diameter:
1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more

(4)

Heat source unit control board failure

(1)

When BC controller address is changed or modified
during operation.

(2)

Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of BC
controller

(3)

Disconnected connector of BC controller (CN02)

(4)

Faulty control board of BC controller

(1)

When IC unit address is changed or modified during
operation.

(2)

Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring

(3)

Disconnected IC connector
(CN2M)

(4)

Indoor unit controller failure

(5)

ME remote controller failure

(1)

The power source of LOSSNAY has been shut off.

(2)

When the address of LOSSNAY is changed in the
middle of the operation

(3)

Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of
LOSSNAY

(4)

Disconnected connector (CN1) on LOSSNAY

(5)

Controller failure of LOSSNAY

(1)

Faulty transmission wiring at IC unit side.

(2)

Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote
controller

(3)

When the address of ME remote controller is
changed in the middle of the operation

(4)

ME remote controller failure

- 269 -

Check method and remedy
Turn off the power
source of the heat
source unit, and turn it
on again.
If the error is accidental,
it will run normally. If not,
check the causes (1) (4).

Turn off the heat sourceindoor units for 5 or
more minutes, and turn
them on again.
If the error is accidental,
they will run normally. If
not, check the causes
(1) - (4).
Turn off the heat sourceindoor units for 5 or
more minutes, and turn
them on again.
If the error is accidental,
they will run normally.
If not, check the causes
(1) - (5).

Turn off the power
source of LOSSNAY
and turn it on again.
If the error is accidental,
it will run normally.
If not, check the causes
(1) - (5).

Turn off the power
source of the heat
source unit for 5 minutes
or more, and turn it on
again.
If the error is accidental,
it will run normally.
If not, check the causes
(1) - (4).

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units
Error
source
address

Error display

Detection
method

Cause

Check method and remedy

Heat
source
unit
(OC)

ME remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
OC

Same cause as that for system
with one heat source unit

Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit

BC controller
(BC)

ME remote
controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller
(MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
BC

Same cause as that for system
with one heat source unit

Same remedy as that for system with one heat source unit

Indoor
unit
(IC)

ME remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at RC
transmission to
IC

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (5) for system with one heat source unit

1)

Turn off the power sources of
the heat source and indoor
units for 5 or more minutes,
and turn them on again. If the
error is accidental, the will run
normally.If not, check the
cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit of
the transmission line for the heat
source unit on the terminal block
for centralized control line connection (TB7)

2)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple heat source units
are connected and the power
source of one of the heat source
units has been shut off.

3)

Check the LED displays for
troubleshooting on other remote controllers whether an
error occurs.

(4)

The male power supply connector
of the heat source unit is not connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source
units are connected to the female
power supply switch connector
(CN40) for centralized control.

If an error is found,
-> If an error is found, check
the check code definition, and
correct the error.
If no error is found,
-> Indoor unit board failure

If an error occurs, after the unit
runs normally once, the following
causes may be considered.
Total capacity error (7100)
Capacity code error (7101)
Error in the number of connected units (7102)
Address setting error (7105)

HWE09080

- 270 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units
Error
source
address
LOSSNAY
(LC)

Error display
ME remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

Detection
method
No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
LC

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Factors (1) through (5) in the 1)
"Factors in system with one
heat source unit" (When performing an interlocked operation of the LOSSNAY unit
and the indoor units that are
connected to different heat
source units.)

Turn off the power source of
heat source unit for 5 or more
minutes, and turn it on again. If
the error is accidental, it will
run normally.If not, check the
cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit
of the transmission line for
the heat source unit on the
terminal block for centralized
control line connection (TB7)

2)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple heat source
units are connected and the
power source of one of the
heat source units has been
shut off.

3)

Same cause as that for indoor
unit described in 3)

(4)

The male power supply connector of the heat source unit
is not connected to the female power supply switch
connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat
source units are connected to
the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) for
centralized control.
If an error occurs, after the
unit runs normally once, the
following causes may be considered.
Total capacity error
(7100)
Capacity code error
(7101)
Error in the number of
connected units (7102)
Address setting error
(7105)

HWE09080

- 271 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units
Error
source
address

Error display

ME remote controller
(RC)

ME remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

Detection
method
No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
RC

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (4) for
system with one heat source
unit

1)

Turn off the power source of
heat source unit for 5 or more
minutes, and turn it on again. If
the error is accidental, it will
run normally.If not, check the
cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit
of the transmission line for
the heat source unit on the
terminal block for centralized
control line connection (TB7)

2)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple heat source
units are connected and the
power source of one of the
heat source units has been
shut off.

3)

Same cause as that for indoor
unit described in 3)

(4)

The male power supply connector of the heat source unit
is not connected to the female power supply switch
connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat
source units are connected to
the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) for
centralized control.
If the problem recurs after
normal operation is restored,
the problem is caused by one
of the following factors:
Total capacity error
(7100)
Capacity code setting
error (7101)
Error in the number of
connected units (7102)
Address setting error
(7105)

HWE09080

- 272 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address

Error display

Detection
method

Cause

Check method and remedy

Heat
source
unit
(OC)

ME remote
controller (RC)
System controller (SC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to OC

Same cause as that for system with one
heat source unit

Same remedy as that for
system with one heat
source unit

BC controller
(BC)

ME remote
controller (RC)
system controller (SC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to BC

Same cause as that for system with one
heat source unit

Same remedy as that for
system with one heat
source unit

HWE09080

- 273 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address
Indoor
unit
(IC)

Error display
ME remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

Detection
method

Cause

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at RC
transmission to IC

System control- No acknowl- 1.
ler (SC)
edgement
(ACK) at SC (1)
transmission to IC
2.

HWE09080

Check method and remedy

Same as grouping of units in a system
with multiple heat source units

Same remedy as that for
grouping of units in a system with multiple heat
source units

Error occurrence on some IC

Same remedy as that for
system with one heat
source unit

Same cause as that for system with one
heat source unit
Error occurrence on all IC in the system
with one heat source unit

1) Check the LED display
for troubleshooting on the
heat source unit.
If an error is found,
check the check code
definition, and correct
the error.
If no error is found,
check 2).

(1)

Total capacity error (7100)

(2)

Capacity code error (7101)

(3)

Error in the number of connected units
(7102)

(4)

Address setting error (7105)

(5)

Disconnection or short circuit of the trans- 2) Check (5) - (7) on the left.
mission line for the heat source unit on
the terminal block for centralized control
line connection (TB7)

(6)

Turn off the power source of the heat
source unit

(7)

Malfunction of electrical system for the
heat source unit

3.

Error occurrence on all IC

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (7) described in 2.

(2)

The male power supply connectors on 2
or more heat source units are connected
to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for
centralized control.

(3)

Disconnection or shutdown of the power
source of the power supply unit for transmission line

(4)

System controller (MELANS) malfunction

- 274 -

Check voltage of the
transmission line for centralized control.
20V or more: Check (1)
and (2) on the left.
Less than 20V: Check
(3) on the left.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address
ME remote controller
(RC)

Error display

Detection
method

ME remote
controller (RC)
System controller (SC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
RC

System controller
(SC)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
MELANS
transmission to
RC

Cause

1.

Check method and remedy

Same as grouping of units in a system with multiple heat source units

Same remedy as that for
grouping of units in a system
with multiple heat source
units

Error occurrence on some IC

Same remedy as that for
system with one heat source
unit

(1) Same cause as that for system
with one heat source unit
2.

Error occurrence on all IC in the
system with one heat source unit

1)

(1) An error is found by the heat
source unit.
Total capacity error (7100)
Capacity code error (7101)
Error in the number of connected
units (7102)
Address setting error (7105)
(2) Disconnection or short circuit of the 2)
transmission line for the heat
source unit on the terminal block
for centralized control line connection (TB7)

Check the LED display for
troubleshooting on the heat
source unit.
 If an error is found, check
the check code definition,
and correct the error.
If no error is found, check
the cause 2).

Check (2) - (4) on the left.

(3) Turn off the power source of the
heat source unit
(4) Malfunction of electrical system for
the heat source unit
3.

Error occurrence on all IC

Check (1) - (4) on the left.

(1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described
in 2.
(2) When the power supply unit for
transmission lines is used and the
male power supply connector is
connected to the female power
supply switch connector (CN40) for
the transmission line for centralized control
(3) Disconnection or shutdown of the
power source of the power supply
unit for transmission line
(4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction

HWE09080

- 275 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address
System
controller
(SC)

HWE09080

Error display
ME remote
controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller
(MA)

Detection
method
No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
SC

Cause
1.

Error display on some displays on
ME remote controllers

(1)

Faulty wiring of the transmission
line for ME remote controller

(2)

Disconnection or contact failure of
the transmission connector for ME
remote controller

(3)

ME remote controller failure

2.

Error occurrence on all IC in the
system with one heat source unit

(1)

An error is found by the heat source
unit.
Total capacity error (7100)
Capacity code error (7101)
Error in the number of connected
units (7102)
Address setting error (7105)

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit of the
transmission line for the heat
source unit on the terminal block for
centralized control line connection
(TB7)

(3)

Turn off the power source of the
heat source unit

(4)

Malfunction of electrical system for
the heat source unit

3.

Error display on all displays on ME
remote controllers

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (4) described
in 2.

(2)

When the power supply unit for
transmission lines is used and the
male power supply connector is
connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the
transmission line for centralized
control

(3)

Disconnection or shutdown of the
power source of the power supply
unit for transmission line

(4)

System controller (MELANS) malfunction
- 276 -

Check method and remedy
Check (1) - (3) on the left.

1) Check the LED display for
troubleshooting on the heat
source unit.
 If an error is found, check
the check code definition,
and correct the error.
If no error is found, check
the cause 2)

2) Check (2) - (4) on the left.

Check (1) - (4) on the left

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(4) Errors that are not limited to a particular system
Error
source address
Address
which
should not
be existed

Error display

Detection
method

-

-

Cause
(1)

Although the address of ME
remote controller has been
changed after the group is set
using ME remote controller,
the indoor unit is keeping the
memory of the previous address. The same symptom will
appear for the registration with
SC.

(2)

Although the address of
LOSSNAY has been changed
after the interlock registration
of LOSSNAY is made using
ME remote controller, the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous address.

Check method and remedy
Delete unnecessary information of non-existing address
which some indoor units have.
Use either of the following two
methods for deletion.

1)

Address deletion by ME remote
controller
Delete unnecessary address information using the manual setting function of ME remote
controller. Refer to this service
handbook "IV [2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via
the ME Remote Controller 1. (3)
Address deletion."(page 98)

2)

Deletion of connection information of the heat source unit by
the deleting switch
Note that this switch deletes
all the group information set
via ME remote controller and
all the interlock information
of LOSSNAY and the indoor
unit.
Turn off the power source of
the heat source unit, and wait
for 5 minutes.
Turn on the dip switch (SW22) on the heat source unit
control board.
Turn on the power source of
the heat source unit, and wait
for 5 minutes.
Turn off the power source of
the heat source unit, and wait
for 5 minutes.
Turn off the dip switch (SW22) on the heat source unit
control board.
 Turn on the power source of
the heat source unit.

HWE09080

- 277 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6608
No response error
2. Error definition and error detection method
When no response command is returned although acknowledgement (ACK) is received after transmission, an error is detected.
When the data is transmitted 10 times in a row with 3 seconds interval, an error is detected on the transmission side.
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause
1) The transmission line work is performed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, and the wave shape will be
changed.
2) The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise.
3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring.
Farthest:200m [656ft] or less
Remote controller wiring:12m [39ft] or less
4) The transmission line voltage/signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line.
Wire diameter: 1.25mm2[AWG16] or more
4. Check method and remedy
1) When an error occurs during commissioning, turn off the power sources for the heat source unit, indoor unit, BC controller,
and LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and then turn them on again.
 When they return to normal operation, the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on.
If an error occurs again, check the cause 2).
2) Check 3) and 4) above.
If the cause is found, correct it.
 If no cause is found, check 3).
3) Check transmission wave shape/ noise on trans-mission line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise" (page 303).
Noise is the most possible cause of the error "6608".

HWE09080

- 278 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6831
MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
No proper data has been received for 3 minutes.
3.
1)
2)
3)

4)
5)
6)
7)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.
All the remote controllers are set to SUB.
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.
Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines
Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller
Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 303)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE09080

- 279 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6832
MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
Failure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals
Indoor unit : 3 minutes
Remote controller : 6 seconds
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit
2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN
Overlapped indoor unit address
Noise interference on the remote controller lines
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 303)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE09080

- 280 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6833
MA remote controller signal transmission error (Hardware error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
An error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row.
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit
2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN
Overlapped indoor unit address
Noise interference on the remote controller lines
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 303)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE09080

- 281 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6834
MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
No proper data has been received for 2 minutes.
3.
1)
2)
3)

4)
5)
6)
7)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.
All the remote controllers are set to SUB.
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.
Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines
Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller
Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NG]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 303)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE09080

- 282 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7100
Total capacity error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds limitations.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy,
Error source
Heat source
unit

Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

The model total of indoor units in the system with one heat source unit exceeds the
following table.

Capacity Total

Model
P72 model

93

P96 model

124

P120 model

156

P144 model

187

P168 model

218

P192 model

249

P216 model

280

P240 model

312

P264 model

343

P288 model

374

P312 model

405

P336 model

436

P360 model

468

1)

Check the model total (capacity code total) of
units connected.

2)

Check the model name (capacity code) of the
connected indoor unit set by the switch (SW2 on
indoor unit board).
When the model name set by the switch is different from that of the unit connected, turn off the
power source of the heat source and the indoor
units, and change the setting of the model name
(capacity code).



(2)

Model

Capacity Total

P72 model

108

P96 model

144

P120 model

180

P144 model

216

P168 model

252

P192 model

288

P216 model

324

P240 model

360

The model selection switches (SW5-1 - 54) on the heat source unit are set incorrectly.

Model
1

SW5
2
3

ON OFF OFF

96 model

ON OFF OFF

120 model OFF OFF ON

(3)

HWE09080

4

72 model OFF
ON

Check the setting for the model selection switch
on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 54 on the heat source unit control board).

OFF

The heat source unit and the auxiliary unit
(OS) that is connected to the same system
are not properly connected.

- 283 -

Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are
properly connected.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7101
Capacity code setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Connection of incompatible (wrong capacity code) indoor unit or heat source unit
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source

Cause

Heat source
unit
Indoor unit

(1)

Heat source
unit

(2)

Check method and remedy

The model name (capacity code) set by
the switch (SW2) is wrong.
*The capacity of the indoor unit can be
confirmed by the self-diagnosis function
(SW1 operation) of the heat source unit.
The model selection switches (SW5-1 5-4) on the heat source unit are set incorrectly.

Model
1

SW5
2
3

ON OFF OFF

96 model

ON OFF OFF

ON

HWE09080

Check the model name (capacity code) of the indoor unit which has the error source address set by
the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board).
When the model name set by the switch is different
from that of the unit connected, turn off the power
source of the heat source and the indoor units, and
change the setting of the capacity code.
Check the setting for the model selection switch on
the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-4 on
the heat source unit control board).

4

72 model OFF

120 model OFF OFF ON

1)

OFF

- 284 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7102
Wrong number of connected units
2. Error definition and error detection method
The number of connected indoor units is "0" or exceeds the allowable value.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit

Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

Number of indoor units connected to the heat
source terminal block (TB3) for indoor-heat source
transmission lines exceeds limitations described
below.

Number of units
Total number of indoor units

Number of BC controllers
Number of
Main BC controllers
Number of Sub BC controllers
Total number of LOSSNAY
units (During auto address
start-up only)
Total number of heat source
units

Restriction on the number of units


1 - 15 : P72 model
1 - 20 : P96 model
1 - 26 : P120 model
1 - 31 : P144 model
1 - 36 : P168 model
1 - 41 : P192 model
2 - 46 : P216 model
2 - 50 : P240 - P360 models

1 - 18 : P72 model
1 - 24 : P96 model
1 - 30 : P120 model
1 - 36 : P144 model
1 - 42 : P168 model
1 - 48 : P192 model
2 - 50 : P216 - P240 models

1)

Check whether the number of units connected to the heat source terminal block
(TB3) for indoor-heat source transmission
lines does not exceed the limitation. (See
(1) and (2) on the left.)

2)

Check (2) - (3) on the left.

3)

Check whether the transmission line for
the terminal block for centralized control
(TB7) is not connected to the terminal
block for the indoor-heat source transmission line (TB3).

4)

Check the setting for the model selection
switch on the heat source unit (Dipswitches SW5-7 on the heat source unit control
board).

1
(P72 - P120 models only)
0 or 1
0,1 or 2
0 or 1
1 : P72 - P120 models
2 : P144 - P240 models
3 : P264 - P360 models(PQHY only)

(2)

Disconnected transmission line from the heat
source unit or BC controller

(3)

Short-circuited transmission line
When (2) and (3) apply, the following display will
appear.
M-NET remote controller
Nothing appears on the remote controller because it is not powered.
MA remote controller
"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" blinks.

HWE09080

(4)

The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the heat
source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON)

(5)

Heat source unit address setting error
The heat source units in the same refrigerant circuit do not have sequential address numbers.

(6)

A type-G BC controller is connected to a unit P144
model or above.

- 285 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7105
Address setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Erroneous setting of OC unit address
Erroneous setting of BC controller address
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit
BC controller

Cause

Check method and remedy

Erroneous setting of OC unit address
The address of heat source unit is not being set to
51 - 100.
The address of BC controller is not set to 51 - 100.

Check that the heat source unit and BC controller addresses are set to 00 or a number between 51 and 100.
If the heat source unit address is out of the valid range, reset the address with the power to
the heat source unit turned off.
If the BC controller address is out of the valid
range, reset the address with the power to both
the heat source unit and BC controller turned
off.

1. Error Code

7106
Attribute setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Error source
-

HWE09080

Cause

Check method and remedy

A remote controller for use with indoor
units, such as the MA remote controller, is
connected to the OA processing unit whose
attribute is FU.

- 286 -

To operate the OA processing unit directly via a remote controller for use with indoor units, such as the
MA remote controller, set the DIP SW 3-1 on the OA
processing unit to ON.
Operation Method

SW3-1

Interlocked operation
with the indoor unit

OFF

Direct operation via the
MA remote controller

ON

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7107
Port setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The port with wrong number is connected to the indoor unit.The model total connected to the port is greater than the specification.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Error source
BC controller

Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

Model total of indoor units per each port or per
each port merge is greater than the specification.

Total port number

Model total

Single branching

54

2 branches merge

96

(2)

4 or more indoor units are connected to the same
port.

(3)

When two ports are used, the port with the smaller
number is not connected to the indoor unit.

(4)

For the address of the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2),
50 is not added to the smallest indoor unit address,
which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1 or
2).

(5)

In the system to which multiple BC controllers are
connected, the indoor unit address connected to
the BC controller is not set as shown below.
(i) The indoor unit address which is connected to
the BC controller (main)
(ii) The indoor unit address which is connected to
the BC controller (Sub1)
(iii) he indoor unit address which is connected to
the BC controller (Sub2)
Address setting
(i)<(ii)<(iii)
*(ii) and (iii) can be reversed.

Is there a BC
controller (Sub)?

For the address of the BC
controller (Sub), is 50 added to
the smallest indoor unit address,
which is connected to the
BC controller (Sub)?

YES

NO

Are 4 or more indoor units
connected to the same port?

YES

Port No. setting error?

YES

NO

NO
YES

Is the address of the indoor
unit, which is connected to the the
BC controller (Main) ,smaller than
that of the indoor, which is
connected to the BC controller
(Sub 1 or 2)?

Adjust the piping
connection to the port.

Port No. setting error?

YES

YES

NO

HWE09080

NO

Change the indoor
unit address or
change the BC
controller address

YES
Change the port No.

NO
The wrong model
(capacity code) is set.

Change the port No.

Change the BC
controller
(Sub) address.

Change the port No.

NO
When two ports are used,
is the port with the smallest number
connected to the indoor unit?

NO

YES

NO
Is the model total of indoor
units connected to the same port
greater than the item (1)?

Before resetting the port number using
the port number setting switch or the
model using the model (capacity code)
setting switch, turn off the power of the
heat source unit, the BC controller and
the indoor unit.

Adjust the piping
connection to the port.

- 287 -

Change the set
indoor unit model
(capacity code).

Is the address of the indoor
unit, which is connected to the the
BC controller (Main), smaller than
that of the indoor, which is
connected to the BC controller
(Sub 1 or 2)?

NO

YES

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7110
Connection information signal transmission/reception error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the heat source unit in the same system.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power to the transmission booster is cut off.

1)

Confirm that the power to the transmission
booster is not cut off by the booster being
connected to the switch on the indoor unit.
(The unit will not function properly unless the
transmission booster is turned on.)

(2)

Power resetting of the transmission booster
and heat source unit.

(3)

Wiring failure between OC and OS

2)

Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are
properly connected.

(4)

Broken wire between OC and OS.

3)

(5)

The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the
heat source unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to
ON)

Check the model selection switch on the
heat source unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the
control board.).

->Reset the power to the heat source unit.

1. Error Code

7111
Remote controller sensor fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Indoor unit
OA processing unit

HWE09080

Cause

Check method and remedy

The remote controller without the temperature
sensor (the wireless remote controller or the
ME compact remote controller (mounted
type)) is used and the remote controller sensor for the indoor unit is specified. (SW1-1 is
ON.)

- 288 -

Replace the remote controller with the one
with built-in temperature sensor.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7113
Function setting error
2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Wiring failure

1)

Control board connector
Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connection.
Inverter board connector
Check the CNTYP connector connection.

(2)

Disconnected connector, short circuit, contact failure

2)

Check the compatibility of the circuit board, and replace
it with a correct one if necessary.

(3)

Incompatibility between the control
board and inverter board (Replacement of the circuit board with the
wrong one)

3)

Check the model selection switch on the heat source
unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control board.).

1. Error Code

7117
Model setting error
2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Wiring failure

1)

(2)

Disconnected connector, short circuit, contact
failure

Control board connector
Check the CNTYP2,4,5 connector connection.
Inverter board connection
Check the CNTYP connector connection

1. Error Code

7130
Incompatible unit combination
2. Error definition and error detection method
The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Heat source
unit

HWE09080

Cause

Check method and remedy

The connected indoor unit or BC controller is
exclusively for use with R22 or R407C. An incompatible indoor unit or BC controller is connected.
The M-NET connection adapter is connected
to the indoor unit system in a system in which
the Slim Model (A control) of units are connected to the M-NET.

- 289 -

Check the model names of the connected indoor unit and the BC controller.
Check whether the connecting adapter for
M-NET is not connected to the indoor unit.
(Connect the connecting adapter for M-NET
to the heat source unit.)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-1- Troubleshooting according to the remote controller malfunction or the external input error
In the case of MA remote controller
1. Phenomena
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.(Power indicator
does not appear on the screen.)
(1) Cause
1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.
The main power of the indoor unit is not on.
The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.
The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.
Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit.
2) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
Short-circuited MA remote controller wiring
Incorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables
Incorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit
Wiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and 220 - 240 VAC power supply cable
Reversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit
3) The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range (2 units).
4) The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification.
5) Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the heat source unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay.
6) The indoor unit board failure
7) MA remote controller failure
(2) Check method and remedy
1) Measure voltages of the MA remote controller terminal (among 1 to 3).
If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V, the remote controller is a failure.
If no voltage is applied, check the causes 1) and 3) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no cause is found, refer to 2).
2) Remove the wire for the remote controller from the terminal block (TB13) on the MA remote controller for the indoor unit, and
check voltage among 1 to 3.
If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V, check the causes 2) and 4) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no voltage is applied, check the cause 1) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no cause is found, check the wire for the remote display output (relay polarity).
If no further cause is found, replace the indoor unit board.

HWE09080

- 290 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In the case of MA remote controller
2. Phenomena
When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, the operation status briefly appears on the display, then it goes off,
and the display lights out immediately, and the unit stops.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit.
Short circuit of the transmission line.
Incorrect wiring of the M-NETtransmission line on the heat source unit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).
In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit.
4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit side.
5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or
disconnected connector.
(2) Check method and remedy
1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

Same symptom for all units in a
system with one heat source
unit?

NO
Measure voltages of the
terminal block for transmission
line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

YES
Check the
self-diagnosis LED

NO
Check 4.

Is the error code 7102
displayed?

YES

Check for
2 and 3.

17 - 30V?

YES
Check 5.

NO
Check 1).

YES
Correct
the error.

Error found?

NO
Indoor unit board or
MA remote controller failure

Correct the error.

Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart
above.

HWE09080

- 291 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In the case of MA remote controller
3. Phenomena
"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button
is pressed. ("HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on.)
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the heat source unit.
Short-circuited transmission line
Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
The male power supply connectors on the multiple heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).
In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the heat source unit
4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit.
5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or
disconnected connector.
6) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller
Short-circuited wire for the MA remote controller
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller (No.2) and disconnected line to the terminal block.
Reversed daisy-chain connection between groups
Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the terminal block for transmission line connection (TB5) on the indoor unit
The M-NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block (TB13) for the MA remote controller.
7) The sub/main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub.
8) 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected.
9) Indoor unit board failure (MA remote controller communication circuit)
10) Remote controller failure
11) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356)
(2) Check method and remedy
1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

Same symptom for all units in a
system with one heat source
unit?

NO
Measure voltages of the
terminal block for transmission
line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

YES
Check the self-diagnosis LED
Check 4.
Is the error code 7102
displayed?

YES

NO

Check
2 and 3.

YES
Check for 5 and 6.

NO
YES
Error found?

17 - 30V?

YES

Correct
the error.

Replace the ME remote
controller with the MA
remote controller

Error found?

NO
Indoor unit board or
MA remote controller failure

NO
Check (1).
Correct
the error.

Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit" for how to check item 1 in the flow chart
above.

HWE09080

- 292 -

GB

HWE09080

YES

YES

YES

- 293 -

MA remote controller
→To "1. Phenomenon"

NO

All the indoor unit
power failure?

NO

Is LED1 on the indoor
unit control board lit?

YES

NO

NO

Power on

YES

NO

Is "Centralized"
displayed?

NO

Error display?

NO

When the unit is operated with
the remote controller, will "ON"
appear on the display?

MA remote controller
→To "1. Phenomenon"
To "2. Phenomenon"

NO

Check the voltage between
the MA remote controller
terminals (A and B).
9-13VDC if the voltage is applied
and 0V if no voltage is applied.

NO

Blinking?
(Turns on momentarily
approximately every
20 seconds)

Replace the MA
remote controller.

NO

NO

Check the wire for
the remote controller.

Check the
power supply.

NO

Power supply voltage
AC198~264V?

YES

Use the wire that meets the specification.

YES

YES

YES

Keep the operation.

NO

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

YES

Replace the indoor
unit control board.

Check the equipment
package indoor unit.

YES

Normal
(Is the thermo OFF
signal input?)

Normal

Replace the remote controller or
the indoor control board.

YES

When no error occurs

YES

Check for the wire for
the remote controller.
Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

NO

No fault with the equipment
package indoor unit?

MA remote controller
→To "1. Phenomenon"
To "3. Phenomenon"

Check No. 1 refrigerant
circuit.
To "2. Phenomenon"

MA remote controller
→To "1. Phenomenon"

NO

Is only the power source of the
indoor unit turn turned on again?

NO

If operated afterwards,
error 6602 or
6607 occurs.

NO

Is operation possible?

YES

Check for the M-NET
transmission line.

NO

Although No.1 refrigerant circuit
is normal, No.2 or No.3
refrigerant circuit remain stopped.

Refer to the error code list.

YES

Normal
"Centralized" is displayed.

YES

Turns off within approximately 5 minutes.
After the main power on, start the MA remote
controller. "HO" display will appear.

Keep displaying
for 5 or more minutes.

"HO"/"PLEASE WAIT" keeps
blinking on the MA remote controller.

Refer to the self-diagnosis list for
the displayed error code.

Normal

Set the SWA to "1".

YES

YES

YES

YES

Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

Is the compulsory
thermo OFF (SWA)
switch set to "2" or "3"?

NO

External thermo
input setting?
(SW3-3=ON)

NO

DEMAND by MELANS?

NO

Error display?

NO

Thermo is OFF?

Check that no error occurs in other indoor units.

Short circuit of the
remote controller?

Connect 2 remote controllers or less.

YES

Replace the wire for the MA remote controller.

NO

Are the length or the diameter
of the wire for MA remote controller
out of specification?

NO

Disconnected wire for
the remote controller?
Disconnected wire to
the terminal block?
Disconnected relay connector?

NO

Check the voltage
between the MA remote controller
terminal blocks (TB15) (A and B).
9-13VDC if the voltage
is applied and 0V if no voltage
is applied.

YES

Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

Is LED1 on the indoor unit
control board lit?
(Blinks for 2 or 3 seconds
approximately every
20 seconds)

NO

YES

Replace the remote controller
or the indoor control board.

YES

Normal
(Operate the unit with
external control equipment)

Is the unit grouped
with the equipment package
indoor unit?

Replace the remote controller
or the indoor control board.

YES

YES

Keep the operation.

NO

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

NO

YES

Refer to the self-diagnosis list
for the displayed error code.

Is the operation by MELANS
forbidden or the input from external control
equipment allowed (SWC=ON)?

YES

YES

YES

Replace the indoor unit control
board where an error occurs.

Keep the operation.

NO

Does the number of the MA
remote controllers that are
connected to an indoor
unit exceed the allowable
range (2 units)?

YES

YES

YES

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

MA remote controller
Running group operation with
→To "1. Phenomenon"
the MA remote controller?
Restore the original MA remote
controller wiring connections after repairs.
NO

YES

Check the wiring

YES

Power on

Does the MA remote controller
work properly when it is connected
to the specified indoor unit?

Check the
power supply.

Check whether the screw
on the wire is not loose.

Does the indoor unit make
an instantaneous stop?

YES

Does the unit work properly
when the wire for the MA
remote controller is
daisy-chained again?

NO

Is there an indoor unit on
which LED2 is turned off?

NO

YES

YES

When all wires used for
grouping are disconnected, is at
least one of the LED2 on the
grouped indoor units lit?

NO

All the indoor unit
power failure?

NO

Is LED2 on the indoor unit
control board blinking?

Replace the indoor
unit control board.

YES

After more than 20 seconds since
turning the power on, is LED2 check
of the indoor control board still
displayed?

NO

YES

Check the indoor unit on
which LED2 is lit.

NO

Running group operation with
the MA remote controller?

NO

Is " " displayed on
the remote controller?

NO

Blinking?

After turning the power on, check whether "HO"/
"PLEASE WAIT" is displayed on the remote controller.

MA remote controller
→To "1. Phenomenon"
Check the refrigerant circuit.
To "2. Phenomenon"

YES

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Flow chart
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the indoor and the heat source units do not start running.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of ME remote controller
1. Phenomena
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.
(Power indicator does not appear on the screen.)
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the indoor unit.
Short circuit of the transmission line.
Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the heat source unit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
4) Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller.
5) Remote controller failure
6) Heat source unit failure (Refer to IX [8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display.)(page 356)
(2) Check method and remedy
1) Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the ME remote controller.
If voltage between is 17V and 30V -> ME remote controller failure
 When voltage is 17V or less -> Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Troubleshooting transmission power curcuit of heat source unit".
2) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED on the heat source unit.

HWE09080

- 294 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of ME remote controller
2. Phenomena
When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, a temporary operation display is indicated, and the display lights out
immediately.
(1) Cause
1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.
The main power of the indoor unit (AC208/230V) is not on.
The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.
The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.
Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit
The indoor unit board failure
2) The heat source control board failure
As the indoor unit does not interact with the heat source unit, the heat source unit model cannot be recognized.
(2) Check method and remedy
Check voltage of the power supply
terminal on the indoor unit.

Check LED1 on the
indoor unit control board.

NO

AC208/230V?

Is it lit?
When it is lit

Check the main power of
the power supply wire

YES

Turn on the
power again.

When it is off
Check the fuse on
or cannot be checked the circuit board.

YES

Melted?

Check 200V circuit for
short circuit and ground fault

NO
Check the connection
of the connector.

YES

Disconnected?

NO

*1

*1

Check the resistance value
of the transformer

NO

Within specification?

YES
Check for the change of LED
display by operating dip
switch SW1 for self-diagnosis.

Connector contact failure

Check the cause of the
disconnected transformer.
Ground fault on the circuit board
Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV

Check self-diagnosis function
of heat source unit

NO

Changed?

YES

Check self-diagnosis function of
heat source unit after the power on.
Changed?

NO

YES Heat source unit control

Accidental
error
Heat source unit board failure

board failure

Correct
the error.

*1. Refer to the parts catalog “transformer check”.

HWE09080

- 295 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of ME remote controller
3. Phenomena
"HO" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed.
(1) Cause
Without using MELANS
1) Heat source unit address is set to "00"
2) A wrong address is set.
The address of the indoor unit that is connected to the remote controller is incorrect. (It should equal the ME remote controller
address plus 100.)
A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. (100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit.)
3) Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller.
4) The centralized control switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit is set to ON.
5) Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line.
6) Disconnection between the terminal block for M-NET line connection (TB5) of the indoor unit and the male connector (CN2M)
7) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector
(CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control.
8) Heat source unit control board failure
9) Indoor unit control board failure
10) Remote controller failure
Interlocking control with MELANS
1) No group registration is made using MELANS. (The indoor unit and the ME remote controller are not grouped.)
2) Disconnected transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the heat source unit
3) The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one heat source unit, or the connector is connected to
CN40 on the heat source unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected.
Using MELANS
1) When MELANS is used, "HO" display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit and the local remote controller (ME remote controller) are grouped.
If "HO" does not disappear after the registration, check the causes (2) 1) - 3).
(2) Check method and remedy
Without using MELANS

NO

Are all the units in the system
experiencing the same problem?

YES

Check the address of the ME remote controller
on which "HO" is displayed.

Check the address of
the heat source unit.
A wrong address is
set to the ME
remote controller.

*1
51 - 100?

NO

A wrong address is set
to the heat source unit.

NO

YES

YES

Check the address of the
indoor unit to be coupled.

Check the centralized centralized
switch (SW2-1) on the heat source unit.

NO
ON?

NO

Indoor unit + 100?

YES

A wrong address is
set to the indoor unit.

Wrong switch setting
Change it from
ON to OFF.

ME remote controller
- 100?

YES
Measure voltages of the terminal
block for M-NET transmission line
on the indoor unit.

Heat source unit control board failure
Wrong wiring of the
M-NET transmission
line of the indoor unit

NO

17 - 30V?

YES
Check connection between indoor M-NET
transmission terminal block (TB5) and the
male connector (CN2M)

Disconnected
connector (CN2M)

YES

Disconnected?

NO

Indoor unit board or
remote controller failure
Correct
the error.

*1. When the heat source unit address is set to 1 - 50, the address will be forcibly set to 100.

HWE09080

- 296 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of ME remote controller
4. Phenomena
"88" appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

An error occurs when the address is registered or confirmed. (common)
1.

A wrong address is set to the unit to be coupled.

(1)

Confirm the address of unit to be coupled.

2.

The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis- (2)
connected or is not connected.

Check the connection of transmission line.

3.

Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled

(3)

Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission
line of the unit to be coupled.

1)

Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V.

2)

Check (4) in case other than 1).

(4)

Check for the main power of LOSSNAY.

4.

Improper transmission line work

Generates at interlocking registration between LOSSNAY and the indoor unit
5.

The power of LOSSNAY is OFF.

Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the
system in which the indoor units connected to different
heat source units are grouped
6.

The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed
has been cut off.

(5)

Check the power supply of the heat source unit
which is coupled with the unit to be confirmed.

7.

The power of the heat source unit to be confirmed
has been cut off.

(6)

Check that the transmission line for centralized
control (TB7) of the heat source unit is not disconnected.

8.

When the indoor units connected to different heat
source units are grouped without MELANS, the male
power supply connector is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the
transmission line for centralized control.

(7)

Check voltage of the transmission line for centralized control.

9.

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more heat 1)
source units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line
for centralized control.

Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V

10.

In the system to which MELANS is connected, the
2)
male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the
transmission line for centralized control.

Check 8 - 11 described on the left in case other than
1).

11.

Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized
control

HWE09080

- 297 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Both for MA remote controller and ME remote controller
1. Phenomena
Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
1.

Check method and remedy

Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
Faulty detection of pressure sensor.
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high pressure
Pressure drops excessively.

(1)

Check pressure difference between the detected
pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual
pressure with self-diagnosis LED.
-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check
the pressure sensor. (Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor).

Note:

Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor
than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
High pressure sensor

SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Low pressure sensor

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

(2)

Check temperature difference between the evaporating temperature (Te) and the target evaporating
temperature (Tem) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note:

Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
Evaporating temperature Te
SW1

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Target evaporating temperature Tem
SW1

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Note:

2.

Indoor unit LEV malfunction
Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction (not enough opening) or protection works and
compressor frequency does not rise due to pressure drop.
Refrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit
causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit.

HWE09080

- 298 -

Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high discharge temperature and high pressure.
At high discharge temperature:
Refer to 1102.(page 231)
At high pressure:
Refer to 1302.(page 233)
Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ([4] -4).(page 310)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Cause

Check method and remedy

3.

Long piping length
The cooling capacity varies greatly depending on the
pressure loss. (When the pressure loss is large, the
cooling capacity drops.)

4.

Piping size is not proper (thin)

5.

Insufficient refrigerant amount
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature.

Refer to 1-1. (Compressor frequency does not rise
sufficiently.)(page 298)
Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
adjustment(page 177)

6.

Clogging by foreign object

Check the temperature difference between in front
of and behind the place where the foreign object is
clogging the pipe (upstream side and downstream
side). When the temperature drops significantly, the
foreign object may clog the pipe.
-> Remove the foreign object inside the pipe.

7.

The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively.
(Less than 15°C [59°F] WB)

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor
unit is used.

8.

Compressor failure
The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due
to refrigerant leak in the compressor.

Check the discharge temperature to determine if
the refrigerant leaks, as it rises if there is a leak.

9.

LEV3 malfunction
Sufficient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the
indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured
due to LEV3 malfunction.

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting
( [4] -4- ).(page 310)
It most likely happens when there is little difference
or no difference between TH12 and TH15.

10.

TH12, TH15 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wiring
LEV3 is not controlled normally.

HWE09080

- 299 -

Check the piping length to determine if it is contributing to performance loss.
Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the
temperature difference between the indoor unit
heat exchanger outlet temperature and the saturation temperature (Te) of 63LS. ->Correct the piping.

Check the thermistor.
Check wiring.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2. Phenomena
Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
1.

Check method and remedy

Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
Faulty detection of pressure sensor.
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high pressure.

(1)

Check pressure difference between the detected
pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual
pressure with self-diagnosis LED.
-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check
the pressure sensor.(Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor)

Note:

Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor
than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
High pressure sensor

SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Low pressure sensor

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

(2)

Check the difference between the condensing temperature (Tc) and the target condensing temperature (Tcm) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note:

Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
Condensing temperature Tc
SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Target condensing temperature Tcm
SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Note:

HWE09080

- 300 -

Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high discharge temperature and high pressure.
At high discharge temperature:
Refer to 1102.(page 231)
At high pressure:
Refer to 1302.(page 233)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Cause

Check method and remedy

2.

Indoor unit LEV malfunction
Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction
(not enough opening).

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting
( [4] -4- ).(page 310)

3.

Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping
temperature sensor
If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher
than the actual temperature, it makes the subcool
seem smaller than it is, and the LEV opening decreases too much.

Check the thermistor.

4.

Insulation failure of the refrigerant piping

5.

Long piping length
Excessively long piping on the high pressure side
causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high
pressure.

6.

Piping size is not proper (thin)

7.

Clogging by foreign object

Check the temperature difference between the upstream and the downstream of the pipe section that
is blocked. Since blockage in the extended section
is difficult to locate, operate the unit in the cooling
cycle, and follow the same procedures that are
used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling
operation.
->Remove the blockage in the pipe.

8.

The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively
high.(exceeding 28°C [82°F])

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor
unit is used.

9.

Insufficient refrigerant amount
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to low discharge temperature
Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start.

Refer to 2 - 1. (Compressor frequency does not rise
sufficiently.)(page 300)
Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
adjustment.(page 177)

10.

Compressor failure (same as in case of cooling)

Check the discharge temperature.

11.

LEV3 actuation failure
A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a
blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the
resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tendency for the discharge temperature to rise.

Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV ([4] 4-).(page 310)

HWE09080

- 301 -

Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due
to piping length.
-> Change the pipe

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
3. Phenomena
Heat source unit stops at times during operation.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

The first stop is not considered as an error, as the
(1)
unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes as a preliminary error.

Check the mode operated in the past by displaying
preliminary error history on LED display with SW1.

Error mode
1

Abnormal high pressure

2

Abnormal discharge air temperature

3

Heatsink thermistor failure

4

Thermistor failure

5

Pressure sensor failure

6

Over-current break

7

Refrigerant overcharge

Note1:

Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode
may be considered in addition to the above. (Freeze
protection is detected by one or all indoor units.)

Note2:

Even the second stop is not considered as an error
when some specified errors occur. (eg. The third
stop is considered as an error when the thermistor
error occurs.)

HWE09080

(2)

Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the
unit by displaying preliminary error history on LED
display with SW1.

-> Refer to the reference page for each error mode.
*Display the indoor piping temperature table with
SW1 to check whether the freeze proof operation
runs properly, and check the temperature.

- 302 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise
1. M-NET transmission
Control is performed by exchanging signals between the heat source unit and the indoor unit (ME remote controller) through
M-NET transmission. Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission, leading to erroneous
operation.
(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line
Cause

Noise interference on
the transmission line

Erroneous operation

Error code

Error code definition

Signal is transformed and will be misjudged as the
signal of another address.

6600

Address overlap

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to
the noise creating a new signal

6602

Transmission processor hardware error

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to
the noise, and will not be received normally leading
to no acknowledgement (ACK).

6607

No ACK error

Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine
noise.

6603

Transmission line
bus busy error

Transmission is successful; however, the acknowledgement (ACK) or the response cannot be received normally due to the noise.

6607
6608

No ACK error
No response error

(2) Wave shape check

No fine noise
allowed
VHL
VBN

52

[With transmission]

52

Logic "0"

52

52

52

Logic "1"

No fine noise allowed

[Without transmission]
Wave shape check
Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope. The following conditions must be met.
1) Small wave pattern (noise) must not exist on the transmission signal. (Minute noise (approximately 1V) can be generated by
DC-DC converter or the inverter operation; however, such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is
grounded.)
2) The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows.

HWE09080

Logic

Voltage level of the transmission line

0

VHL = 2.5V or higher

1

VBN = 1.3V or below

- 303 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(3) Check method and remedy
1) Measures against noise
Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in (1) occur.
Error code definition

Remedy

Check that the wiring 1. The transmission line and
work is performed acthe power line are not
cording to wiring
wired too closely.
specifications.
2. The transmission line is
not bundled with that for
another systems.

Isolate the transmission line from the power line (5cm [1-31/32"] or
more). Do not insert them in the same conduit.

3. The specified wire is used
for the transmission line.

Use the specified transmission line.
Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote controller)
Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more
(Remote controller wire: 0.3 - 1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

4. When the transmission
line is daisy-chained on
the indoor unit terminals,
are the shields daisychained on the terminals,
too?

The transmission is two-wire daisy-chained. The shielded wire
must be also daisy-chained.
When the shielded cable is not daisy-chained, the noise cannot be
reduced enough.

5. Is the shield of the indoorheat source transmission
cable grounded to the
earth terminal on the heat
source unit?

Connect the shield of the indoor-heat source transmission cable to
the earth terminal ( ) on the heat source unit.
If no grounding is provided, the noise on the transmission line cannot escape leading to change of the transmission signal.

6. Check the treatment method of the shield of the
transmission line (for centralized control).

The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to
noise interference if it is grounded to the heat source unit whose
power jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.
The environment against noise varies depending on the distance
of the transmission lines, the number of the connected units, the
type of the controllers to be connected, or the environment of the
installation site. Therefore, the transmission line work for centralized control must be performed as follows.

Check that the
grounding work is
performed according
to grounding specifications.

The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission
line.
When they are bundled, erroneous operation may be caused.

(1)

When no grounding is provided:
Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to
the heat source unit whose power jumper connector was
moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.

(2)

When an error occurs even though one point grounding is
provided: Ground the shield on all heat source units.

2) Check the followings when the error "6607" occurs, or "HO" appears on the display on the remote controller.
Error code definition

Remedy

7.

The farthest distance of transmission line is
200m [656ft] or longer.

Check that the farthest distance from the heat source unit to the indoor unit and to the remote controller is within 200m [656ft].

8.

The types of transmission lines are different.

Use the specified transmission line.
Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote controller)
Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more
(Remote controller wire: 0.3-1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

9.

Heat source unit circuit board failure

Replace the heat source unit control board or the power supply
board for the transmission line.

10. Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote controller failure

Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller.

11. The MA remote controller is connected to the M- Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA reNET transmission line.
mote controller (TB15).

HWE09080

- 304 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2. MA remote controller transmission
The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst.
(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line
If noise is generated on the transmission line, and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit
is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row, MA transmission error (6831) will occur.
(2) Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern

TB15

A
B

1
2

A, B : No polarity
Across terminal No. 1-2

Indoor unit

MA remote controller

: Power supply (9V to 12VDC)

Transmission waveform (Across terminal No.1 - 2)
Satisfies the formula
DC9~12V

12 msec/bit

5%

Voltage among terminals must

HWE09080

Logic 1

Logic 0

Logic 1

Logic 1

12msec

12msec

12msec

12msec

- 305 -

be between DC9 and 12 V.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts
-1- High-Pressure Sensor (63HS1, PS1, PS3)
1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the high pressure sensor, and the high-pressure gauge pressure to check
for failure.
By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the highpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or
be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], go to (3).
4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).
(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running. (Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.)
1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.098MPa [14psi], both the high pressure sensor and the control board
are normal.
2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. (performance deterioration)
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the high pressure sensor has a problem.
(3) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a
problem.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4.15MPa [601psi], the control board has a problem.
(4) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors
(63HS1, PS1, PS3) to check the pressure with self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
2. Pressure sensor configuration
The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black
wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage
will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.071V per 0.098MPa [14psi].
The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side
is different from that on the control board side.
Body side

Control board side

Vcc

Pin 1

Pin 3

Vout

Pin 2

Pin 2

GND

Pin 3

Pin 1

Pressure 0 ~ 4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V
0.071 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

Connector

Pressure (MPa [psi])

4.5 [653]

63HS1
123

4.0 [580]
3.5 [508]
3.0 [435]
2.5 [363]
2.0 [290]
1.5 [218]

1
2
3

GND (Black)

1.0 [145]

Vout (White)

0.5 [73]
0

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

Output voltage (V)

HWE09080

- 306 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-2- Low-Pressure Sensor (63LS)
1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the low pressure sensor, and the low pressure gauge pressure to check
for failure.
By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the lowpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or
be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], go to (3).
4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).
(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running.(Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.)
1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.03MPa [4psi], both the low pressure sensor and the control board are
normal.
2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.03MPa [4psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. (performance
deterioration)
3) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the low pressure sensor has a problem.
(3) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1 display.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the low pressure sensor has a
problem.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.
When the heat source temperature is 30°C [86°F] or less, the control board has a problem.
When the heat source temperature exceeds 30°C [86°F], go to (5).
(4) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors
(63LS:CN202) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
(5) Remove the high pressure sensor (63HS1) from the control board, and insert it into the connector for the low pressure sensor (63LS) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
2. Low-pressure sensor configuration
The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC5V is applied between the red and the black
wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage
will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.173V per 0.098MPa [14psi].
The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side
is different from that on the control board side.
Body side

Control board side

Vcc

Pin 1

Pin 3

Vout

Pin 2

Pin 2

GND

Pin 3

Pin 1

63LS
123

Pressure 0 ~ 1.7 MPa [247psi]
Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V
0.173 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

Pressure (MPa [psi])

1.8 [261]
1.6 [232]
1.4 [203]
1.2 [174]
1.0 [145]
0.8 [116]

Connector
0.6 [87]

1
2
3

0.4 [58]

GND (Black)

0.2 [29]

Vout (White)

0
0

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

Output voltage (V)

HWE09080

- 307 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-3- Solenoid Valve
Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match.
Setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be output to the LED's.
Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF. LEDs light up when relays are on.
The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays are ON. Refer to the following instructions.
Display
SW1
LD1
Upper

LD2

21S4a

LD3
CH11

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

SV4d

SV9

LD8

SV1a

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

Lower

Upper

SV4a

SV4b

Lower

SV7a

SV7b

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

When a valve malfunctions, check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected, the
connector on the board is not inserted wrongly, or the wire for the connector is not disconnected.
(1) In case of 21S4a (4-way switching valve)
About this 4-way valve
When not powered:
Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger AND the gas ball valve (BV1) and the accumulator
to complete the circuit for the cooling cycle.
When powered:
The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve, and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator.
This circulation is for heating.
Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check whether the valve has no
faults and the electricity runs between where and where.Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature, as the pipe
on the oil separator side will be hot.
Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve.
(2) In case of SV1a (Bypass valve)
This solenoid valve opens when powered (Relay ON).
1) At compressor start-up, the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes, and the operation can be checked by the self-diagnosis LED display
and the closing sound.
2) To check whether the valve is open or closed, check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve
is being powered.Even when the valve is closed, high-temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve.
(Therefore, temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed.)
(3) SV4a - 4d, SV7a, 7b(Controls heat exchanger capacity)

1) At least one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d,SV7a, and SV7b turns on. Check for proper operation on the LED
and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve.
2) This diagram shows the flow of the high-temperature (high-pressure) gas refrigerant in the Cooling-only and Cooling-main
modes and the flow of the low-temperature gas/liquid refrigerant in the Heating-only and Heating-main modes. Refer to the
refrigerant circuit diagram. Solenoid valves turns on and off according to such factors as the capacity of the indoor units in
operation and water inlet temperature. Check the LED. Remove the SV coil, open the lid, and check the plunger. The type of
pin face wrench that is listed in the service parts list is required to perform this task.

HWE09080

- 308 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Refrigerant Circuit diagram 
ST1

BV1

1

Solenoid valve block

CV7a
SV4a

SV4b

2

3

SV4d
4

5

TH8
SV7a SV7b

Water circuit

TH7
THINV

LEVINV ST13

Component cooler CV8
heat exchanger

CV4a

CV3a
CV6a

TH3
LEV2b
BV2

TH6

ST2

TH2
LEV2a
HIC
LEV1

Solenoid valve block(three compartments)

4
4
5
2

5

1

2

3
3
1 is located behind 3

HWE09080

- 309 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Refrigerant Circuit diagram 

1

Solenoid valve block

CV7a
SV4a

SV4b

2

3

SV4d

4

5

TH8
SV7a

SV7b

TH7
THINV

Water circuit

LEVINV ST13

Component cooler
CV8
heat exchanger
CV3a

CV2a

CV5a
BV1

CV4a

ST1

CV6a
SV9

BV2

Solenoid valve block(three compartments)

4
4
5
2

5

1

2

3
3
1 is located behind 3

(4) In the case of SV9 (Bypass valve)
This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on)
This valve turns on when the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3.5 MPa [507psi] during Heating-only or Heating-main operation
at the minimum frequency. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe temperature on the downstream of SV9 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant
passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe.

-4- LEV
LEV operation
LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve), LEV2a, and LEV2b (Heat source unit: Linear expansion valve) are stepping-motordriven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and heat source unit control boards.
(1) Indoor LEV and Heat source LEV (LEV2a, LEV2b)
The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.
1) Indoor and heat source unit control boards and the LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve)

HWE09080

- 310 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Heat source control board
Intermediate connector

LEV
4

M

6

5

2
3

1

Blue

DC12V

2

Brown

6

5

Red

5

Drive circuit

4

4

Brown

4

1

Blue

Yellow

3

3

Orange

3

3

2

4

Yellow

2

2

1

6

White

1

1

White Red Orange

Note. The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ. Check the color of the lead wire
to judge the number.

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

Output
(phase)
number

Output state

1

1
ON

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
ON

2
3

ON
OFF

ON
ON

OFF
ON

OFF
OFF

4

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Output pulses change in the following orders when the
Valve is closed; 1
2
3
4
1
Valve is open; 4
3
2
1
4
*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,
all the output phases will be off.
*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,
the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

D

C

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses
will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.
It must be fixed at point A.
When the valve operates smoothly, no sound from LEV or no vibration
occurs, however, when the pulses change from E to A in the chart or
the valve is locked, a big sound occurs.
*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by
holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

Valve closed

Valve open
A

Fully open: 1400 pulses

E

B

Pulses

80 - 100 pulses

HWE09080

- 311 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(2) Heat source LEV (LEV1,LEVINV)
The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.
1) Connections between the heat source control board and LEV
Heat source control board
DC 12V

LEV

6

Red

6

5

Brown

5

4

Blue

4

4

3

Orange

3

3

2

Yellow

2

2

1

White

1

1

Drive circuit

4
6

M
5

1

2
3

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

Output state

Output
(phase)
number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

2

ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3

OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

4

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

Output pulses change in the following orders when the
Valve is open; 1
2
3
4 5 6 7 8
Valve is closed; 8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1

1
8

*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,
all the output phases will be off.
*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,
the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

B

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 520 pulses
will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.
It must be fixed at point A.
(Pulse signal is output for approximately 17 seconds.)
When the valve operates smoothly, there is no sound from the LEV and no
vibration occurs, but when the valve is locked, noise is generated.
*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by
holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

Valve closed
*If liquid refrigerant flows inside the LEV, the sound may become smaller.

Valve open
Fully open: 480 pulses
A

Pulses

HWE09080

- 312 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(3) Judgment methods and possible failure mode
The specifications of the heat source unit (heat source LEV), indoor unit (indoor LEV),and BC controller (BC controller LEV)
differ.Therefore, remedies for each failure may vary. Check the remedy specified for the appropriate LEV as indicated in the
right column.
Malfunction
mode
Microcomputer
driver circuit failure

Judgment method

Remedy

Disconnect the control board connector and connect
the check LED as shown in the figure below.
6

Target LEV

When the drive circuit
has a problem, replace
the control board.

Indoor
Heat source

5
4
3
2
1k

LED

1

resistance : 0.25W 1k
LED : DC15V 20mA or more
When the main power is turned on, the indoor unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV
for 10 seconds, and the heat source unit circuit board
outputs pulse signals to the heat source unit LEV for 17
seconds.
If any of the LED remains lit or unlit, the drive circuit is
faulty.
LEV mechanism
is locked

If the LEV is locked, the drive motor runs idle, and
makes a small clicking sound.
When the valve makes a closing and opening sound,
the valve has a problem.

Replace the LEV.

Indoor
Heat source
BC controller

Disconnected or
short-circuited
LEV motor coil

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red
-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.
They are normal if resistance is 150ohm 10%.

Replace the LEV coils.

Indoor
Heat source
(LEV2a,LEV2b)
BC controller

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red
-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.
They are normal if resistance is 46ohm 3%.

Replace the LEV coils.

Heat source
(LEV1,LEVINV)

If there is a large
Incomple sealing When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor
(leak from the
LEV, run the target indoor unit in the fan mode, and the amount of leakage, revalve)
other indoor units in the cooling mode. Then, check the place the LEV.
liquid temperature (TH22) with the self-diagnosis LED.
When the unit is running in the fan mode, the LEV is fully closed, and the temperature detected by the thermistor is not low. If there is a leak, however, the
temperature will be low. If the temperature is extremely
low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on
the remote controller, the LEV is not properly sealed,
however, if there is a little leak, it is not necessary to replace the LEV when there are no effects to other parts.

Indoor
BC controller

Thermistor
(liquid piping
temperature detection)
Linear Expansion Valve

Faulty wire connections in the
connector or
faulty contact

HWE09080

1.

Check for loose pins on the connector and check
the colors of the lead wires visually

2.

Disconnect the control board's connector and
conduct a continuity check using a tester.

- 313 -

Check the continuity at Indoor
the points where an er- Heat source
ror occurs.
BC controller

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(4) Heat source unit LEV (LEV1,LEVINV) coil removal procedure
1) LEV component
As shown in the figure, the heat source LEV is made in such a way that the coils and the body can be separated.
Body

Coils

Stopper

Lead wire

2) Removing the coils
Fasten the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then pull out the coils toward the
top.If the coils are pulled out without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent.

Part A

3) Installing the coils
Fix the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then insert the coils from the top, and
insert the coil stopper securely in the pipe on the body. Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe
will not be bent.
If the coils are pushed without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent. Hold the body when
pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent.

Part A

HWE09080

- 314 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(5) Heat source unit LEV (LEV2a,2b) coil removal procedure

Motor
Driver
Locknut

Bellows

Valve assembling

Refrigerant Circuit

Valve body side
Orifice

Notes on the procedure
1) Do not put undue pressure on the motor.
2) Do not use motors if dropped.
3) Do not remove the cap until immediately before the procedure.
4) Do not wipe off any molybdenum.
5) Do not remove the packing.
6) Do not apply any other than specified liquid such as screw lock agent, grease and etc.

Molybdenum

Motor
Packing

HWE09080

Cap

- 315 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Replacement procedure
1) Stop the air conditioner. After checking that the air conditioner is stopped, turn off the power of the heat source unit.
2) Prepare two spanners. Hold the valve body with one spanner and loosen the locknut with another one.
Turning the locknut counter-clockwise from motor side view can loosen it.
Two spanners must be used.
Do not hold the motor with one hand and loosen the locknut with only one spanner.
3) Turning the locknut several times. The locknut will come off and then the motor can be removed.
4) Prepare a motor replacement. Use only factory settings, which the head part of the driver does not come out.Use of
other than factory settings may result in malfunction and failure of valve flow rate control.
5) Keep dust, contaminants, and water out of the space between the motor and the valve body during replacement. (The
space is the mechanical section of the valve.) Do not damage the junction with tools.
After removing the motor, blow N2 gas or etc. into bellows in order to blow off water from inside.
6) Remove the cap of the motor replacement. Joint the axis of the motor and the one of the valve body with the locknut to
stick precisely. Apply screw lock agent to whole part of the screw. Do not introduce screw lock agent into the
motor.Use new motors if problems are found on the motor during the replacement.
7) After rotating the locknut 2~3 times by hands, hold the valve body with the spanner, and tighten the locknut with the
specified torque with a torque wrench. Apply the tightening torque of 15N m (150kgf cm) (administration value
15
1 N m (150
10kgf cm)).
Note that undue tightening may cause breaking a flare nut.
8) When tightening the locknut, hold the motor with hands so that undue rotary torque and load can not be applied.
9) The differences of relative position after assembling the motor and the valve body do not affect the valve control and
the switching function.
Do not relocate the motor and the valve body after tightening the locknut. Even the relative position is different from
before and after assembling.
Difference in rotational direction is acceptable.

The motor may not be fixed with clamp because of the changing of the motor configuration. However, the fixing is not
necessary due to the pipe fixing.
10) Connect the connector. Do not pull hard on the lead wire. Make sure that the connector is securely inserted into the
specified position, and check that the connector does not come off easily.
11) Turn on the indoor unit, and operate the air conditioner. Check that no problems are found.

HWE09080

- 316 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-5- Troubleshooting Principal Parts of BC Controller
1. Pressure sensor
Troubleshooting flow chart for pressure sensor
START
Note 1

Check whether the pressure sensor or the
connectors of P1 and P3 are connected,
properly

NO

Repair the fault.

OK?

Operating at the moment?

YES

Note 2

On the self-diagnosis monitor, measure
Heat source high-pressure 63HS1
Heat source low-pressure 63LS
BC controller pressure P1 (liquid side)
and P3 (intermediate part)
Check whether the result is
63HS1 P1 P3 63LS

NO

OK?

Check whether the refrigerant pipe
and the transmission line are
connected correctly between the heat
source unit and the BC controller.

YES

All the compressors of the heat source units to
which the BC controller is connected are stopped.

NO

OK?
YES

10 minutes or longer after
the operation stops?

Fix the relation between
the refrigerant piping
and the transmission line.

NO

Check P1 and P3 on the self-diagnosis
LED, and check that the detected
pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less.
Note 3

NO

OK?

Check whether the contact of the pressure
sensor connector in trouble is not faulty.

Check that the difference between each
detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less.

YES
NO

OK?
YES

NO

OK?
NO
Is Pd

P1

P3 Ps?

Note 4

Restore contact failure.

Remove the pressure sensor connector
from the board, and check the pressure.

YES

Both the board and the pressure sensor are normal.

Pressure 0MPa [0psi]

NO

YES
Short-circuit between connecter pins #2 and #3
on the circuit board, and check the pressure.

Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the
transmission line are connected correctly between
the heat source unit and the BC controller.
NO

OK?

Fix the relation between the
refrigerant piping and the
transmission line.

YES

6MPa [870psi] pressure
or more is displayed.

NO

YES
Replace the pressure sensor, which detects
less than 6MPa [870psi] pressure, with the
pressure sensor, which detects 6MPa [870psi]
or more pressure, check the pressure, and
check whether the detected pressure is
displayed normally.

OK?

NO

YES

Replace the pressure sensor.

HWE09080

- 317 -

Replace the board.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

1) BC controller: Phenomena when the pressure sensor is connected wrongly (reverse connection of P1 and P3) to the board.
Symptoms
Cooling-only
Normal

Cooling-main
Non-cooling

SC11 large
SC16 small
PHM large

Heating only
Indoor heating SC small
Heating indoor Thermo ON
Especially noise is large.

SC11 large
SC16 small
PHM large

Heating main
Non-cooling
Indoor heating SC small
Heating indoor Thermo ON
Especially noise is large.

SC11 large
SC16 small
PHM large

2) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1).

Measurement data

SW1 setting value

Symbol

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Heat source high pressure

63HS1

ON

Heat source low pressure

63LS

ON

BC controller pressure
(liquid side)

PS1

ON

BC controller pressure
(intermediate part)

PS3

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3) Check whether CNP1 (liquid side) connector on the BC controller control board and the connector CNP2 (intermediate part)
are not disconnected or not loose.
4) Check the pressure value on the self-diagnosis switch (same as note 2) with the connector of the applied pressure sensor is
disconnected from the board.

HWE09080

- 318 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2. Temperature sensor
Troubleshooting instructions for thermistor
START
Note 1

Pull out the thermistor connector in
trouble from the board.
Note 2

Measure the temperature of the thermistor
in trouble. (actual measurement value)
Note 2

Check the thermistor resistor.

Compare the temperature corresponding to the
resistance measured by the thermistor and the
temperature measured by a commercially
available thermometer, and check whether
there is no difference between them.

Temperature difference

NO

YES

Replace the thermistor

Note 3

Insert the connector of the thermistor
in trouble into the board, check the sensor
inlet temperature on the LED monitor,
and check the temperature difference.

Temperature difference

YES

Check for contact failure.

NO
Replace the control board.

Normal

HWE09080

- 319 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

1) For the connectors on the board, TH11 and TH12 are connected to CN10, and TH15 and TH16 are connected to CN11. Disconnect the connector in trouble, and check the sensor of each number.
2)
Pull out the sensor connector from the I/O board, Do not pull the sensor by holding the lead wire.
Measure the resistance with such as a tester.
Compare the measured value with that of shown in the figure below. When the result is 10%, it is normal.
3) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Heat source control board SW1).

Measurement data

Symbol

Liquid inlet temperature

TH11

SW1 setting value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

G, GA
Bypass outlet temperature
(Standard / main)

TH12

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

Bypass inlet temperature

TH15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

Bypass inlet temperature

TH16

Bypass outlet temperature

TH12

Bypass inlet temperature

TH15

Bypass outlet temperature

TH12

Bypass inlet temperature

TH15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

GB, HB
(Sub 1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

GB, HB
(Sub 2)

HWE09080

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

- 320 -

ON

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
3. Troubleshooting flow chart for LEV Solenoid valve
(1) LEV

No cooling capacity
No heating capacity
Note 1

Check whether the electric expansion
valve and the solenoid valve connector
are not disconnected or not loose.

NO
Fault is found.

Repair the fault.

Run the cooling operation or the heating
operation in the system in trouble
(only in one system).

Heating operation

Cooling or heating operation
Cooling operation

Note 2

Note 2

Check that LEV1 is fully open.

Check that LEV1 is fully open.

NO

NO

LEV1 is fully open.
YES

LEV1 is fully open.
Note 3

YES

Check LEV1.

Note 3

Check whether LEV 3 is controlled by
the value of the differential pressure.

Check whether LEV3 is controlling
superheat.

NO

NO

Superheat control OK

Differential pressure OK

YES

YES

Check LEV3.

Check that SVA and SVC are OFF.

Check that SVA and SVC are ON.

NO

NO

SVA, SVC ON

SVA, SVC OFF

YES

YES

Check SVA and SVC.

Check that SVB is OFF.

Check that SVB is ON.

NO

NO

SVB OFF

SVB ON

YES

Check SVB.

YES

Completed

HWE09080

- 321 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

1) BC controller: Phenomena when LEV is connected wrongly (reverse connection of LEV1 and LEV3) to the board.
Phenomena
Cooling-only

Cooling-main

Heating only

Non-cooling
SH12 small, SC11 small
SH16 small, branch pipe
SC small
BC controller sound

Non-cooling and non-heating
SH12 small, SC11 small
SH16 large, but branch pipe
SC small
BC controller sound
PHM large

Indoor heating SC small
PHM large

Heating main
Non-cooling
Indoor heating SC small
PHM large

2) Check method of fully open state or fully closed state of LEV
Check LEV opening (pulse) on the self-diagnosis LED (Heat source control board SW1).
Full open: 2000 pulses
Fully closed: 110 pulses (In the case of heating-only mode, however, the pulse may become 110 or more.)
When LEV is fully open, measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of LEV, and make sure that there
is no temperature difference.
When LEV is fully closed, check that there is no refrigerant flowing sound.
3) Refer to the chart below to judge LEV opening controlled by the values of the differential pressure and of the superheat.
(BC controller LEV basic operation characteristic)
Part

Malfunction
mode
Inclined to
close

LEV1
Inclined to
open

Inclined to
close

LEV3

Inclined to
open

HWE09080

Content

Difference between high
Heating only pressure (P1) and intermediate pressure (P3) is large.
Heatingmain
Difference between high
Coolingpressure (P1) and intermemain
diate pressure (P3) is
small.
Cooling-only
CoolingSH12 is large.
main

G, GA
type

GB, HB type

Operation
mode

Standards of judgment on
unit stable operation

0.3 to 0.4MPa
[44 to 58psi]

SH12 < 20°C [36°F]

Difference between high
Heating only
pressure (P1) and intermeHeatingdiate pressure (P3) is
main
small.

0.3 to 0.4MPa
[44 to 58psi]

Cooling-only
CoolingSC16 and SH12 are small.
main

SC16 > 3°C [5.4°F]
SH12 > 3°C [5.4°F]

Heating only Difference between high
pressure (P1) and intermeHeatingdiate pressure (P3) is large.
main

0.3 to 0.4MPa
[44 to 58psi]

Inclined to
close

Cooling-only
SH22 is large.
Coolingmain

SH22 < 20°C [36°F]

Inclined to
open

Cooling-only
CoolingSH22 is small.
main

SH22 > 3°C [5.4°F]

LEV3

- 322 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Self-diagnosis LED
Measurement data

Symbol

SW1 setting value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LEV1 opening

ON

LEV2 opening

ON

LEV3 opening

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

G, GA
(Standard
/ main)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

BC controller bypass
outlet superheat

SH12

ON

BC controller intermediate
part subcool

SC16

ON

BC controller liquid-side subcool

SC11

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

HWE09080

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GB, HB
(Sub 1)

LEV3 opening

ON

GB, HB
(Sub 2)

LEV3 opening

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

- 323 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Troubleshooting flow chart for solenoid valve body

Start
Check for pins not fully inserted on the connector
and check the colors of the lead wires visually.
Intermediate connector

To
LEV

Control board

2 Brown
5 Red
1 Blue
3 Orange
4 Yellow
6 White

Brown
Red
Blue
Orange
Yellow
White

OK?

When LEV is fully closed : tick sound
When LEV is fully open : no sound
Check the above.

6
5
4
3
2
1

OK?
YES

Repair the fault.
OK?

Pull out the connector from the board, and check
that the electricity runs with a tester.
The wiring side of CN05 and 07: Among 1, 3 and 5,
and among 2, 4 and 6
OK?

Repair the fault.

Check the resistance between each coil
with a tester (between red and white,
red and orange, brown and yellow and
brown and blue), and check that the
resistance is 150 within 10%.

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

OK?

Replace LEV.

Check that no refrigerant
leaks from LEV.

NO

YES

NO

Replace LEV.

6
5
4
3
2
1

Connect the LED for check,
which is as shown in the
right figure, to the board
connector, and check that
the LED keeps lighting for
10 seconds.
10 k

NO

OK?
Replace LEV.

YES

LED

NO
Replace the board in trouble.

Completed

HWE09080

- 324 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(2) Solenoid valve (SVA, SVB, SVC)
Faulty judgment of solenoid valve

Stop the operation of the applied
BC remote controller system.

NO
Stop the operation
YES
Check whether the wire to the
solenoid valve is not connected
wrongly, or the connector is not loose.

NO

No fault

Repair the fault.

YES
Run the cooling or heating operation
of the refrigerant system of the
solenoid valve in trouble.
Note 1

Check the operation sound of the solenoid
valve to be magnetized at the time of
turning on the remote controller.

NO

Makes a tick sound.
YES

Remove the solenoid valve coil, and
check that there is a suction force.

NO

There is a suction force.
YES

Note 2

Note 2

Measure the temperature at the upstream
and downstream pipes of the solenoid
valve, and compare them.
There is no temperature difference. : OK
There is a temperature difference. : NO

Check the relay output with the
self-diagnosis LED, and check
whether the operation corresponds
with the operation mode.

Stop the unit with the remote controller.
Remove the solenoid valve connector, and
check that the electricity runs through the
solenoid valve coil.

NO

OK

The electricity runs.

YES

YES

YES
Turn on the remote controller with the
connector of the solenoid valve in trouble
disconnected, and check that the control
board outputs 230V.

Replace the control board.

Corresponds

NO

Note 2

Measure the temperature at the upstream
and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve.
When the solenoid valve is ON : There is no temperature difference.
When the solenoid valve is OFF : There is a temperature difference.

Output 230V

YES

NO
Replace the control board.

OK

Replace the solenoid valve coil.

YES
Faulty judgment of solenoid valve

HWE09080

Solenoid valve failure

- 325 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Check whether the BC board output signal corresponds with the solenoid valve operation correspond.

1) SVA, SVB, SVC
SVA, SVB, and SVC turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode.
Mode

Port

Cooling

Heating

Stopped

Defrost

Fan

SVA

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SVB

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

SVC

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, SVM2b
SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, and SVM2b turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode.
Operation
mode

SVM1,SVM1b

SVM2,
SVM2b

Cooling only

Cooling main

Heating only

Heating main

Defrost

Stopped

ON

Pressure differential control OFF or
ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Pressure differential control OFF or
ON

Pressure differential control OFF or
ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

2) SVA, SVB, SVC
Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and
Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and

HWE09080

- 326 -

of SVA.
of SVB.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
4. BC controller transformer
BC controller control board
CNTR
CN03

Red

White

Red

Normal
CNTR(1)-(3)

about 58 ohm.

CN03(1)-(3)

about 1.6 ohm.

Red

Abnormal
Open-phase or shorting

* Before measuring the resistance, pull out the connector.

HWE09080

- 327 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]

-6- Inverter (THMU-A)
Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the
compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter
from damage.)
Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.
If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.
(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies
1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is
turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Before inspecting the inverter-related items, turn off the main power, wait for 5 to 10
minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor has dropped to a sufficiently low level.
2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some
of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,
and Faston terminals.
3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned
on.
4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

5) When the IPM, diode stack, or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these
parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.
6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

HWE09080

- 328 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
Error display/failure condition
[1]

Inverter related errors
4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

[2]

Main power breaker trip

Measure/inspection item
Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor
Display on the Heat source Unit Board.
Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.
<1> Check the breaker capacity.
<2> Check whether the electrical system is short-circuited or groundfaulted.
<3> If items cause is not <1>or <2> are not the causes of the problem,
see (3)-[1].

[3]

Main power earth leakage breaker trip

<1> Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current.
<2> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<3> If the cause is not <1>or <2>, see (3)-[1]

[4]

Only the compressor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5]

The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6]

Noise is picked up by the peripheral device

<1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not
run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit.
<2> Check that the inverter output wiring is not in close contact with the
power supply wiring and the transmission lines.
<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.)
<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other
electric appliances.
<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output
can be considered. See (2)-[4].
*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[7]

Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.)

<1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.
<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or
does not run through the same conduit pipe.
* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

HWE09080

- 329 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(2) Inverter output related troubles
Items to be checked
[1]
Check the INV
board error
detection circuit.

Phenomena

Remedy

(1) Disconnect the invert- 1)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

IPM/overcurrent breaker trip
Error code: 4250
Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106,
and 107

Replace the INV board.

(2) Put the heat source
unit into operation.

2)

Logic error
Error code: 4220
Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

3)

ACCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4)

IPM open
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.119

Normal

1)

Compressor Meg failure
Error if less than 1 Mohm.
When no liquid refrigerant in the
compressor

Check that no liquid refrigerant is
present in the compressor, and replace the compressor.

2)

Compressor coil resistance failure
Coil resistance value of 0.3 ohm
(20°C [68°F])

Replace the compressor.

[2]
Check for
compressor
ground fault or
coil error.

Disconnect the compressor wiring, and check the
compressor Meg, and coil
resistance.

[3]
Check whether the inverter
is damaged.
(No load)

(1) Disconnect the invert- 1)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

Inverter-related problems are detected.

Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1].

(2) Disconnect the short- 2)
circuit connector from
CN6 on the INV
board.

Inverter voltage is not output.

Replace the INV board.

[4]
Check whether the inverter
is damaged.
(During compressor operation)

HWE09080

(3) Put the heat source
unit into operation.
Check the inverter
output voltage after
the inverter output
frequency has stabilized.

3)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

4)

There is no voltage imbalance between the wires.

Normal
*Reconnect the short-circuit connector to CN6 after checking the
voltage.

Put the heat source unit
into operation.
Check the inverter output
voltage after the inverter
output frequency has stabilized.

1)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

If the problem persists, replace the
INV board.
If the problem persists after replacing the above parts, go to section
[2].

- 330 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped.
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Perform Meg check between the
terminals on the power terminal
block TB1.

[2]

Turn on the power again and
check again.

1)

Turn on the heat source unit and
check that it operates normally.

1)

Operates normally without tripping
the main breaker.

2)

Main power breaker trip

[3]

2)

Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure Check each part in the main inverter
circuit.
*Refer to "Simple checking procedures
for individual components of main inMain power breaker trip
verter circuit".
IGBT module
No remote control display
IPM
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor
a) The wiring may have been shortcircuited. Search for the wire that
short-circuited, and repair it.
b) If item a) above is not the cause of
the problem, the compressor may
have a problem.
A compressor ground fault can be considered. Go to (2)-[2].

(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Check the earth leakage breaker
capacity and the sensitivity current.

Use of a non-specified earth
leakage breaker

Replace with a regulation earth leakage
breaker.

[2]

Check the resistance at the power
supply terminal block with a megger.

Failure resistance value

Check each part and wiring.
*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures
for individual components of main inverter
circuit".
IGBT module
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

[3]

Disconnect the compressor wirings and check the resistance of
the compressor with a megger.

Failure compressor if the insu- Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in
lating resistance value is not in the compressor. If there is none, replace
the compressor.
specified range.
Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or
less.

The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended
period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please
use the following procedure to take care of this.
Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block.
If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected.
Leave the power on for at least 12 hours.
Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater.
Earth leakage current measurement method
For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter
functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure.
Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION
When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block.

HWE09080

- 331 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit
Before checking, turn the power off and remove the parts to be checked from the control box.
Part name
Rush current
protection resistor
R1(R2)
Electromagnetic
relay
72C

Judgment method
Measure the resistance between terminals: 22 ohm

10%

This electromagnetic relay is rated at 200VAC and is driven by a coil. The resistance between the
coils in row A cannot be measured with a tester.Check only for shorting.

Installation direction

Row Row Row Row Row
A B C D E
A2

44 34

Check point

Coil

Row A

24 14

Checking criteria
Not to be short-circuited
With the test button
turned off :

Contact Row B to Row E With the test button

turned on : 0

A1

43 33 23 13

Test button

DC reactor DCL

HWE09080

Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)
Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

- 332 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]

-6- Inverter (YHMU-A)
Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective.
Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.
If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.
(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies
1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is
turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Turn off the unit, leave it turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage
across FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board or the terminals at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor is 20V or below
before checking inside the control box.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off.)
2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some
of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,
and Faston terminals.
3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned
on.
4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

5) When the IPM or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off
any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.
6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

HWE09080

- 333 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
Error display/failure condition

Measure/inspection item

[1]

Inverter related errors
4250, 4220, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

Check the details of the inverter error in the error log in X LED Monitor
Display on the Heat source Unit Board.
Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with IX. [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.

[2]

Main power breaker trip

Refer to "(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is
tripped".

[3]

Main power earth leakage breaker trip

Refer to "(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage
breaker is tripped".

[4]

Only the compressor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5]

The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6]

Noise is picked up by the peripheral device

<1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not
run close to the power supply wiring of the heat source unit.
<2> Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the
power supply wiring and the transmission lines.
<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.)
<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other
electric appliances.
<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output
can be considered. See (2)-[4].
*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[7]

Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.)

<1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.
<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or
does not run through the same conduit pipe.
* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

HWE09080

- 334 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(2) Inverter output related troubles
Items to be checked
[1]
Check the
INV board error detection
circuit.

Phenomena

Remedy

(1)

Disconnect the invert- 1)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

Overcurrent error
Error code: 4250
Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105,
106, and 107

Replace the INV board.

(2)

Put the heat source
unit into operation.

2)

Logic error
Error code: 4220
Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

3)

ACCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4)

IPM open
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.119

Normal

1)

Compressor Meg failure
Error if less than 1 Mohm.

Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor.
If there is none, replace the compressor.

2)

Compressor coil resistance failure
Coil resistance value of 1 ohm
(20°C [68°F])

Replace the compressor.

Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1].

[2]
Check for
compressor
ground fault
or coil error.

Disconnect the compressor
wiring, and check the compressor Meg, and coil resistance.

[3]
Check whether the inverter
is damaged.
(No load)

(1)

Disconnect the invert- 1)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

Inverter-related problems are detected.

(2)

Disconnect the shortcircuit connector from
CN6 on the INV
board.

2)

Inverter voltage is not output at the Replace the INV board.
terminals (SC-U, SC-V, and SC-W)

(3)

Put the heat source
unit into operation.
Check the inverter
output voltage after
the inverter output
frequency has stabilized.

3)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

4)

There is no voltage imbalance between the wires.

Normal
*Reconnect the short-circuit connector to CN6 after checking the
voltage.

1)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

[4]
Check whether the inverter
is damaged.
(During compressor operation)

HWE09080

Put the heat source unit into
operation.
Check the inverter output
voltage after the inverter
output frequency has stabilized.

- 335 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Check the breaker capacity.

Use of a non-specified breaker

Replace it with a specified breaker.

[2]

Perform Meg check between the
terminals on the power terminal
block TB1.

Zero to several ohm, or Meg
failure

[3]

Turn on the power again and
check again.

1) Main power breaker trip

Check each part and wiring.
*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures
for individual components of main inverter
circuit".
IGBT module
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

Turn on the heat source unit and
check that it operates normally.

1) Operates normally without
tripping the main breaker.

[4]

2) No remote control display

2) Main power breaker trip

a) The wiring may have been short-circuited. Search for the wire that short-circuited, and repair it.
b) If item a) above is not the cause of the
problem, refer to (2)-[1]-[6].

(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Check the earth leakage breaker
capacity and the sensitivity current.

Use of a non-specified earth
leakage breaker

Replace with a regulation earth leakage
breaker.

[2]

Check the resistance at the power
supply terminal block with a megger.

Failure resistance value

Check each part and wiring.
*Refer to (5) "Simple checking procedures
for individual components of main inverter
circuit".
IGBT module
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

[3]

Disconnect the compressor wirings and check the resistance of
the compressor with a megger.

Failure compressor if the insu- Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in
lating resistance value is not in the compressor. If there is none, replace
the compressor.
specified range.
Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or
less.

The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended
period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please
use the following procedure to take care of this.
Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block.
If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the heat source unit with the wires still disconnected.
Leave the power on for at least 12 hours.
Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater.
Earth leakage current measurement method
For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter
functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure.
Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION
When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block.

HWE09080

- 336 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit
Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that
the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
Part name
IGBT module

Judgment method
See "Troubleshooting for IGBT Module ". ( 9 [4] - 6 - (6) )

Rush current pro- Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5: 22 ohm
tection resistor
R1, R5
Electromagnetic
relay
72C

10%

This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil.
Check the resistance between terminals
Upper

1

2

3

4

Installation
direction

Contact

6

DC reactor DCL

Check point
Coil

Between Terminals 5 and 6

Checking criteria(W)
Not to be short-circuited
(Center value 75 ohm)

Between Terminals 1 and 2
Between Terminals 3 and 4

5

Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)
Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

(6) Troubleshooting for IGBT Module
Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting.
The terminals on the INV board are used for the measurement.
1) Notes on measurement
Check the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.)
Check that the resistance is not open ( ohm) or not shorted (to 0 ohm).
The values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed.
The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed.
Disconnect all the wiring connected the INV board, and make the measurement.
2) Tester restriction
Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater
Use the dry-battery-powered tester.
(The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied voltage is low.)
Use a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured.

HWE09080

- 337 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
Judgment value (reference)
Black

Red

SC-P1

FT-N

SC-P1

-

-

FT-N

-

-

SC-L1

SC-L2

SC-L3

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

SC-L1

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-L2

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-L3

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-V

SC-W

Black

Red

SC-P2

FT-N

SC-P2

-

-

FT-N

-

-

SC-U
5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

SC-U

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-V

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-W

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

INV board external diagram
SC-P2 SC-P1

FT-N

SC-V

SC-L1
SC-L2

SC-W

SC-L3

SC-U

HWE09080

- 338 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]

-7- Control Circuit (THMU-A)
(1) Control power source function block
Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V)
Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

Noise filter
Noise filter

TB1
AC 208 / 230 V
Terminal block for
power source

INV board
Rectifier

Fuse

72C

Smoothing capacitor

DCL

Inverter

Compressor

Inverter drive
circuit

17V Power supply

Surge protection
Microcomputer

5 V Power supply

Control board

Relay, LEV
Drive circuit

LEV

12V Power supply

Smoothing capacitor

Inverter reset
circuit
Microcomputer

63H1

Heat source unit

Fuse

72C
Solenoid valve
4-way valve
CH11

18 V Power supply

5 V Power supply
DC / DC converter

M-NET board
Fuse

Detection circuit for
the power supply to
the transmission line

TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
for centralized control
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay drive circuit

CN40

30 V Power supply

TB3
Indoor/heat source
transmission block
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)
M-NET
transmission line
(Non-polar 2 wire)
AC Power source
AC 208 / 230 V

Relay

TB2

Terminal block for
power source
TB15

Indoor unit

Terminal block
for MA remote
TB5 controller

To next unit
(Indoor unit)

DC / DC
converter

MA remote controller wiring
(Non-polar 2 wire)

Terminal block
for transmission
line connection
DC 17 ~ 30 V

A, B

DC 17 ~ 30 V

M-NET remote
controller

A, B

DC 9 ~ 12 V

MA remote
controller

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.
(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

HWE09080

- 339 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit
Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source
transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES
Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,
check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

NO
Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

NO

Check if the indoor/heat source transmission line
is not short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check whether the male connector is connected to
the female power supply connector (CN40).

NO

Connected

YES
Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
NO
Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES Fix the wiring and connector

Is there a wiring
error or a connector
disconnection?

disconnection.

YES

Check for shorted transmission
line for centralized control.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CNS2 on the control board.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES
Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
Is there a connector
disconnection?

YES

Fix the connector disconnection.

NO
Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins
of the CNIT on the control board.
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the CNDC on the INV board.

DC265 ~ 357V

NO

YES

Is the voltage
measurement between
4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

YES
Replace the M-NET board

Replace the M-NET board

NO
Check the voltage between SC-P1 and TB-N on the INV board.

DC265 ~ 357V

YES
Check the inrush current resistance (R1).

NO
NO

Check the voltages among SC-R, SC-S, and
SC-T on the INV board.

22

10%

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

Replace the inrush current
limiting resistor.
Replace the INV board.

YES
Replace the INV board.

NO
Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and
TB23 on the noise filter.

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

NO

Check the wiring between the noise filter and the
INV board as well as screw tightness, and fix any
problems found.

Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1.

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power
supply problems found.

Turn on the
power again.

HWE09080

- 340 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]

-7- Control Circuit (YHMU-A)
(1) Control power source function block
Power source system (AC 230 / 460 V)
Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

INV board
Rectifier

Noise filter
Noise filter

TB1
AC 460V
Terminal block for
power source

72C

DCL

Smoothing capacitor

Fuse

Compressor

Inverter drive
circuit

17V Power supply
Rectifier

Surge protection

Transformer

Microcomputer

5 V Power supply

Fuse

AC460V

Inverter

AC230V

AC230V

Fuse
Solenoid valve
4-way valve
CH11

Relay, LEV
Drive circuit

72C, LEV

12V Power supply

Inverter reset
circuit
Microcomputer

Heat source unit

Control board
63H1

18 V Power supply

5 V Power supply
DC / DC converter

M-NET board
Detection circuit for
the power supply to
the transmission line

TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
for centralized control
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay drive circuit

CN40

TB3
Indoor/heat source
transmission block
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)
M-NET
transmission line
(Non-polar 2 wire)
AC Power source
AC 220 / 240 V

30 V Power supply
Relay

TB2

Terminal block for
power source
TB15

Indoor unit

Terminal block
for MA remote
TB5 controller

To next unit
(Indoor unit)

DC / DC
converter

MA remote controller wiring
(Non-polar 2 wire)

Terminal block
for transmission
line connection
DC 17 ~ 30 V

A, B

DC 17 ~ 30 V

M-NET remote
controller

A, B

DC 9 ~ 12 V

MA remote
controller

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.
(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

HWE09080

- 341 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit
Check the voltage at the indoor/heat source
transmission terminal block (TB3) of heat source unit.

YES
DC 24 ~ 30 V
NO

Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,
check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

YES
DC 24 ~ 30 V
NO

Check if the indoor/heat source transmission line is not
short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check whether the male connector is connected to
the female power supply connector (CN40).

NO

Connected

YES
Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the
transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
NO
Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Is there a wiring
error or a connector
disconnection?

Fix the wiring and connector disconnection.

YES

Check for shorted transmission line or power feed
collision for centralized control.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CNS2 on the control board.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the
transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
YES

Is there a connector
disconnection?

Fix the connector disconnection.

NO
Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNIT
on the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the noise filter CN4.

YES

Is the voltage
measurement between
4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

Replace the M-NET board

YES
DC270 ~ 356V

Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the noise filter CN5.

DC270 ~ 356V

YES
Replace the M-NET board

NO
Check the noise filter fuse F4 .

Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown.

YES

NO

Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5, and then replace fuse F4 on the noise filter
board, then turn the power on.
Fuse F4 on the
noise filter board is blown.

YES
Replace the noise filter.

NO
Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.
Fuse F4 on the
noise filter board is blown.

YES
Replace the control board.

NO

Check fuse F5.

Replace the M-NET board

YES
Fuse F5 is blown.

Pull out CN4 and CN5 on the noise filter, replace fuse F5, and turn on the power.

YES

NO

Replace the noise filter.

Fuse F5 is blown.

Check the voltages among TB22 and TB23 on the
noise filter

NO
Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.

YES
Fuse F5 is blown.

Replace the control board.

NO
Replace the M-NET board

YES
AC414 ~ 506V

Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check the voltage between L2 and L3 at the power supply
terminal block TB1.

AC414 ~ 506V

NO

YES
Replace the noise filter.
Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found.

Turn on the
power again.

HWE09080

- 342 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[5] Refrigerant Leak
1. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)
1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side.
2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the liquid service valve (BV2) inside the heat source unit while the compressor is being
stopped.
3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump
down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.)
4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors
when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started.
5) Close the gas service valve (BV1) inside the heat source unit.
6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
7) Repair the leak.
8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit.
9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4.
2.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season)
Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation.

(2) Check the values of Tc and TH6.
(To display the values on the LED screen, use the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control board.)
1) When Tc-TH6 is 10°C [18°F] or more : See the next item (3).
2) When Tc-TH6 is less than 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor stops, collect the refrigerant inside the system, repair the leak,
perform evacuation, and recharge new refrigerant. (Leak spot: 4. In the case of heat source unit, handle in the same way as
heating season.)
Tc self-diagnosis switch

TH6 self-diagnosis switch

SW1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

ON

(3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board
is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped.
(4) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).
(5) To prevent the liquid seal, extract small amount of refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid service valve (BV2),
as the liquid seal may cause a malfunction of the unit.
(6) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected.
(7) Repair the leak.
(8) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation inside the heat source unit.
(9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit.
When the power to the heat source-indoor unit must be turned off to repair the leak after closing the service valves specified
in the item 4, turn the power off in approximately one hour after the heat source-indoor units stop.
1) When 30 minutes have passed after the item 4 above, the indoor unit lev turns from fully closed to slightly open to prevent the
refrigerant seal.
LEV2a and LEV2b open when the heat source unit remains stopped for 15 minutes to allow for the collection of refrigerant in
the heat source unit heat exchanger and to enable the evacuation of the heat source unit heat exchanger.
If the power is turned off in less than 5 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat
source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.
*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.
HWE09080

- 343 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2) Therefore, if the power source is turned off within 30 minutes, the lev remains fully closed and the refrigerant remains sealed.
When only the power for the indoor unit is turned off, the indoor unit LEV turns from faintly open to fully closed.
3) In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit.
To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop
mode.
Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work.

3.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)
Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation.

(2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board
is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped.
(3) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).
(4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
(5) Repair the leak.
(6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation*1 of the extension pipe for the indoor unit, and open the service valves
(BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.
4. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season)
1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into
the atmosphere when it is collected.
2) Repair the leak.
3) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation of the entire system, and calculate the
standard amount of refrigerant to be added (for heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit), and charge the refrigerant.
Refer to "VIII [4] 3. "
If the indoor or heat source units need to be turned off for repairing leaks during Step 1) above, turn off the power approximately 1 hour after the units came to a stop.
If the power is turned off in less than 15 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the heat
source unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.
In the cooling cycle, the section between "21S4b, c" and "LEV 2a, b" will form a closed circuit.
To recover the refrigerant or evacuate the system, "LEV1" and "SV5b, c" will be open by setting SW5-8 to ON in the stop
mode.
Set SW5-8 to OFF upon completion of all work.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

HWE09080

- 344 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
5. Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)
1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side.
2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the high-pressure side refrigerant service valve (BV2) on the heat source unit while the
compressor is being stopped.
3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the heat source unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump
down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.)
4) In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors
when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started.
5) Close the service ball valve (BV1) on the low-pressure pipe on the heat source unit.
6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
7) Repair the leak.
8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit.
9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit and turn off SW2-4.
6.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Cooling season)
Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation.

(2) Check the SC16 value.
(This valve can be displayed on the LED by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the heat source unit control
board.)
1) When SC16 is 10°C [18°F] or above: Go to the next item (3).
2) When the SC16 value is below 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor has stopped, extract the refrigerant in the system, repair
the leak, evacuate the air from the system *1, and charge the system with refrigerant. (If the leak is in the heat source unit,
follow the same procedure as listed under "heating season.")
SC16 self-diagnosis switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

(3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board
is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped.
(4) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2).
(5) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the heat source unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected.
(6) Repair the leak.
(7) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation *1 inside the heat source unit.
(8) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the heat source unit.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.
HWE09080

- 345 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
7.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)
Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation.

(2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the heat source control board
is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped.
(3) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2).
(4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
(5) Repair the leak.
(6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation of the extension pipe*1 for the indoor unit, and open the ball valves (BV1
and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.
8. Leak spot: In the case of heat source unit (Heating season)
1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (heat source unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into
the atmosphere when it is collected.
2) Repair the leak.
3) Repair the leak, and evacuate the air from the entire system *1 . Then, calculate the proper amount of refrigerant to be added
(heat source unit + extension pipe + indoor unit), and charge the system with that amount. Refer to Chapter VIII [4] 3. for the
proper amount of refrigerant charge.

*1. Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.
HWE09080

- 346 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions
1. Compressor Replacement Instructions

Follow the procedures below (Steps 1 through 5) to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor.
Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor.

Service panel

Control box

2. Remove the control box.

1. Remove the service panel (front panels).

Electric
wiring

Frame

3. Remove the wires that are secured to the frame,
and remove the frame.

HWE09080

- 347 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Acoustic insulation
on the compressor

Belt heater

4. Remove the insulation material and the belt heater
from the compressor.

HWE09080

Pipe cover on the
water heat exchanger

Wiring adjacent to
the compressor

Thermal insulation
on the accumulator
5. First, move the nearby wiring, insulation material on
the accumulator, and pipe covers on the pipe and
water heat exchanger out of the way or protect them
from the brazing flame; then debraze the pipe, and
replace the compressor.

- 348 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

1. Water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8) replacement instructions
* The following describes the procedures for replacing the water heat exchanger assembly and check valve (CV8).
1. Applicable models
• PQHY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A
• PQRY-P72, 96, 120YHMU-A
2. Parts to be serviced, Set-contents
No.
1

Water-cooled heat
exchanger assembly

2

Required materials

Parts to be replaced

Check valve (CV8)

Qty.

Water-cooled heat exchanger service parts kit
[Kit contents]
Instructions sheet
Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly

1 kit

Check valve service parts kit
[Kit contents]
Instructions sheet
Check valve assmbly
Connecting pipe

1 kit

1
1

1
1
1

3. Procedures
* Precautions for starting replacement
• Check that the main power supply is OFF.
• Check that no refrigerant is in the heat source unit.
Remove each part according to the 1)-3) procedures on the next page before replacing service parts.
Mount the removed parts back in place in a reversed procedures of 1)-3) on the next page after replacing service
parts.
(1) Water-cooled heat exchanger assembly replacement procedures
Removal procedures
1 Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support.
2 Hand the solenoid valve block support with wire from the beam so that it will not fall.
3 Remove the fastening plate and the screws holding the water-cooled heat exchanger, and
remove the braze
4 Pull the water-cooled heat exchanger forward toward the front of the unit.
Installation procedures
6 Install the water-cooled heat exchanger included in the replacement parts kit
7 Reinstall the fastening plate, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block
support, and the duct.
* Precautions for replacing water-cooled heat exchanger assembly
• Be sure to perform no-oxidation brazing when brazing.
• After brazing, check the condition around the brazing. After confirming no leakage, evacuate the air
inside. (*1)
• Perform brazing with care of the flame direction so that it does not burn cables and plates etc. in the unit.
*1: Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for detailed procedure.

HWE09080

- 349 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

2) Disconnect all wires inside the
control box, and remove the
control box.

1) Remove the service
panel and the water pipe
inlet/outlet panel.
3) Remove Frame M under the
control box.

If the compressor is accessible by removing the rear service panel, it may facilitate compressor replacement.
Remove the duct, solenoid valve block support, and INV heat exchanger support.
Suspend the solenoid valve block from the beam with wire so it will not fall. (Refer to the figure below at right. )
INV heat exchanger support

Suspend the solenoid valve block
from the beam with wire.

Duct

Solenoid
valve block

Solenoid
valve block

Beam
Solenoid valve
block support

Remove the water heat exchanger mounting bracket and the fixing screws (figure below at left), and debraze
the sections indicated with arrows in the figure below at right.
Pull the water heat exchanger out forward.
Debraze the sections here.

Water heat exchanger
mounting bracket
(2 screws)
2 fixing screws

Debraze the sections here.

Install the replacement water heat exchanger.
Reinstall the mounting bracket, fixing screws, INV heat exchanger support, solenoid valve block support, and
duct as they were.

HWE09080

- 350 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

(2) Replacement procedures for check valve assembly
● Removing the check valve assembly
Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the brazing flux
from the sections that are indicated with arrows.
Check the shape of the water heat exchanger pipe end. Depending on its shape, the pipe end needs to be cut.
When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit.
● Installing the check valve assembly
Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit.
Depending on the shape of the pipe end, the connecting pipe needs to be brazed to the pipe.
Screw the screws back on.
Notes on replacing the check valve assembly
Braze the pipes under a nitrogen purge to prevent oxidation.
Before heating the pipes, place a wet towel on the check valve to keep its temperature
below 120°C [248°F].
After brazing the pipes, check for leaks, and evacuate the air from the pipes. (*1)
Direct the flame away from the cables and sheet metals inside the unit so as not to burn
them.
*1 Refer to Chapter I [8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) for details.
Remove the check valve (CV8), elbow, and the pipe shown in the figure below at left by removing the
brazing flux from the sections that are indicated with arrows.
Remove the brazing flux. (2 places)

Check valve (CV8)

Section of the pipe to
be removed

Elbow
Before removal

After removal

The figures above are the views from behind to present a better view of the section to be removed.

HWE09080

- 351 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

2 Depending on the manufacturing period, the section of the pipe that is circled in the figure below at left (after the brazing
flux is removed) comes in two types.
If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below in the middle (Pipe type A), cut off 36 mm of the pipe at the
end. If the pipe end looks like the one in the figure below at right (Pipe type B), the pipe end needs not be cut off.
When cutting the pipe end, keep burrs from entering the refrigerant circuit.

36mm

Cut the pipe here.

Pipe type A

Pipe type B

3 Install the replacement check valve assembly on the unit.
When connecting the check valve assembly to the type of pipe shown in the figure above in the middle, braze
the connecting pipe that is included in the service parts kit to the check valve assembly.

Connecting pipe
Check valve assembly

*A connecting pipe is required only when the pipe section
that is circled in the figure above looks like the one shown in
the figure above in the middle entitled "Pipe type A."

4 Screw the screws back on.

HWE09080

- 352 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[7] Servicing the BC controller
1. Service panel
*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.
Work procedure

Explanatory figure

1) Remove the two lock nuts on the control box, loosen the
other two, and remove the control box.
2) Remove the three fixing screws on the service panel,
and remove the service panel.
3) Remove the nine machine screws on the ceiling panel,
and remove the ceiling panel.

Service panel

Loosen

Ceiling panel

Control Box

2. Control box
Work procedure

Explanatory figure

(1) To check the inside of the control box, remove the
two lock nuts on the control box cover.
1) Check the terminal connection of the power wire or of
the transmission line.
2) Check the transformer.
3) Check the address switch.
(2) When the control board is replaced, the followings
must be noted.
(1) Check that the board type is G,GA, or GB(HB).
(2) Check that the wire and the connector are properly connected.
It is not required to remove the two fixing screws on the
control box when checking the inside.

HWE09080

- 353 -

CMB-1016NU-G, GA

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
3. Thermistor (liquid pipe/gas pipe temperature detection)
*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.
Work procedure
(1)
1)
2)
(2)
1)
2)
(3)

(4)

Explanatory figure

Remove the service panel.
For TH11, TH12, and TH15, refer to 1. 1) - 2).
For TH16, refer to 1. 1) - 3) (GA type only)
Remove the lead wire of the piping sensor from the
control board.
TH11,TH12 (CN10)
TH15,TH16 (CN11)
Pull out the temperature sensor from the temperature sensor housing, and replace the temperature
sensor with the new one.
Connect the lead wire of the temperature sensor securely on the control board.

TH16

TH11

TH15
TH12
CMB-1016NU-GA

4. Pressure sensor
Work procedure

Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.
1) For the pressure sensors PS1 and PS3, refer to 1. 1) - 2)
(2) Remove the pressure sensor connector in trouble
from the control board, and insulate the connector.
1) Liquid-side pressure sensor (CNP1)
2) Intermediate-part pressure sensor (CNP3)
(3) Attach a new pressure sensor to the place which is
shown in the figure, and insert the connector to the
control board.

PS1

PS3

When gas leaks from the pressure sensor, repair the
leak, and follow the instructions above if required.

SVM1

HWE09080

- 354 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
5. LEV
Work procedure

Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3)
(2) Replace the LEV in trouble.
LEV3

Secure enough service space in the ceiling for welding
operation, and conduct the work carefully.If required,
dismount the unit from the ceiling, and conduct the work.

LEV1
LEV2

SVM2
SVM2b

6. Solenoid valve
*Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts.
Work procedure

Explanatory figure

(1) Remove the service panel.(Refer to 1. 1) - 3)
(2) Remove the connector of the solenoid valve in trouble.
(3) Remove the solenoid valve coil.
1) The coils on the solenoid valves SVA, SVB, SVM1 and
SVM2 can be serviced through the inspection door. SVC
is accessible for replacement by removing the four
mounting screws on the rear panel and removing the
panel (if enough space is available on the back). (SVM1
is present only on the G and GA types, SVM2 on the GA
type.)

Double-pipe heat exchanger

CMB-1016NU-G
Solenoid valve

CMB-1016NU-GA

HWE09080

- 355 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[8] Troubleshooting Using the Heat source Unit LED Error Display
If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW1 switches are set to OFF, check the items under the applicable item
numbers below.
1. Error code appears on the LED display.
Refer to IX [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.(page 230)
2. LED is blank.
Take the following troubleshooting steps.
(1) If the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC on the control board is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC,
refer to IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of heat source unit.
(2) If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except
CNDC disconnected, there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves.
(3) If nothing appears on the display under item (2) above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the
range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, control board failure is suspected.
3.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Only the software version appears on the LED display.
Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected.
Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board.(CNIT, CNS2, CN102)
If item 1) checks out OK, the transmission line power supply board failure is suspected.
If items 1) and 2) check out OK, control board failure is suspected.

(2) If the LED display appears as noted in "X [1] 2. LED display at Initial setting" (page 359)while the transmission cables
to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected, failure with the transmission cable or the connected equipment is suspected.

HWE09080

- 356 -

GB

X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board
[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ............................................................... 359

HWE09080

- 357 -

GB

- 358 -

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]
X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board

[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor
1. How to read the LED
By setting the DIP SW 1-1 through 1-10 (Switch number 10 is represented by 0), the operating condition of the unit can be
monitored on the service monitor. (Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings.)
The service monitor uses 4-digit 7-segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information.
7SEG LED
SW1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

ON

SW1-10 is represented as “0” in the table.

Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values, and operating conditions and the on-off status of solenoid valve
are examples of flag display.
1) Display of numerical values
Example: When the pressure data sensor reads 18.8kg/cm2 (Item No. 58)
The unit of pressure is in kg/cm2
 Use the following conversion formula to convert the displayed value into
a value in SI unit.
Value in SI unit (MPa) = Displayed value (kg/cm2) x 0.098
2) Flag display
Example: When 21S4a, 21S4b, SV1a are ON. (Item No. 3)
Upper
Lower

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

Example: 3-minutes restart mode (Item No. 14)

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

2. LED display at initial setting
From power on until the completion of initial settings, the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen.
(Displays No. 1 through No. 4 in order repeatedly.)
No

Item

Display

Remarks

Software version
1

[0103] : Version 1.03

Refrigerant type
2

[ 410] : R410A

Model and capacity

[H-20] : Cooling/Heating 20 HP
For the first few minutes after power on, the capacity of
each heat source unit is displayed. Thereafter, the
combined capacity is displayed.

3

Communication address
4

[ 51] : Address 51

After the initial settings have been completed, the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting
that corresponds to No. 517 in the LED display table.
Only item No. 1 "Software Version" appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed.
HWE09080

- 359 -

GB

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]
3. Time data storage function
The heat source unit has a simple clock function that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by
receiving the time set by the system controller, such as G(B)-50A.
If an error (including a preliminary error) occurs, the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service
memory.
The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED.
1) Use the time displayed on the service LED as a reference.
2) The date and the time are set to "00" by default. If a system controller that sets the time, such as G(B)-50A is not connected,
the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed.
If the time set on a system controller is received, the count will start from the set date and the time.
3) The time is not updated while the power of the heat source unit is turned off. When the power is turned off and then on again,
the count will resume from the time before the power was turned off. Thus, the time that differs the actual time will be displayed.
(This also applies when a power failure occurs.)
The system controller, such as G(B)-50A, adjusts the time once a day. When the system controller is connected, the time will
be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received. (The data stored
into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated.)
(1) Reading the time data:
1) Time display
Example: 12 past 9

* Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure, or if a
system controller that sets the time is not connected.
2) Date display
When the main controller that can set the time is connected
Example: May 10, 2003

Alternate display

Alternate display of year and month, and date
* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears
when the date is displayed.

When the main controller that can set the time is not connected
Example: 52 days after power was turned on

Alternate display

Day count

* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing
appears when the date is displayed.

HWE09080

- 360 -

GB

HWE09080

- 361 -

0110000000

1110000000

0001000000

1001000000

0101000000

6

7

8

9

10

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

LD4
72C

LD5

LD6

SV1a

0000 to 9999

CH11

SV4d

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

LD3

Contact point demand
capacity

Emergency
operation

SV7b

SV4b

LD2

0000 to 9999

Retry operation

SV7a

SV4a

21S4a

Comp in operation

LD1

Display

Communication demand capacity

Special control

Relay output display
3

Relay output display
2

Check (error) display 3
(Including IC and BC)

Check (error) display 2
OC/OS error

Check (error) display 1
OC/OS error

Relay output display 1
Lighting

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010000000

1100000000

3

5

0100000000

2

0010000000

1000000000

1

4

0000000000

1234567890

SW1

0

No.

Current data

LED monitor display

XLED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board

Communication error between the
OC and OS

SV9

OC

LD7

Communication error
3-minute restart delay
mode

Power supply for indoor
transmission line

CPU in operation

LD8

B

B

B

A

A

B

A

B

A

OC

B

A

A

A

B

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display.

If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display.

If no errors are detected,
"----" appears on the display.

Display of the latest preliminary error
If no preliminary errors
are detected, "----" appears on the display.

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 362 -

0011000000

1011000000

0111000000

1111000000

0000100000

1000100000

0100100000

1100100000

0010100000

1010100000

0110100000

1110100000

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Indoor unit
Operation
mode

Indoor unit
check

Unit No. 49

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 41

Bottom

Unit No. 33

Top

Unit No. 17
Unit No. 25

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 9

Unit No. 1

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 49

Top

Unit No. 33
Unit No. 41

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 25

Bottom

Unit No. 9
Unit No. 17

Top

Unit No. 1

BC operation signal

Contact
point demand

LD1

Bottom

Top

OC/OS identification

Heat source unit operation status

External signal
(Open input contact
point)

External signal
(Open input contact
point)

Item

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

Low-noise
mode
(Capacity
priority )

LD2

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

3-minutes
restart mode

LD3

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

LD5

Preliminary
error

Coolingheating
changeover
(Heating)

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

OC/OS

Compressor
in operation

Coolingheating
changeover
(Cooling)

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101000000

1234567890

SW1

11

No.

Current data

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

Error

LD6

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

3-minutes
restart after
instantaneous power
failure

Pump interlock (Contact: open)

LD7

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

Preliminary
low pressure error

Low-noise
mode
(Quiet priority)

LD8

B

B

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Lit during cooling
Lit during heating
Unlit while the unit is
stopped or in the fan
mode

The lamp that corresponds to the unit that
came to an abnormal stop
lights.
The lamp goes off when
the error is reset.
Each unit that comes to
an abnormal unit will be
given a sequential number in ascending order
starting with 1.

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 363 -

0010010000

1010010000

0110010000

1110010000

0001010000

1001010000

0101010000

1101010000

0011010000

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

Bottom

Heat source unit control
mode

Heat source unit Operation mode

Stop

Permissible
stop

Cooling-only
ON

Unit No. 49

Top

Unit No. 33
Unit No. 41

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 25

Bottom

Unit No. 9
Unit No. 17

Top

Unit No. 1

LD1

Bottom

Top

BC operation mode

Indoor unit
thermostat

Item

Refrigerant
recovery

Thermo OFF

Standby

Cooling-only
OFF

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

LD2

Abnormal
stop

Cooling

Heating-only
ON

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

LD3

Scheduled
control

Coolingmain

Heating-only
OFF

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

LD4

LD5

Initial start
up

Heating

Mixed-mode
ON

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1100010000

1111100000

31

35

0111100000

30

0100010000

1011100000

29

1000010000

0011100000

28

34

1101100000

27

33

0101100000

26

0000010000

1001100000

25

32

0001100000

1234567890

SW1

24

No.

Current data

Defrost

Heatingmain

Mixed-mode
OFF

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

LD6

Oil balance

Fan

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

LD7

Low frequency oil
recovery

Stop

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

LD8

A

A

A

B

B

OC

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Lit when thermostat is on
Unlit when thermostat is
off

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 364 -

1111110000

0000001000

1000001000

0100001000

1100001000

0010001000

1010001000

0110001000

1110001000

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

Low-pressure sensor
data

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

High-pressure sensor
data

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

THBOX

THHS1

THINV

TH8

TH5

TH2

TH6

TH7

TH3

TH4

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0111110000

56

62

1110110000

0001110000

55

1011110000

0110110000

54

0011110000

1010110000

53

61

0010110000

52

60

1100110000

51

1101110000

0100110000

50

59

1000110000

49

0101110000

0000110000

48

58

1111010000

47

1001110000

0111010000

46

57

1011010000

1234567890

SW1

45

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [kgf/cm2]

The unit is [°C]

Unit in [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 365 -

0101101000

1101101000

0011101000

1011101000

0111101000

1111101000

90

91

92

93

94

95

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

AK

All AK (OC+OS)

Comp operating frequency

COMP frequency

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD3

Total frequency of each
unit

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

Total frequencies
(OC+OS)

Te

Tc

Target Te

Target Tc

Qjh

Qjc

Qj

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001101000

1100101000

83

89

0100101000

82

0001101000

1000101000

81

88

0000101000

80

1110101000

1111001000

79

87

0111001000

78

0110101000

1011001000

77

86

0011001000

76

1010101000

1101001000

75

85

0101001000

74

0010101000

1001001000

73

84

0001001000

1234567890

SW1

72

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Unit in [rsp]
The inverter output current
(voltage) frequency will
equal the integer multiples
of the operating frequency
of the compressor.

Control data [ Hz ]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 366 -

1000011000

0100011000

1100011000

0010011000

1010011000

0110011000

1110011000

0001011000

1001011000

0101011000

1101011000

0011011000

1011011000

0111011000

1111011000

0000111000

1000111000

0100111000

1100111000

0010111000

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

Number of times the
unit went into the mode
to remedy wet vapor
suction

COMP bus voltage

COMP operating current (DC)

LEV2

LEV1

LEVINV

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

60 to 1400

0 to 480

0 to 480

LD5

0000 to 9999

00.0 to 999.9

00.0 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0000011000

1234567890

SW1

96

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is
[V]

Peak value[A]

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open:
1400)

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open: 480)

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open: 480)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 367 -

1000000100

0100000100

1100000100

129

130

131

Integrated operation
time of compressor (for
rotation purpose)
0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

Abnormal Td
rise

COMP number of startstop events
Lower 4 digits

Low-pressure drop

0000 to 9999

High-pressure drop

LD5

COMP number of startstop events
Upper 4 digits

Backup mode
Abnormal
pressure rise

LD4

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP Operation time
Lower 4 digits

LD2
0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP Operation time
Upper 4 digits

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0000000100

0011111000

124

128

1101111000

123

1111111000

0101111000

122

127

1001111000

121

0111111000

0001111000

120

126

1110111000

119

1011111000

0110111000

118

125

1010111000

1234567890

SW1

117

No.

Current data

Control box
temperature
rise

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

Count-up at start-up
The unit is [Time]

Stays lit for 90 seconds
after the completion of
backup control

The unit is
[h]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 368 -

1010000100

0110000100

1110000100

0001000100

1001000100

0101000100

1101000100

0011000100

1011000100

0111000100

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

Relay output display
BC(Sub1)

Relay output display
BC(Main)

SVA15

SVA13

Top

Bottom

SVA11

SVA9

Top

Bottom

SVA7

SVA5

Top

Bottom

SVA3

SVA1

Bottom

Top

SVA15

SVA13

Top

Bottom

SVA11

SVA9

Top

Bottom

SVA7

SVA5

Top

Bottom

SVA3

SVA1

SVM1

LD1

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Item

SVB15

SVB13

SVB11

SVB9

SVB7

SVB5

SVB3

SVB1

SVB15

SVB13

SVB11

SVB9

SVB7

SVB5

SVB3

SVB1

SVM2

LD2

SVC15

SVC13

SVC11

SVC9

SVC7

SVC5

SVC3

SVC1

SVC15

SVC13

SVC11

SVC9

SVC7

SVC5

SVC3

SVC1

SVM1b

LD3

SVA16

SVA14

SVA12

SVA10

SVA8

SVA6

SVA4

SVA2

SVA16

SVA14

SVA12

SVA10

SVA8

SVA6

SVA4

SVA2

SVM2b

LD4

Display

SVB16

SVB14

SVB12

SVB10

SVB8

SVB6

SVB4

SVB2

SVB16

SVB14

SVB12

SVB10

SVB8

SVB6

SVB4

SVB2

LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010000100

1234567890

SW1

132

No.

Current data

SVC16

SVC14

SVC12

SVC10

SVC8

SVC6

SVC4

SVC2

SVC16

SVC14

SVC12

SVC10

SVC8

SVC6

SVC4

SVC2

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1
Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 369 -

0011100100

1011100100

0111100100

1111100100

0000010100

1000010100

0100010100

1100010100

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

SVB16

SVB14

SVB12

SVB10

SVB8

SVB6

SVB4

SVB2

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9
-99.9 to 999.9

BC(Main)SH13

BC(Main)SC16

0000 to 2000

-99.9 to 999.9

BC(Sub1)LEV3

-99.9 to 999.9

BC(Sub1)TH15

0000 to 2000

BC(Sub1)TH12

BC(Main)LEV3

0000 to 2000

-99.9 to 999.9

BC(Main)SH12

BC(Main)LEV1

-99.9 to 999.9

BC(Main)SC11

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

SVA16

SVA14

SVA12

SVA10

SVA8

SVA6

SVA4

SVA2

LD4

BC(Main)PS3

SVC15

SVC13

SVC11

SVC9

SVC7

SVC5

SVC3

SVC1

LD3

-99.9 to 999.9

SVB15

SVB13

SVB11

SVB9

SVB7

SVB5

SVB3

SVB1

LD2

Display

BC(Main)PS1

BC(Main)TH16

BC(Main)TH15

BC(Main)TH12

SVA15

SVA13

Top

Bottom

SVA11

SVA9

Top

Bottom

SVA7

SVA5

Top

Bottom

SVA3

SVA1

LD1

Bottom

Top

BC(Main or standard)
TH11

Relay output display
BC(Sub2)

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100100

1110100100

151

156

0110100100

150

155

1010100100

149

0101100100

0010100100

148

154

1100100100

147

0001100100

0100100100

146

1001100100

1000100100

145

153

0000100100

144

152

1111000100

1234567890

SW1

143

No.

Current data

SVC16

SVC14

SVC12

SVC10

SVC8

SVC6

SVC4

SVC2

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

LEV3a opening
(Fully open:2000)

LEV3 opening
(Fully open:2000)

LEV1 opening
(Fully open:2000)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0101010100

1101010100

0011010100

1011010100

0111010100

170

171

172

173

174

- 370 -

LD4

LD5

BC(Main)LEV2

BC(Sub2)LEV3

0000 to 2000

0000 to 2000

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

BC(Sub2)TH25

LD2
-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

BC(Sub2)TH12

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000110100

1001010100

169

0000110100

0001010100

168

177

1110010100

167

176

0110010100

166

1111010100

1010010100

165

175

0010010100

1234567890

SW1

164

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

LEV2 opening
(Fully open:2000)

LEV3a opening
(Fully open:2000)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 371 -

0100001100

1100001100

0010001100

1010001100

0110001100

1110001100

0001001100

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

LD5

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

LD4

Error details of inverter

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

LD3

Error history of inverter
(At the time of last data
backup before error)

LD2

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

LD1

Display

Error details of inverter

Error history 10

Error details of inverter

Error history 9

Error details of inverter

Error history 8

Error details of inverter

Error history 7

Error details of inverter

Error history 6

Error details of inverter

Error history 5

Error details of inverter

Error history 4

Error details of inverter

Error history 3

Error details of inverter

Error history 2

Error details of inverter

Error history 1

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000001100

193

189

0000001100

0011110100

1011110100

188

1111110100

1101110100

187

192

0101110100

186

191

1001110100

185

0111110100

0001110100

184

190

0110110100

1010110100

181

1110110100

0010110100

180

183

1100110100

179

182

0100110100

1234567890

SW1

178

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

OC

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Address and error codes
highlighted
If no errors are detected,
"---- " appears on the display.
Preliminary error information of the OS does not
appear on the OC.
Neither preliminary error
information of the OC nor
error information of the IC
appears on the OS.

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 372 -

0010101100

1010101100

0110101100

1110101100

212

213

214

215

Relay output display
3
Lighting

Relay output display
2
Lighting

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Relay output display 1
Lighting

Heat source unit control
mode

Heat source unit Operation mode

BC operation mode

OC/OS identification

Heat source unit operation status

Item

SV7a

SV4a

21S4a

Comp in operation

Stop

Permissible
stop

Cooling-only
ON

BC operation signal

LD1

SV7b

SV4b

Refrigerant
recovery

Thermo OFF

Standby

Cooling-only
OFF

LD2

CH11

Abnormal
stop

Cooling

Heating-only
ON

3-minutes
restart mode

LD3

Preliminary
error

LD5

Scheduled
control

Coolingmain

Heating-only
OFF

SV1a

72C

Initial start
up

Heating

Mixed-mode
ON

OC/OS-1/OS-2

Compressor
in operation

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1100101100

211

1111001100

207

0100101100

0111001100

206

210

1011001100

205

1000101100

0011001100

204

209

1101001100

203

0000101100

0101001100

202

208

1001001100

1234567890

SW1

201

No.

Error history

SV4d

Heatingmain

Mixed-mode
OFF

Error

LD6

SV9

OC

Oil balance

Fan

3-minutes
restart after
instantaneous power
failure

LD7

Lit while
power to the
indoor units
is being supplied

Always lit

Low frequency oil
recovery

Stop

Preliminary
low pressure error

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 373 -

0101011100

1101011100

0011011100

1011011100

0111011100

1111011100

0000111100

1000111100

0100111100

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

Low-pressure sensor
data

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

High-pressure sensor
data

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

THBOX

THHS1

THINV

TH8

TH5

TH2

TH6

TH7

TH3

TH4

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001011100

1100011100

227

233

0100011100

226

0001011100

1000011100

225

1110011100

0000011100

224

232

1111101100

223

231

0111101100

222

0110011100

1011101100

221

230

0011101100

220

1010011100

1101101100

219

229

0101101100

218

0010011100

1001101100

217

228

0001101100

1234567890

SW1

216

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [kgf/cm2]

The unit is [°C]

Unit in [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 374 -

1010000010

0110000010

1110000010

0001000010

1001000010

0101000010

1101000010

0011000010

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

AK

All AK (OC+OS)

Comp operating frequency

COMP frequency

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD3

Total frequency of each
unit

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

Total frequencies
(OC+OS)

Te

Tc

Target Te

Target Tc

Qjh

Qjc

Qj

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010000010

0111111100

254

260

1011111100

253

1100000010

0011111100

252

259

1101111100

251

0100000010

0101111100

250

258

1001111100

249

1000000010

0001111100

248

257

1110111100

247

0000000010

0110111100

246

256

1010111100

245

1111111100

0010111100

244

255

1100111100

1234567890

SW1

243

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Unit in [rps]

Control data
[ Hz ]

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 375 -

0111000010

1111000010

0000100010

1000100010

0100100010

1100100010

0010100010

1010100010

0110100010

1110100010

0001100010

1001100010

0101100010

1101100010

0011100010

1011100010

0111100010

1111100010

0000010010

1000010010

0100010010

1100010010

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

60 to 1400

0 to 480

0 to 480

LD5

00.0 to 999.9

00.0 to 999.9

LD4

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP Operation time
Lower 4 digits

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP Operation time
Upper 4 digits

COMP bus voltage

COMP operating current (DC)

LEV2

LEV1

LEVINV

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011000010

1234567890

SW1

269

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

The unit is [ V ]

Peak value[A]

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open:
1400)

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open: 480)

Heat source unit LEV
opening (Fully open: 480)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

1010010010

0110010010

1110010010

0001010010

1001010010

0101010010

1101010010

0011010010

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

LD4

LD5

Integrated operation
time of compressor (for
rotation purpose)
0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP number of startstop events
Lower 4 digits

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP number of startstop events
Upper 4 digits

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010010010

1234567890

SW1

292

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

OC

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

Count-up at start-up
The unit is [Time]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 376 -

HWE09080

- 377 -

1110110010

0001110010

1001110010

0101110010

1101110010

0011110010

1011110010

0111110010

1111110010

0000001010

1000001010

0100001010

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

BC(Main)PS3

BC(Main)PS1

BC(Main)TH16

BC(Main)TH15

BC(Main)TH12

BC(Main)TH11

Start-up unit

Power supply unit

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address

OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1110001010

0110110010

310

0110001010

1010110010

309

327

0010110010

308

326

1100110010

307

1010001010

0100110010

306

325

1000110010

305

1100001010

0000110010

304

0010001010

1111010010

303

324

0111010010

323

1011010010

302

1234567890

SW1

301

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 378 -

0101101010

1101101010

0011101010

1011101010

0111101010

346

347

348

349

350

BC(Main)LEV2

BC(Sub2)LEV3

BC(Sub2)TH25

BC(Sub2)TH12

BC(Sub1)LEV3

BC(Sub1)TH15

BC(Sub1)TH12

BC(Main)LEV3

BC(Main)LEV1

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 2000

0000 to 2000

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 2000

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 2000

0000 to 2000

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001101010

345

339

0001101010

1100101010

338

344

0100101010

337

1110101010

1000101010

336

343

0000101010

335

0110101010

1111001010

334

1010101010

0111001010

333

342

1011001010

332

341

0011001010

331

0010101010

1101001010

330

340

1001001010

0101001010

329

0001001010

1234567890

SW1

328

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1
Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 379 -

0000011010

1000011010

0100011010

1100011010

0010011010

1010011010

0110011010

1110011010

0001011010

1001011010

0101011010

1101011010

0011011010

1011011010

0111011010

1111011010

353

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

IC17 Address/capacity code

IC16 Address/capacity code

IC15 Address/capacity code

IC14 Address/capacity code

IC13 Address/capacity code

IC12 Address/capacity code

IC11 Address/capacity code

IC10 Address/capacity code

IC9 Address/capacity code

IC8 Address/capacity code

IC7 Address/capacity code

IC6 Address/capacity code

IC5 Address/capacity code

IC4 Address/capacity code

IC3 Address/capacity code

IC2 Address/capacity code

IC1 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1111101010

352

1234567890

SW1

351

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 380 -

0100000110

1100000110

0010000110

1010000110

0110000110

1110000110

0001000110

1001000110

0101000110

1101000110

387

388

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

IC45 Address/capacity code

IC44 Address/capacity code

IC43 Address/capacity code

IC42 Address/capacity code

IC41 Address/capacity code

IC40 Address/capacity code

IC39 Address/capacity code

IC38 Address/capacity code

IC37 Address/capacity code

IC36 Address/capacity code

IC35 Address/capacity code

IC34 Address/capacity code

IC33 Address/capacity code

IC32 Address/capacity code

IC31 Address/capacity code

IC30 Address/capacity code

IC29 Address/capacity code

IC28 Address/capacity code

IC27 Address/capacity code

IC26 Address/capacity code

IC25 Address/capacity code

IC24 Address/capacity code

IC23 Address/capacity code

IC22 Address/capacity code

IC21 Address/capacity code

IC20 Address/capacity code

IC19 Address/capacity code

IC18 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000000110

386

1101111010

379

385

0101111010

378

0000000110

1001111010

377

384

0001111010

376

1111111010

1110111010

375

383

0110111010

374

0111111010

1010111010

373

1011111010

0010111010

372

382

1100111010

371

381

0100111010

370

0011111010

1000111010

369

380

0000111010

1234567890

SW1

368

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0010100110

1010100110

0110100110

1110100110

404

405

406

407

- 381 -

IC4 Suction temperature

IC3 Suction temperature

IC2 Suction temperature

IC1 Suction temperature

IC50 Address/capacity code

IC49 Address/capacity code

IC48 Address/capacity code

IC47 Address/capacity code

IC46 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100110

1100100110

403

411

0100100110

402

0101100110

1000100110

401

1001100110

0000100110

400

410

1111000110

399

409

0111000110

398

0001100110

1011000110

397

408

0011000110

1234567890

SW1

396

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 382 -

0011010110

1011010110

0111010110

1111010110

0000110110

1000110110

0100110110

1100110110

428

429

430

431

432

433

434

435

IC28 Suction temperature

IC27 Suction temperature

IC26 Suction temperature

IC25 Suction temperature

IC24 Suction temperature

IC23 Suction temperature

IC22 Suction temperature

IC21 Suction temperature

IC20 Suction temperature

IC19 Suction temperature

IC18 Suction temperature

IC17 Suction temperature

IC16 Suction temperature

IC15 Suction temperature

IC14 Suction temperature

IC13 Suction temperature

IC12 Suction temperature

IC11 Suction temperature

IC10 Suction temperature

IC9 Suction temperature

IC8 Suction temperature

IC7 Suction temperature

IC6 Suction temperature

IC5 Suction temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101010110

427

1110010110

423

0101010110

0110010110

422

1001010110

1010010110

421

426

0010010110

420

425

1100010110

419

0001010110

0100010110

418

424

0000010110

1111100110

415

1000010110

0111100110

414

417

1011100110

413

416

0011100110

1234567890

SW1

412

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 383 -

0110001110

1110001110

0001001110

1001001110

0101001110

1101001110

0011001110

1011001110

0111001110

1111001110

455

456

457

458

459

460

461

462

463

IC6 Liquid pipe temperature

IC5 Liquid pipe temperature

IC4 Liquid pipe temperature

IC3 Liquid pipe temperature

IC2 Liquid pipe temperature

IC1 Liquid pipe temperature

IC50 Suction temperature

IC49 Suction temperature

IC48 Suction temperature

IC47 Suction temperature

IC46 Suction temperature

IC45 Suction temperature

IC44 Suction temperature

IC43 Suction temperature

IC42 Suction temperature

IC41 Suction temperature

IC40 Suction temperature

IC39 Suction temperature

IC38 Suction temperature

IC37 Suction temperature

IC36 Suction temperature

IC35 Suction temperature

IC34 Suction temperature

IC33 Suction temperature

IC32 Suction temperature

IC31 Suction temperature

IC30 Suction temperature

IC29 Suction temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010001110

454

1111110110

447

453

0111110110

446

0010001110

1011110110

445

452

0011110110

444

1100001110

1101110110

443

451

0101110110

442

0100001110

1001110110

441

1000001110

0001110110

440

450

1110110110

439

449

0110110110

438

0000001110

1010110110

437

448

0010110110

1234567890

SW1

436

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 384 -

0100011110

1100011110

0010011110

1010011110

0110011110

1110011110

0001011110

1001011110

0101011110

1101011110

483

484

485

486

487

488

489

490

491

IC34 Liquid pipe temperature

IC33 Liquid pipe temperature

IC32 Liquid pipe temperature

IC31 Liquid pipe temperature

IC30 Liquid pipe temperature

IC29 Liquid pipe temperature

IC28 Liquid pipe temperature

IC27 Liquid pipe temperature

IC26 Liquid pipe temperature

IC25 Liquid pipe temperature

IC24 Liquid pipe temperature

IC23 Liquid pipe temperature

IC22 Liquid pipe temperature

IC21 Liquid pipe temperature

IC20 Liquid pipe temperature

IC19 Liquid pipe temperature

IC18 Liquid pipe temperature

IC17 Liquid pipe temperature

IC16 Liquid pipe temperature

IC15 Liquid pipe temperature

IC14 Liquid pipe temperature

IC13 Liquid pipe temperature

IC12 Liquid pipe temperature

IC11 Liquid pipe temperature

IC10 Liquid pipe temperature

IC9 Liquid pipe temperature

IC8 Liquid pipe temperature

IC7 Liquid pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000011110

482

1101101110

475

481

0101101110

474

0000011110

1001101110

473

480

0001101110

472

1111101110

1110101110

471

479

0110101110

470

0111101110

1010101110

469

1011101110

0010101110

468

478

1100101110

467

477

0100101110

466

0011101110

1000101110

465

476

0000101110

1234567890

SW1

464

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 385 -

0111111110

1111111110

511

IC50 Liquid pipe temperature

IC49 Liquid pipe temperature

IC48 Liquid pipe temperature

IC47 Liquid pipe temperature

IC46 Liquid pipe temperature

IC45 Liquid pipe temperature

IC44 Liquid pipe temperature

IC43 Liquid pipe temperature

IC42 Liquid pipe temperature

IC41 Liquid pipe temperature

IC40 Liquid pipe temperature

IC39 Liquid pipe temperature

IC38 Liquid pipe temperature

IC37 Liquid pipe temperature

IC36 Liquid pipe temperature

IC35 Liquid pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011111110

510

1110111110

503

509

0110111110

502

0011111110

1010111110

501

508

0010111110

500

1101111110

1100111110

499

507

0100111110

498

0101111110

1000111110

497

1001111110

0000111110

496

506

1111011110

495

505

0111011110

494

0001111110

1011011110

493

504

0011011110

1234567890

SW1

492

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0001000001

1001000001

0101000001

520

521

522

OC address

Version/Capacity

OS address

BC/BS/TU address

RC address

IC/FU address

Self-address

Item
LD1

LD4

LD5

LD6

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Alternate display of self address and unit model

LD3

LD7

OC address display

S/W version -> Refrigerant type -> Model and capacity -> Communication address

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0110000001

1110000001

519

1010000001

517

518

1100000001

0010000001

0100000001

514

516

1000000001

515

0000000001

513

1234567890

SW1

512

No.

Setting data

LD8

A

B

B

B

B

A

OC

B

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 386 -

HWE09080

- 387 -

0011000001

1011000001

0111000001

1111000001

0000100001

1000100001

0100100001

1100100001

0010100001

1010100001

0110100001

1110100001

0001100001

1001100001

0101100001

1101100001

0011100001

1011100001

0111100001

1111100001

0000010001

1000010001

0100010001

1100010001

0010010001

1010010001

525

526

527

528

529

530

531

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

549

IC27 Gas pipe temperature

IC26 Gas pipe temperature

IC25 Gas pipe temperature

IC24 Gas pipe temperature

IC23 Gas pipe temperature

IC22 Gas pipe temperature

IC21 Gas pipe temperature

IC20 Gas pipe temperature

IC19 Gas pipe temperature

IC18 Gas pipe temperature

IC17 Gas pipe temperature

IC16 Gas pipe temperature

IC15 Gas pipe temperature

IC14 Gas pipe temperature

IC13 Gas pipe temperature

IC12 Gas pipe temperature

IC11 Gas pipe temperature

IC10 Gas pipe temperature

IC9 Gas pipe temperature

IC8 Gas pipe temperature

IC7 Gas pipe temperature

IC6 Gas pipe temperature

IC5 Gas pipe temperature

IC4 Gas pipe temperature

IC3 Gas pipe temperature

IC2 Gas pipe temperature

IC1 Gas pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101000001

524

1234567890

SW1

523

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 388 -

0010110001

1010110001

564

565

IC50 Gas pipe temperature

IC49 Gas pipe temperature

IC48 Gas pipe temperature

IC47 Gas pipe temperature

IC46 Gas pipe temperature

IC45 Gas pipe temperature

IC44 Gas pipe temperature

IC43 Gas pipe temperature

IC42 Gas pipe temperature

IC41 Gas pipe temperature

IC40 Gas pipe temperature

IC39 Gas pipe temperature

IC38 Gas pipe temperature

IC37 Gas pipe temperature

IC36 Gas pipe temperature

IC35 Gas pipe temperature

IC34 Gas pipe temperature

IC33 Gas pipe temperature

IC32 Gas pipe temperature

IC31 Gas pipe temperature

IC30 Gas pipe temperature

IC29 Gas pipe temperature

IC28 Gas pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0011110001

1100110001

563

572

0100110001

562

1101110001

1000110001

561

571

0000110001

560

0101110001

1111010001

559

1001110001

0111010001

558

570

1011010001

557

569

0011010001

556

0001110001

1101010001

555

568

0101010001

554

0110110001

1001010001

553

1110110001

0001010001

552

567

1110010001

551

566

0110010001

1234567890

SW1

550

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 389 -

0111110001

1111110001

0000001001

1000001001

0100001001

1100001001

0010001001

1010001001

0110001001

1110001001

0001001001

1001001001

0101001001

1101001001

0011001001

1011001001

0111001001

1111001001

0000101001

1000101001

0100101001

1100101001

0010101001

1010101001

0110101001

1110101001

575

576

577

578

579

580

581

582

583

584

585

586

587

588

589

590

591

592

593

594

595

596

597

598

599

IC27SH

IC26SH

IC25SH

IC24SH

IC23SH

IC22SH

IC21SH

IC20SH

IC19SH

IC18SH

IC17SH

IC16SH

IC15SH

IC14SH

IC13SH

IC12SH

IC11SH

IC10SH

IC9SH

IC8SH

IC7SH

IC6SH

IC5SH

IC4SH

IC3SH

IC2SH

IC1SH

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011110001

574

1234567890

SW1

573

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 390 -

0101011001

1101011001

0011011001

1011011001

0111011001

619

620

621

622

IC50SH

IC49SH

IC48SH

IC47SH

IC46SH

IC45SH

IC44SH

IC43SH

IC42SH

IC41SH

IC40SH

IC39SH

IC38SH

IC37SH

IC36SH

IC35SH

IC34SH

IC33SH

IC32SH

IC31SH

IC30SH

IC29SH

IC28SH

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001011001

618

1100011001

611

617

0100011001

610

0001011001

1000011001

609

616

0000011001

608

1110011001

1111101001

607

615

0111101001

606

0110011001

1011101001

605

1010011001

0011101001

604

614

1101101001

603

613

0101101001

602

0010011001

1001101001

601

612

0001101001

1234567890

SW1

600

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 391 -

0000111001

1000111001

0100111001

1100111001

0010111001

1010111001

0110111001

1110111001

0001111001

1001111001

0101111001

1101111001

0011111001

1011111001

0111111001

1111111001

0000000101

1000000101

0100000101

1100000101

0010000101

1010000101

0110000101

1110000101

0001000101

1001000101

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

632

633

634

635

636

637

638

639

640

641

642

643

644

645

646

647

648

649

IC27SC

IC26SC

IC25SC

IC24SC

IC23SC

IC22SC

IC21SC

IC20SC

IC19SC

IC18SC

IC17SC

IC16SC

IC15SC

IC14SC

IC13SC

IC12SC

IC11SC

IC10SC

IC9SC

IC8SC

IC7SC

IC6SC

IC5SC

IC4SC

IC3SC

IC2SC

IC1SC

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1111011001

624

1234567890

SW1

623

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 392 -

0011100101

1011100101

0111100101

1111100101

0000010101

1000010101

0100010101

1100010101

669

670

671

672

673

674

675

IC50SC

IC49SC

IC48SC

IC47SC

IC46SC

IC45SC

IC44SC

IC43SC

IC42SC

IC41SC

IC40SC

IC39SC

IC38SC

IC37SC

IC36SC

IC35SC

IC34SC

IC33SC

IC32SC

IC31SC

IC30SC

IC29SC

IC28SC

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100101

668

1010100101

661

667

0010100101

660

0101100101

1100100101

659

666

0100100101

658

1001100101

1000100101

657

665

0000100101

656

0001100101

1111000101

655

1110100101

0111000101

654

664

1011000101

653

663

0011000101

652

0110100101

1101000101

651

662

0101000101

1234567890

SW1

650

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0110010101

1110010101

0001010101

1001010101

0101010101

1101010101

0011010101

1011010101

0111010101

1111010101

678

679

680

681

682

683

684

685

686

687

INV board S/W version

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0.00 to 99.99

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010010101

1010010101

677

1234567890

SW1

676

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8
A

OC
A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 393 -

HWE09080

- 394 -

Time of error detection 6-2

Time of error detection 6

Time of error detection 5-2

Time of error detection 5

Time of error detection 4-2

Time of error detection 4

Time of error detection 3-2

Time of error detection 3

Time of error detection 2-2

Time of error detection 2

Time of error detection 1-2

Time of error detection 1

Current time -2

Current time

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011110101

701

0001110101

696

0011110101

1110110101

695

700

0110110101

694

1101110101

1010110101

693

699

0010110101

692

0101110101

1100110101

691

698

0100110101

690

1001110101

1000110101

689

697

0000110101

1234567890

SW1

688

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8
A

OC
A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0010001101

1010001101

0110001101

708

709

710

- 395 -

Time of last data backup before error -2

Time of last data backup before error

Time of error detection 10-2

Time of error detection 10

Time of error detection 9-2

Time of error detection 9

Time of error detection 8-2

Time of error detection 8

Time of error detection 7-2

Time of error detection 7

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001001101

1100001101

707

713

0100001101

706

0001001101

1000001101

705

712

0000001101

704

1110001101

1111110101

703

711

0111110101

1234567890

SW1

702

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8
A

OC
A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 396 -

1101001101

0011001101

1011001101

0111001101

1111001101

0000101101

1000101101

0100101101

1100101101

0010101101

1010101101

0110101101

1110101101

0001101101

1001101101

0101101101

1101101101

0011101101

1011101101

0111101101

1111101101

0000011101

1000011101

0100011101

1100011101

0010011101

716

717

718

719

720

721

722

723

724

725

726

727

728

729

730

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

739

740

IC27 LEV opening

IC26 LEV opening

IC25 LEV opening

IC24 LEV opening

IC23 LEV opening

IC22 LEV opening

IC21 LEV opening

IC20 LEV opening

IC19 LEV opening

IC18 LEV opening

IC17 LEV opening

IC16 LEV opening

IC15 LEV opening

IC14 LEV opening

IC13 LEV opening

IC12 LEV opening

IC11 LEV opening

IC10 LEV opening

IC9 LEV opening

IC8 LEV opening

IC7 LEV opening

IC6 LEV opening

IC5 LEV opening

IC4 LEV opening

IC3 LEV opening

IC2 LEV opening

IC1 LEV opening

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0101001101

715

1234567890

SW1

714

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Fully open: 2000

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 397 -

1110111101

0001111101

1001111101

0101111101

1101111101

760

761

762

763

IC50 LEV opening

IC49 LEV opening

IC48 LEV opening

IC47 LEV opening

IC46 LEV opening

IC45 LEV opening

IC44 LEV opening

IC43 LEV opening

IC42 LEV opening

IC41 LEV opening

IC40 LEV opening

IC39 LEV opening

IC38 LEV opening

IC37 LEV opening

IC36 LEV opening

IC35 LEV opening

IC34 LEV opening

IC33 LEV opening

IC32 LEV opening

IC31 LEV opening

IC30 LEV opening

IC29 LEV opening

IC28 LEV opening

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0110111101

759

0000111101

752

758

1111011101

751

1010111101

0111011101

750

757

1011011101

749

0010111101

0011011101

748

756

1101011101

747

1100111101

0101011101

746

0100111101

1001011101

745

755

0001011101

744

754

1110011101

743

1000111101

0110011101

742

753

1010011101

1234567890

SW1

741

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Fully open: 2000

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

1111111101

0000000011

766

767

768

IC5 Operation mode

IC4 Operation mode

IC3Operation mode

IC2 Operation mode

IC1 Operation mode

Item
LD1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011111101

0111111101

765

0011111101

1234567890

SW1

764

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

When WR2 is used, the
four LDs on the left (LD14) display operation
mode, and the four LDs
on the right (LD5-LD8)
display port address.
(Displayed alternately every five seconds)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 398 -

HWE09080

- 399 -

1100100011

0010100011

1010100011

0110100011

1110100011

0001100011

1001100011

0101100011

1101100011

0011100011

788

789

790

791

792

793

794

795

796

IC33 Operation mode

IC32 Operation mode

IC31 Operation mode

IC30 Operation mode

IC29 Operation mode

IC28 Operation mode

IC27 Operation mode

IC26 Operation mode

IC25 Operation mode

IC24 Operation mode

IC23 Operation mode

IC22 Operation mode

IC21 Operation mode

IC20 Operation mode

IC19 Operation mode

IC18 Operation mode

IC17 Operation mode

IC16 Operation mode

IC15 Operation mode

IC14 Operation mode

IC13 Operation mode

IC12 Operation mode

IC11 Operation mode

IC10 Operation mode

IC9 Operation mode

IC8 Operation mode

IC7 Operation mode

IC6 Operation mode

Item
LD1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0100100011

787

0011000011

780

786

1101000011

779

1000100011

0101000011

778

785

1001000011

777

0000100011

0001000011

776

784

1110000011

775

1111000011

0110000011

774

0111000011

1010000011

773

783

0010000011

772

782

1100000011

771

1011000011

0100000011

770

781

1000000011

1234567890

SW1

769

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

When WR2 is used, the
four LDs on the left
(LD1-4) display operation mode, and the four
LDs on the right (LD5LD8) display port address.
(Displayed alternately
every five seconds)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

1110010011

0001010011

807

808

- 400 -

0000110011

1000110011

0100110011

1100110011

0010110011

1010110011

0110110011

1110110011

0001110011

815

816

817

818

819

820

821

822

823

824

IC11 filter

IC10 filter

IC9 filter

IC8 filter

IC7 filter

IC6 filter

IC5 filter

IC4 filter

IC3 filter

IC2 filter

IC1 filter

IC50 Operation mode

IC49 Operation mode

IC48 Operation mode

IC47 Operation mode

IC46 Operation mode

IC45 Operation mode

IC44 Operation mode

IC43 Operation mode

IC42 Operation mode

IC41 Operation mode

IC40 Operation mode

IC39 Operation mode

IC38 Operation mode

IC37 Operation mode

IC36 Operation mode

IC35 Operation mode

IC34 Operation mode

Item
LD1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0111010011

1111010011

814

1011010011

0110010011

806

813

1010010011

805

0011010011

0010010011

804

812

1100010011

803

1101010011

0100010011

802

0101010011

1000010011

801

811

0000010011

800

810

1111100011

799

1001010011

0111100011

798

809

1011100011

1234567890

SW1

797

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

When WR2 is used, the
four LDs on the left
(LD1-4) display operation mode, and the four
LDs on the right (LD5LD8) display port address.
(Displayed alternately
every five seconds)

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 401 -

1101001011

0011001011

1011001011

0111001001

1111001011

0000101011

1000101011

0100101011

1100101011

0010101011

844

845

846

847

848

849

850

851

852

IC39 filter

IC38 filter

IC37 filter

IC36 filter

IC35 filter

IC34 filter

IC33 filter

IC32 filter

IC31 filter

IC30 filter

IC29 filter

IC28 filter

IC27 filter

IC26 filter

IC25 filter

IC24 filter

IC23 filter

IC22 filter

IC21 filter

IC20 filter

IC19 filter

IC18 filter

IC17 filter

IC16 filter

IC15 filter

IC14 filter

IC13 filter

IC12 filter

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0101001011

843

0010001011

836

842

1100001011

835

1001001011

0100001011

834

841

1000001011

833

0001001011

0000001011

832

840

1111110011

831

1110001011

0111110011

830

0110001011

1011110011

829

839

0011110011

828

838

1101110011

827

1010001011

0101110011

826

837

1001110011

1234567890

SW1

825

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

0110101011

1110101011

0001101011

1001101011

0101101011

1101101011

0011101011

1011101011

0111101011

1111101011

854

855

856

857

858

859

860

861

862

863

IC50 filter

IC49 filter

IC48 filter

IC47 filter

IC46 filter

IC45 filter

IC44 filter

IC43 filter

IC42 filter

IC41 filter

IC40 filter

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010101011

1234567890

SW1

853

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

- 402 -

HWE09080

- 403 -

1111011011

0000111011

1000111011

0100111011

1100111011

0010111011

1010111011

0110111011

1110111011

879

880

881

882

883

884

885

886

887

0 to 254
0 to 254

Control board
Reset counter

INV board
Reset counter

-99.9 to 999.9

LD5

Power factor phase angle 1

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

W-phase current effective value 1

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

U-phase current effective value 1

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0111011011

1001011011

873

878

0001011011

872

1011011011

1110011011

871

0011011011

0110011011

870

877

1010011011

869

876

0010011011

868

1101011011

1100011011

867

875

0100011011

866

0101011011

1000011011

874

0000011011

865

1234567890

SW1

864

No.

Other types of data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ time ]

The unit is [ deg ]

The unit is [ A ]

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

HWE09080

- 404 -

0101000111

1101000111

0011111111

1011111111

0111111111

1111111111

907

1020

1021

1022

1023

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001000111

906

1100000111

899

905

0100000111

898

0001000111

1000000111

897

904

0000000111

896

1110000111

1111111011

895

903

0111111011

894

0110000111

1011111011

893

1010000111

0011111011

892

902

1101111011

891

901

0101111011

890

0010000111

1001111011

889

900

0001111011

1234567890

SW1

888

No.

Other types of data

LD6

LD7

LD8

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Remarks

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Heat source Unit Board ]

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Modify Date                     : 2009:11:30 16:23:22+09:00
Create Date                     : 2009:11:30 16:16:20+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:11:30 16:23:22+09:00
GTS PDFX Version                : PDF/X-1:2001
Trapped                         : False
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
GTS PDFX Conformance            : PDF/X-1a:2001
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 0000001653.book
Creator                         : 1033204
Document ID                     : uuid:2d7f0cc2-6149-4506-8559-a2eeda9f4671
Instance ID                     : uuid:df0474ae-abfb-4346-a134-3b4eda38d987
Page Count                      : 414
Author                          : 1033204

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Haier R410A 0000001653 User Manual To The Fafb00f1 4123 49b3 A856 717a53959ad0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation